Home

SERVICE MANUAL for the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100

1. TO DIGITAL MODALITY TO VIDEO MODALITY RS 485 DATA 75 ohm CABLE 10 m or COAX CABLE 45 m 10 m or 45 m 5 5 c S 9 6 RS 485 95 3 8 0 45 ADAPTER 5 p z CABLE 95 1m 8 98 ay 32 117 D sji Zr 8 8 5 amp gt y ME gt y T DIGITAL ADAPTER at CABLE COLOR VIDEO VIDEO COLOR INTERFACE ADAPTER VIDEO CABLE INTERFACE und b 8 m or 20 M M TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD To UPS AUTOFILMING CABLE See d KAS Note below AES COM 5 SERVICE N and EXT OO MODEM TELCO RJ11 2 5 3 PHONE optional COM2 not used DIE e f Ew EA COM PORT e lot T ADAPTER m CABLE rir 2 o C o 3 SLOT BOARD oC e 4 1 VIDEO ADAPTER 5 n 2 INTERNAL MODEM Ethernet 3 SERIAL INTERFACE EE CUSTOMER 4 INPUT 1 DIGITAL or VIDEO NETWORK 5 INPUT 2 DIGITAL or VIDEO H180_0057ECA 6 BLANK H180_0057EC b gt Note For information on Autofilming CABLES e See Figure 3 23 for connections to a VIDEO MODALITY e See Figures 3 25 through 3 28 for connections to a DIGITAL MODALITY gt Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 3 10 NOV 200
2. EEL COME KevpadvCOM E video Bd 1 Ch 1 vidbl Acuson 128 amp P 3 4 10 2 5 Configuration Add Modify Delete Autofilrina Keypad Modality Into Parameters Note Changing parameters in the following procedure will take the system off line 2 To display the Parameters Touchscreen Keypad window click e Keypad Modify OK Parameters Touchscreen Keypad Operating Language Date Format Store Connector Enmmesn Modality 3 In the Store Connection panel select Modality 4 Click OK 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 75 SERVICE MANUAL 7 76 This page is intentionally blank NOV 2003 8E8820 Section 8 Obtaining Optimum Images Introduction This section includes procedures for obtaining optimum images after initial configuration of the MIM The procedures apply to images sent to the Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER PLUS Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER STANDARD Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER Kodak
3. 14 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 System Description Section 1 System Description Introduction This manual provides instructions for installation and maintenance of Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGERS MIMs with V 6 1 and higher software These systems include the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 MIM 100 Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER 25 PS gt Note The name MIM as used this manual applies to all of the above devices Note For MIM service manuals that apply to software versions older than V_6 1 See Documentation on Page 1 16 How to Use this Manual This manual includes 14 sections e Section 1 provides a general description of MIMs Section 2 describes the hardware and software used as tools for installation and service e Sections 3 through 9 provide instructions for installing and setting up MIM SYSTEMS The Field Engineer FE will not need all of these sections for every MIM The sections cover types of MIM PRINT SERVER MODALITY SERVER or COMBINATION BOX See Figure 1 1 For example to install a MODALITY SERVER reference to Sections 5 and 6 is not necessary e Section 10 includes procedures for changing MIM configurations e Section 11 includes procedures for troubleshooting a MIM e Section 12 provides parts information for V 6 1 and higher software e Section 13 provides add
4. Item Description Range Media Info Select Media Info to display the Media Information in this table N A Size Media sizes recognized by the Destination 35 x 43 cm 35 x 35 cm 11 x 14 in 10 x 12 in 8 5x 11 in 8 101 4 1 4 Maximum Maximum number of pixels in the x direction for a media size Maximum columns 1 9999 Columns can be selected for each media size The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Maximum Rows Maximum number of pixels in the y direction for a media size Maximum rows are 1 9999 selectable for each media size with or without common text The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Maximum Rows Maximum number of pixels in the y direction for a media size Maximum rows 1 9999 with Common _ be selected for each media size with or without text The MIM uses this Text parameter to validate the format Types Media types recognized by the Destination Media types can be selected foreach Any Blue Clear media size Any indicates that the Destination will use the media type that Reflective Paper matches the media size selected blue or clear The selections Reflective and Transparent Film Transparent are valid for color printing 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 23 SERVICE MANUAL Table 6 6 Output Parameters Communication Command Set Baud Hate C TENE Stop Bits
5. pmo rm rm opm orm om opm om om m m SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 IB Rows 480 IB Columns 748 IB Bits Allocated 8 IB Bits Per Pixel 0 stored 8 IB High Bit 7 IB Pixel Aspect Ratio 13 15 IB Photometric Interpretation MONOCHROME2 IB Polarity NORMAL from Dicom IB Magnification Type CUBIC IB Smoothing Type 15 IB Configuration Information LUT Ver693c0 w87 006 IB Set TFT Ver693c0 w87 IB Set Dry Contrast 6 IB Body Part DEFAULT from Connection DB IB Color Profile DEFO from Connection DB IB Image Tone Adjustment 0 from Connection DB IB found an Image s PLUT IB uses PLUT uid 11 29 01 13 32 43 596 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 677 SCP Assoc 4 Printing Film Box FB N ACTION Print the film box 11 29 01 13 32 43 806 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 375 SCP Assoc 4 Deleting Film Session FS N DELETE Close the film session 11 29 01 13 32 43 957 2 8E8820 NOV 2003 IMIMDicomDevice cpp 78 SCP Assoc 4 Down 11 25 SERVICE MANUAL End of log Sample Log 4 DISPLAY KEYPAD to PRINT SERVER This log includes communication and key
6. a 1515 20 40 BO 100 Input 8 30 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images SIEWS87B A slight modification to the WRKSTN2A TFT Set designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for the Sienet Workstation 4000 eo ra I BS pong epis a 3500 E EA a SE as 3000 43 BEN p peg p EE E 2500 5 E Ec s 2000 EEH is Exe D 1500 a 1000 ae SS is 500 cca BE Ee BS a EST a ne fen ee et emm pen Een mne x prep pee pop opp 0 20 40 B 80 Input 75 TLII Created for use with the Toshiba Laser Imager Interface TLII for nuclear medicine applications It provides several linear in density curves 5 with increasing density plus 5 with decreasing density It also provides 5 approximately linear in brightness curves similar to some of the VER693CO curves for an MR MODALITY Toshiba Flexart The combination of diverse curve shapes in this TFT Set for different MODALITIES makes it an example of a hybrid
7. formats that are normally portrait and vice versa from the KEYPAD that is not allowed by the destination The MIM also uses this to validate the format Select if the MIM allows page rotation Item Description Range Supported Select Supported Items to display the supported features indicated this table N A Items Collation Enables study mode operation at the KEYPAD and has the Destination print the set of all Yes No films that belong to the same study Select if the destination allows Collation Common Text Allows the user to enter common text information including the macros for time date etc at Yes No the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film This parameter will also be used by MIM when validating the format Select if the destination allows Common text Tonescaling on Enables the changing of curve shape in the middle of a page and selecting a curve shape series Yes No Image Basis from the KEYPAD Select if the destination allows Tonescaling on Image Basis Media Bin Enables selecting a default media bin at the KEYPAD when the media size type is not specified Yes No Default by a DICOM input Select if the destination allows this feature Pivot Density Enables the selection of a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD Select if the destination Yes No allows pivot density Print Quality Enables the selection of print quality to be used when printing the page from the KEYPAD Yes No Select if
8. 1500 aed ae a i ec ees T A y d ze 1000 De RE FERE ERES EE Am 500 CS EE ah SN pte Emus Sey a eA 20 40 al 100 Input FCR302C4 Created specifically for use with the 3M Model 2210 CREIB interface to a Fuji Computed Radiography system This TFT set should not be used for any other application The 15 TFTs in this set are designed to be used in correspondence with the 15 Dmax choices of the IMAGER using Contrast 1 when the first Dmax setting is used etc The plots in the chart 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 19 SERVICE MANUAL below show a sagging shape which 15 characteristic of a linear in density behavior until maximum brightness Dmin 15 approached at which point the curves become relatively flat 4000 GTE 2500 2000 1500 el HH ERES 1000 500 1 0 nS eT 0 20 40 BO 100 Input 55 8 20 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images GEHYBO01 A hybrid multi MODALITY TFT set that supports the various imaging MODALITIES which may be connected to a GE Amber Workstation These MODALITIES include Fuji Computed Radiography CR CT MR Ultrasound and any MODALITY that expec
9. 9 1 os ch eee eae Oe eee eh ee bles 9 2 Training Security 9 6 Providing Service Feedback 5 bo S Rd RES 9 7 gt E 10 1 11 1 Replacing the MIM HARD DRIVE CD ROM DRIVE or FLOPPY DRIVE 11 1 Connecting toa MIM 11 2 Finding an Unknown MIM IP 4 11 2 Tun for Te ood wo oe ashe os ER AERE hee hb OE ee le odo es 11 2 Running a Network Ping Test from the MIM Service Application 11 4 Running a Network DICOM Echo 11 5 Running Diagnostics of the INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS 11 6 Changing Level of a Log for 11 7 Retrieving the Activity History 11 8 Interpreting the Activity History 11 9 Interpreting the Error History LOB o nso hee ee es Eae bho WE ER ERES 11 11 Retrieving the Error Frequency 11 12 Clearmg the
10. ER st JE LaserImager cpp 1207 GetPrinterStatusHelper starts Jl LE Jl Jl Jl dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Sta Pr 1 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Sta Pr 10e0d ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags n ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received d ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Sta Y LT 103 IMAGER acknowledged comm 09 44 49 274 5 8191 000000000 Media BWDryB E14x17267A 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 39 SERVICE MANUAL 09 44 49 305 5 8191 000000000 ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Sta Y LT 103 Media BWDryB E14x17 LASER IMAGER has 103 sheets of black and white 14 x 17 in Kodak DryView film 09 44 49 335 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 365 6 8191 000000000 1 ss cpp 301 ss getFPStatus started ss_sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Sta FP 1 Get status of FILM PROCESSOR 1 09 44 49 395 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 425 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 455 5 8191 000000000 09 44 49 495 5 8191 000000000 IMAGER acknowledged reques 09 44 49 525 5 8191 000000000 09 44 49 555 5 8191 000000000 LASER IMAGER is Ready 09 44 49 585 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 615 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 655 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 685 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 715 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49
11. L_ O C po JL M qID3 3 34 1 QID2 3 O H180_0094HCA H180_0094HC SP6E7386 BOARD COPCIL 74 0401 9054 3 CABLE COPCIL Short Not illustrated For connection to 8100 IMAGER 74 0500 5864 8 COPCIL Long Not illustrated For connection to 8500 8700 IMAGERS 12 16 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Figure 12 15 FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT FOPCIL BOARD and CABLES MIM 200 and 25 PS ap e 180 0095 180 0095 74 0401 8213 6 BOARD FOPCIL 78 8075 2605 3 CABLE fiber optic 3 m Not illustrated Furnished with system 78 8063 3684 4 CABLE fiber optic 10 m Not illustrated Available for order 78 8063 3685 1 CABLE fiber optic 30 m Not illustrated Available for order 78 8063 3686 9 CABLE fiber optic 60 m Not illustrated Available for order 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 17 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 16 OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD and CABLES MIM 200 1 Pi EEEEEE LI LA LL U31 NO Co H180_0036DCA 2E4017 BOARD optical interface 3E0628 CABLE fiber optic 2 m 2E4018 CABLE fiber optic 8 m 12 18 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Figure 12 17 KEYPAD INTERFACE BOARD 25 PS ope 16 lol oo0oo000000O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O iy ie ir tlt qa C3 I
12. for for for Level Level Level for set for Level Level System starting up on machine MIM Application Version 5 0 5 StatBecorder activated Activated chkdsk Model 5 HMapped Added PortID 1 1 Could not HMapSerialPort for HMapped Added PortID Mapped Added PortID Oxlo4d High Speed COPCIL Interfac COPCIL FOPCIL Card O Hardt COPCIL FOPCIL Card O Drive Added Output Port ID Ox6c Found board 1 cpp llz DVPI MIMDPryVi 1281 DVPI m plaser Cpp l741 DVPI crseater cpp zlz DVPI HMIMHDryVi KisManager Activated Comment Log Level Level of detail Where the letter T Information W Warning or E Error is displayed in the Log Level field this line is included in the Error Log Class ID This information identifies the subsystem logged and is used by development for troubleshooting Object ID This information is used by development for troubleshooting Source Name Name of the input that generated the log information This could be DICOM or the name of the directly connected video or digital input Each DICOM SCU will have a unique source name File Name of the file for this line in the program Line No Number of the line in the file Comment Description of the function in the program of this line 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 9 SERVICE MANUAL Retrieving the Error History Log 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to
13. 23000 IEEE cal PE pe rp Ee En EE Img Fae pL pee E EE VECHIS E ara Eu aur oer es ape set om op eec rens A E qur 1500 LEES C s ee gr ES i i AD UR EE Er aA emen n FT meon prep erp pee pec pepe pm E pop bap e Im ad MELDEN rues ras ESSE ERES SERERE a REI 1000 CERA TEE a E uu qup ee E 1 Ee p pp A oe Ez ees jos rg Ee a ies d
14. 6 5 2 23 Staring and Using SecureLink osos CER o or Bx IDEA Pes 2 23 Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 2 25 Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 or Windows 2 27 Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM with a VPN Connection 2 30 Quitting Service Application 2 32 Starting pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP 2 33 Buttons and Hot Keys for 2 36 Wane te HARDER dE me UESTIGIA RES Abg C EE adnexas 3 Unpacking System OOS oe gk ec oet es oak ee RE ERN P e PS Rege an es 3 2 Installing the 25 PS on 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER 3 3 Installing the 25 3 4 Dealing the 25 Pu On S SUBIT os coat cape bes Caddo 3 5 Connecting a Telephone Line to an INTERNAL 3 37 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing an EXTERNALMODEM oscs 649 3 sweet das EE rad ERG d EXER ARE eee i 3 38 Installing a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT FOPCIL BOARD 3 40 Installing a COPPER OUTPUT COP
15. Parameter Description Auto Gain Sets the gain Requires an image with a grayscale bar or one with brightest white and brightest black Manual Adjustment VIDEO 60 and 150LC only Displays Manual Gain Offset window Tool which provides ability to graphically plot the pixel values for lines in the image and manually adjust CABLE compensation values RGB Channel Select VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only Selects channel to be adjusted For monochrome signals this setting is disabled and automatically set to input channel designated from Video Setup Dialog For RGB signals a single channel can be adjusted separately or all 3 GB channels can be adjusted simultaneously Changing the value from a single channel to RGB will write over the settings for all channels with the last selected RGB channel Range N A Plot to the VIDEO BOARD acquires an image and plots the pixel values for the designated line and channels Displays the pixel plot window if necessary Pixel Plot Line VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only Selects the line number 1 4096 default 1 Number to be plotted Can be used to scroll through and plot lines in an image Plot Single Channel VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only Provides ability to plot a N A of RGB single channel of an RGB signal This control is disabled for monochrome signals Set Acquire and VIDEO 60 and 150LC manual adjustment only Pro
16. ae D E a ese EU 2000 E ee ee SE es EE TUI ERES L L l d 1 emp ec 1 e eer eta s o per es pee or numm Tq pose eme TET JL uL ac 1500 ee GE E p L d d Tl LLL eet eb LL LC 1000 rwy cns dr e nere gcc ps pese pose sp 500 I ES CS epe exei ERE 2 en LS aur Fe sl cea GG et rm pes nn 1 SS E A ES EA ee a a a
17. ImgCapDev cpp 221 ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Complete 11 30 01 13 09 38 828 5 2056 01210904 vid1 ImgCapDev cpp 206 ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Start VIDEO I F BOARD is set to capture images 11 30 01 13 09 38 988 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 701 DiskArbiter Writing image to queue Image from MODALITY is to be written into queue on VIDEO I F BOARD 11 30 01 13 09 38 988 5 2056 01210904 vid1 ImgCapDev cpp 2453 Image submittal started 11 30 01 13 09 39 018 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 352 DiskArbiter Run done checking queue 11 30 01 13 09 39 028 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 302 DiskArbiter Run checking queue 11 30 01 13 09 39 028 5 2056 01210904 ImgCapDev cpp 2525 Image submittal finished 11 30 01 13 09 39 028 2 2056 01210904 vid1 ImgCapDev cpp 2406 Image Stored Columns 548 Rows 512 BitsPerPixel 8 STORE button on KEYPAD has been pressed 11 30 01 13 09 39 028 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 306 DiskArbiter Run popping data from queue 11 30 01 13 09 39 038 5 2056 01210904 ImgCapDev cpp 221 ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Complete 11 30 01 13 09 39 038 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 772 DiskArbiter Writing image to disk Image data is written onto DISK 11 30 01 13 09 39 038 5 2056 01210904 ImgCapDev cpp 206 ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode S
18. OPTICAL H180 0063ECA INTERFACE BOARD H180_0063EC b gt Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 21 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 17 MIM 200 1 2 GHz PRINT SERVER FIBER OPTIC CPOI OUTPUT CABLE n CUSTOMER NETWORK Ethernet CABLE COM 1 COM 2 180 3029 180 3029 gt Note COM 11 DISPLAY KEYPAD BOARD 422 LA OPTICAL INTERFACE 090905 o 958582858589 209020909090900 1 BRACKET 422 O00 00000000 06009090009 9090909 2180 or 1120 LASER PRINTER MIM 200 1 2 GHz OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 3 22 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 18 MIM 200 PRINT SERVER COPPER COPCIL OUTPUT CABLE CUSTOMER NETWORK Ethernet CABLE POWER To UPS SLOT BOARD SWITCH Ethernet 10 100 BASE T INTERNAL MODEM SERIAL INTERFACE DISPLAY KEYPAD 5 NONE COPCIL K Com 9 IMAGE PORT 3m BN COPPER TS SS Y CABLE 8100 8300 8610 i LL LASER IMAGER or f NT 8500 8700 LASER pu IMAGER STANDARD A COM PORT SERVICE and PHONE EXT MODEM optional Extensions of 10 30 or 60 m COPPER CABLE COM2 are available not used COM 1 CUSTOMER m SERVICE and NETWORK EXT MODEM Ethernet CABLE SLOT BOA
19. 8 Start Options Startup Sequence Fourth Startup Device 9 Start Options Fast Power On Self Test Disabled Disabled 10 Start Options Memory Test Enabled Start Options Boot Fail Count 1 Advanced Setup CPU Frequency Single Processor MP Table Disabled Disabled Power Management Setup Automatic Power On Disabled 7 After entering new settings save and exit the BIOS setup 8 Reboot Then re ghost the MIM 4 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Upgrading MIM Software Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 100 and MIM 200 1 2 GHz This version of MIM will come from the factory set to boot from CD ROM The following procedure is provided in case the BIOS 15 corrupted 1 Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE 2 Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application or the KEYPAD 3 De energize the MIM 4 Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM See Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM in Section 2 5 Energize the MIM and access the Configuration Setup Utility menu for the BIOS by pressing F1 when prompted on the MONITOR screen 6 Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items and install the settings in Table 4 3 Table 4 3 Custom Settings from Factory Defaults General Configuration Select Ist Boot Device DROM General Configuration Select 2nd Boot Device HDD 2 6 Poemen O 7 After entering new settings save and e
20. 12 39 4 ft 8815144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels One KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 42 m 137 8 ft 848 3539 end is labeled Keypad and the other end is m 49 2 ft or 45 m 147 6 ft The labeled Rear Panel KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not in figure KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT 1 m 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 Odd numbered ADAPTER CABLE COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for KEYPADS and even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections 3 32 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 27 Siemens Imaging Device FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Hirschmann CONNECTORS Keypad Keypad Cable RS 485 Adapter Cable Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only Imaging Device Digital Input Pkg H MIM 100 or MIM 200 G W Hirschmann Com Port Adapter Cable Connectors RS 232 RS 422 for the MIM 200 only H180_0012BCA Conversion Kit H180_0012BC Figure 3 28 Siemens Imaging Device FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Pritzel CONNECTORS Keypad Keypad Cable RS 485 Adapter Cable Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only for the MIM 200 Imaging S peice RS 485 RS 485 7 e Digital Input Pkg g DB15 DB25 100 200 G W Pritzel G Com Port Adapter Cable Connectors RS 232 RS 422 for the MIM 200 only H180 0013 Conversion Kit 180 0013 Important Fo
21. Caution Changing these parameters will take the system off line 2 Select the Operating Language from the Pull down Menu 3 Select either the American or European format for display of the date 4 To store this configuration click OK Setting Up the KEYPAD for Correct Time Zone This procedure applies to both the DISPLAY KEYPAD and the PRINT KEYPAD 1 On the KEYPAD press Menu 2 On the Main Menu press the Down Arrow until gt points to Service Menu 3 Press Menu 4 On the Service Menu press the Down Arrow until gt points to Machine Setup Menu 5 Press Menu 6 On the Machine Setup Menu press the Down Arrow until gt points to Select Time Zone 7 To select the time zone Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow until gt points to the correct time zone Press Menu to select the time zone Press Menu to exit 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 11 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the Destination Single PRINTER Setups This procedure applies to MIMs with single PRINTER destinations If the system includes an 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER or 969 HQ IMAGER that controls 2 destinations do not do this procedure Advance to Setting Up the Destination Dual PRINTER Setups on Page 6 16 and do the procedure for setting up dual PRINTER destinations amp Important See the Tables and this information for the Destination Parameters 1 At the Service Application
22. WU CIEN SH Ll Lim EE Pe ee Ere OR eed e 1090 ee 500 EST 0 0 20 40 Input 4000 3800 1 5000 mht esc epe ron vemm vue m oo ems pe Se ee om 07 ES EST p A 5500 02020 20 a ee prot a Ee a as 4559 a a E889 2000 a eS a ee ESSE a Eg Em Rd encor Ege Ens us Ie eee p ae e a LLL DL e Sp E Hc pm cpg a Ex EXC dx p EIN X a RUNE ERU ES COR E ame Br nm cme EB ae eS SS E o 2 eos pom poem omo pens 2003 8 8820 Obtaining Optimum Images SIECTS87B A slight modification to the SIECT87 TFT Set designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for CT 4000 3500 S000 a ee le Se A 0 2500 2000 1500
23. 55 sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Sta Y Status of IMS has not changed It is Ready 09 44 48 684 6 8191 000000000 ss cpp 557 ss getAvailableMemory started 09 44 48 714 6 8191 000000000 55 sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Show Mem Show status of memory in IMAGER 09 44 48 754 6 8191 000000000 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Show Mem 09 44 48 784 6 8191 000000000 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Show Mem0e75 09 44 48 814 5 8191 000000000 cepacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags 09 44 48 844 5 8191 000000000 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged request 09 44 49 014 5 8191 000000000 cepacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Show Y Mem 32768 32768 1 6 02255 09 44 49 044 5 8191 000000000 ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Show Y Mem 32768 32768 1 6 0 IMAGER responded that available memory is 33 megapixels all in one block 1 hole in memory 6 bad pixels 2255 used pixels 09 44 49 084 6 8191 000000000 55 36 ss getPrinterStatus started 09 44 49 114 6 8191 000000000 55 sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Sta Pr 1 Get the status of PRINTER 1 09 44 49 144 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 174 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 204 5 8191 000000000 09 44 49 234 5 8191 000000000
24. 4 If you changed any information click OK and update the LABEL on the side of the MIM If you did not change information click Cancel Note Changing the Node Name of the MIM will increase the boot time by up to 4 minutes on the next boot only 5 At the message Changes will take effect the next time the MIM is restarted click OK 6 Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application Admin menu and select Restart from the next window 7 Go to Setting Up the Network Input 6 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 6 2 Input Parameters Network Information Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Input Parameter Description Range network WAN configuration No data in this field is necessary for the MIM Service Application software Node Name A unique name that identifies the local COMPUTER 1 15 alphanumeric characters plus hyphen to TCP IP This name should be meaningful for the location The Node Name for a PRINT SERVER SCP is also the computer name of the MIM IP Address The unique address that identifies a specific node in a 4 fields 1 254 in which each field is separated network Add the unique address name to the LABEL by a period on the side of the MIM Subnet Mask The subnet mask works with the IP address to 4 fields 0 255 in which each field is separated subdivide the network into more than 1 network by a period Gateway Address The IP Address of the router used in a wide
25. EC g 128405 DERE EE E F I LEDTCLLIL ee es e em com L8 Le LLL 2000 S ee 1500 Stee ros fee es pee per eT 1000 ES 1 2 EH LIES Eque ur E E n MR p SS S00 peep es 5525 oe ee mc poe oes e ones REST ESTEE 88 22000800 n poses Ee pare pests fen D as ee sepe eS epe eese pe e bees 20 40 al 100 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 21 SERVICE MANUAL GSDFO0 A TFT set in which all 15 curves are designed to conform to the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function as applied to the case of transmissive film media under certain typical conditions For optimum conformity with the standard select the contrast setting in this TFT set based upon the Dmax density setting in the following table 8 22 Dmax 1 7 1
26. Parity EVER 8 Transter Rate 2000 HEADER Acquire E LINE Data Bits Image Transfer Fisel Depth Header Mode Acquire Mode lt Back Finish Cancel Description Range Command Set Used for data transmission to the direct destination 952 or SuperSet Baud Rate Baud rate of the SERIAL PORT for data transmission to the direct destination 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Data Bits Number of data bits in each pixel in the data transmission on the SERIAL PORT 5 6 7 8 Default 8 Stop Bits Number of stop bits in each pixel the data transmission the SERIAL PORT 1 1 5 2 Default 1 Parity Parity setting for the data transmission on the SERIAL PORT None Even Odd Pixel Depth Depth of the pixel data that the MIM will send a data packet 8 12 Default 8 Header Mode Determines if the MIM will send a header with the data packet to the direct No Header Header destination OUTPUT BOARD The header includes the size of the acquired Default Header image If No Header is selected the size of the acquired images must remain constant Acquire Mode Determines whether the acquire mode for the digital input port will be Line or Line Frame Frame If Line the data comes across 1 line at a time Transfer Rate Data transfer rate of the digital image port from the MIM to the direct destination 1000 2000 4000 Applies o
27. 09 50 08 684 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 724 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 764 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 804 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 834 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 874 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 914 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 954 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 984 6 8191 000000000 09 50 09 024 4 8191 000000000 09 50 09 104 2 8191 000675670 09 50 09 144 4 8191 000677206 09 50 09 675 6 8191 000000000 09 50 09 755 6 8191 000695382 09 50 09 795 6 8191 000695382 09 50 09 825 6 8191 000000000 09 50 10 596 6 8191 000000000 09 50 10 627 6 8191 000000000 09 50 10 667 6 8191 000000000 09 50 10 707 6 8191 000000000 11 46 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Sto Y Size 280 23173A ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Sto Y Size 280 23 ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Pri Fmt 99 Img 2 Cps 1 Dens 3 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Pri Fmt 99 Img 2 Cps 1 Dens 3 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Pri Fmt 99 Img 2 Cps 1 Dens 32300 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Pri Y Job 1112E1 ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Pri Y Job 11 ss printPage cpp 217 ss printPage Job ID 11 ss sendCommand cp
28. Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 MIM 100 Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER 25 PS The information in this section includes Lists of hardware and software tools Procedures for configuring the LAPTOP COMPUTER Procedure for installing new MIM Service Application software Procedure for installing SecureLink authentication software Procedure for installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE Procedures for connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM Description of MIM Service Application functions Procedures for starting the MIM Service Application Using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE Procedure for using a MONITOR KIT UL LJ L1 LJ L3 L3 L3 LJ L3 L3 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 1 SERVICE MANUAL Tools and Accessories Hardware Tools Item Part Number 1 LAPTOP COMPUTER Must have Windows 98 Windows 2000 or Windows NT 2 SERIAL CABLE Use to connect LAPTOP COMPUTER to MIM SERIAL PORT TL 5224 10bT 100bT Ethernet BOARD Installed in LAPTOP COMPUTER 78 9998 2934 0 4 NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE 96 0000 3918 8 5 10 baseT CABLE 96 9998 2936 5 6 Ethernet HUB 10bT 100bT 78 9998 2935 7 7 MONITOR KIT A MONITOR KEYBOARD and MOUSE SE2480 8 ADAPTER Used to connect MONITOR CABLE to the MIM 200 667 MHz version 3H9543 9 Y CABLE Used to connect KEYBOARD and MOUSE of MONITOR KIT
29. Memory Image Pixels 32 5 If the first destination is the default destination enter a check mark the field for Set As Default Destination for ambiguous DICOM AE Title gt Note This destination is where films will be printed if the SCU targets an AE Title tha is not an exact match fo the Logical Name 6 Click Next 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 17 SERVICE MANUAL E giin C gt Note The numbers that the Media information window displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER might not match the numbers displayed in the window above 7 In the Media window select all media that the customer will use Check with the customer if necessary on film sizes The table shows the correct film sizes for the Kodak DryView 8800 DUAL PRINTERS Film Size PRINTERS 35 x 43 cm 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER 8700 LASER IMAGER 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER 969HQ LASER IMAGER 11 x 14 in 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER 8500 LASER IMAGER 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER 969HQ LASER IMAGER 8 x 10 in 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER 969HQ LASER IMAGER amp Important You must select a media base for each medium selected See Format Parameters on Page 6 27 8 Click Next to display the Output Parameters window 6 18 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Baur Printer Setup C Printer 2 Communication Command Set SUPERSET gt Baud Fate i20
30. RE ES 7 37 Notes on Adjusting Image 7 39 ae e E E eo E E E 7 48 Checking ihe HIS RIS Comecon 22 2 55 gt 25 gt 552 8 06 ette eet 7 70 Troubleshooting the HIS RIS Gateway Connection 7 70 Disabling the HIS RIS GATEWAY OHS ORO 7 70 Using the BAR CODE READER with 7 74 Using BAR CODE READER without HIS RIS 7 74 Obtaining Optimum ee ee ee ee 8 1 Using the KEYPAD to Create Optimum Images for the 8 10 Setting Up Print Server for True Size Printing Cropping of Images 8 11 Setting Up SCU for Cropping 8 11 Text Box 1 eee 8 12 sg bere a kG oo OES DEARSLSRES Ao OEE abun es 8 16 cubi teat ters oh eens Oe wah 8 16 ee 222552054056 hod ae ee Ewe 8 18 ULUT Set Selections for the 8300 LASER IMAGER 8 35 ULUT Set Selections for the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER 8 41 Comple ne the Installation ees oou eror per ee es Baas SS ER ope ee eee 9 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 SERVICE MANUAL Final ee
31. Sending Test Images Care and Maintenance Cleaning the KEYPAD Removing and cleaning the FILTER 15 minutes Key Operator 9 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Operator Training Checklist for the MIM Completing the Installation Overview Identify Components Basic Operations Turn On Shut Down Privacy Feature Username and Password Select and Enter Information using the KEYPAD Use the Screens Acquisition Main Imaging Options and Manage Profiles UOO L1 LI Set SYSTEM Preferences Working with Images Choose a profile Adjust imaging options Store images Delete images and pages Print the page Q LJ LJ LI L1 CI Manage image transfer Creating and Managing Profiles Plan the profile View the profile Create the profile Edit and Rename the profile OOOO Delete the profile Tone Scaling Key Operator Tone Scaling options Select the Tone Scaling option OOO Adjust the Tone Scaling option Maintaining the MIM Key Operator Make a Back Up of the SYSTEM Setup Set the SYSTEM time View the SYSTEM information and error logs Send a test image Q OOU Clean the KEYPAD Clean the FILTER Signatures Technologist Date Apps Con Date 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Training the Securit
32. 11 30 01 16 19 14 526 4 3058 0003661 1 11 30 01 16 19 14 526 4 3058 23693571 11 30 01 16 19 14 526 5 3058 0003661 1 ImplicitVRLittleEndian accepted 11 30 01 16 19 33 243 3 4008 00029955 11 30 01 16 19 33 243 3 4008 00029955 11 30 01 16 19 52 270 3 4008 00029955 8E8820 NOV 2003 IMIMDicomlnterface cpp 141 Successfully PINGED 100 100 100 40 MIMPrintService cpp 238 MIMPrintService constructing for 8200 TonescaleResolver cpp 473 TonescaleResolve PLUT TonescaleResolver Constructed TonescaleResolver cpp 148 TonescaleResolve PLUT DicomTonescaleResolver MIMDicomPrintInterface cpp 446 SCU Assoc 10248 8200 PresentationLUTService MIMDicomInterface cpp 323 SCU Assoc 10248 Up 8200 IMIMPrintService cpp 3673 Printer Status Request Start IMIMDicomePrintInterface cpp 431 SCU Assoc 10248 8200 grayscale print NetworkServicesFactory cpp 350 Reply 1 from 100 100 100 40 bytes 12 time 0 ms NetworkServicesFactory cpp 322 Pinging 100 100 100 40 with 12 bytes of data NetworkServicesFactory cpp 322 Pinging 100 100 100 40 with 12 bytes of data 11 47 SERVICE MANUAL 11 30 01 16 19 52 270 3 11 30 01 16 20 09 695 3 11 30 01 16 20 09 695 3 11 30 01 16 20 29 724 3 11 30 01 16 20 29 724 3 11 30 01 16 20 48 651 3 11 30 01 16 20 48 651 3 11 30 01 16 21 07 879 3 11 30 01 16 21 07 879 3 11 30 01 16 21 18 624 5 11 30 01 16 21 18 624 5 11 30 01 16 2
33. 5 Check Always Apply 6 Select Top or Bottom under Text Box Relocation depending on the location of the text if text on image will be saved and relocated 7 Click OK to close the SCP Parameters screen 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 11 SERVICE MANUAL Text Box Relocation Important This procedure needs to be done using pcANYWHERE and the Service Application that resides on the MIM gt Note You can only relocate text from 2 places on the image Caution When Top or Bottom is selected the corners are cut and placed back into the cropped image If anatomical areas of interest are near the image corners image data might be skewed or obscured if the corners are moved If anatomical areas of interest are near an image corner select None before you print 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure Text Box Relocation Service Up Lonnectionl 2 Connect Connect eu 2 Service Tracking Information Network Logs Diagnostics Admin Window Help Input 4 Conne Destination Conne Gateway Host Port Disk Management Save Configuration Restore Configuration Network Profiles SCF Services Test Bos Relocation The Configure Text Box Location screen displays Configure Text Box Locations Image Size Vi Columns x Rows ii Modify 214051760 Delete Refresh List Close 8 12 NOV 2003 8E8
34. 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows NT Installing TCP IP Windows NT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 On the LAPTOP COMPUTER select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network and Dial up Connections gt Local Area Connection Click Properties Scroll to Internet Protocol TCP IP Is Internet Protocol TCP IP checked No Yes Continue with Step 5 Advance to Installing Dial Up Networking Windows NT on Page 2 17 Click Install Select Client Click Add Follow the instructions to install TCP IP Continue with the next procedure Installing Dial Up Networking Windows NT 1 2 3 At the TASKBAR select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Dial Up Networking Click Install Continue with the next procedure Installing Dial Up Networking cable between two PCs and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT for Windows NT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 From the task bar Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Open the Modem icon Click Add Check Don t Detect my modem I will select it from list Click Next From the list select Dial Up Networking Cable between 2 PCs Click Next Select Selected ports Select COM1 Click Next Click Finish Select Dial Up Networking Cable betw
35. For more information on user control see the User s Guides for the MIMs HIPPA Privacy Feature V 6 1 MIM software includes a privacy feature that allows MIM users to comply with requirements of the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act HIPPA When the privacy feature is enabled keypad operators must log in with a username and password to use keypad functions that provide access to patient protected health information The privacy features are controlled from a security console web page that is resident on each MIM A customer security administrator working on a computer connected to the same local area network as the MIM can access the security console web page to setup username password accounts for each MIM keypad operator MIM Service Application Software The MIM Service Application can be used by FEs to Enter parameters for configuration of a MIM during installation Do system management functions such as backup and restore of configuration parameters Do diagnostics such as viewing logs running tests and monitoring operation of the system The MIM Service Application is stored on the LAPTOP COMPUTER as well as in the MIM For more information on this and other tools for service refer to Section 2 Tools Hardware and Software Service Access The MIM does not include MONITOR KEYBOARD or MOUSE For access to the MIM for service the FE must Connect a LAPTOP COMPUTER or Connect a MON
36. Logical Name The Logical Name of the DICOM PRINT SERVER is the AE Title 1 9 alphanumeric characters No spaces allowed Underscores are allowed IP Address Site specific address that identifies the Destination on the network The Service Application for the MIM requires the user to enter a value Two or more Destinations must not have the same IP Address 4 fields of 1 254 where each field 15 separated by a period For example 149 110 98 10 Database Name The name of the Destination selected from the Destination database This is a view only field 1 13 alphanumeric characters Model The model of the Destination The MIM uses this data to optimize MEDICAL VIEWING STATION the page format validation for the particular Destination This isa MVS MEDICAL IMAGE AND view only field INFORMATION LIBRARY MIIL Memory The amount of memory in megabytes residing in the Destination 1 99 The MIM uses this value to validate the format This value is site specific The Service Application for the MIM requires that the user enter a value in this field DICOM Info Select DICOM Info to display the DICOM information indicated N A in this table Protocol Protocol used to communicate with the Destination DICOM 3 0 Service Class The service class provided by the Destination Store Port Number The port number of the Destination that the MIM uses to makea 0
37. SIEFLTOP A slight modification to the SIEWS87B TFT Set designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for Fluorospot Top systems 4000 2000 1500 1000 ant Input 9 SIEMRS17 A set in which all 15 curves are very close 52 ale Siemens defined curve for MR The t value plots in the chart below show a shape which is somewhat like a linear in brightness shape but with more undulations than the slightly S shaped middle TFTs of the VER693C0 TFT Set As with the SIECT87 TFT Set the SIEMR87 TFT Set is not designed to provide a significant range of variability to the user but rather a small range of variability to allow a single predefined table to be matched as closely as possible 4000 2500 2000 4 1 1500 1000 4 0 FEES TEE YY RET 20 40 BU 100 Input 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 29 SERVICE MANUAL SIEMRS7B A slight modification to the SIEMR87 TFT Set designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for MR ird 2 300g SEY epe Bre Ez ER rd Ee Rm EES EE E
38. c Click Yes d Click Finish 10 Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V 3 6 a Double click MIM Laptop Basic 3 6 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 11 Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V 3 2 a Double click MIM Service 3 2 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 12 Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V 3 2 1 a Double click MIM Service 3 2 1 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 7 SERVICE MANUAL 13 Install the KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE V 1 04 a Double click key 10 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 14 Install the KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE V 1 05 a Double click key 105 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 15 Install the KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE V 1 07 a Double click key 107 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 16 Install the DIGITAL FIRMWARE V 2 2 a Double click Mim Dig b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 17 Install the MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE V 6 1 a Double click Mim 100 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 18 Install the VIDEO 150 BOARD FIRMWARE V 1 3 a Double click V150 1 3 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 19 Remove the CD from the LAPTOP COMPUTER 20 What operating system is on your LAP
39. ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Del N BadVal Fmt 991939 ss_sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Del N BadVal Fmt 99 ss_sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Del Fmt 99 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Del Fmt 99 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Del Fmt 99106c 1 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received 1 ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Del N BadVal Fmt 991939 ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Del N BadVal Fmt 99 ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Del Def Img All dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Del Def Img All ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Del Def Img AII153d ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received 1 ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Del YOBOO 1 ss_sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Del Y ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Set Density 16 Size 0 0 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Set Density 16 Size 0 0 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Set Density 16 Size 0 01de9 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck
40. 1 At the Service Application window select Configure gt Destination The Installed Destinations window will display Installed Destinations IP Address Default Direct Cann HARD DISK Default Update Configuration View Add Modify Delete gt Note If a printing destination is connected to the MIM it is a direct connection regardless of CABLE connection type 2 At the Installed Destinations window select the sequence Add Print Direct Qualified Choose a New Direct Print Destination 800 8700 8900 969H 353HU gB3HHT 1200 Dki 20r cence 3 At the Choose a New Direct Print Destination window select the correct destination from the list 8800 8500 8800 8700 or 8800 969HQ Then click OK 6 16 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Logical Mame SEP AE Title i Database Mame 88004 9500 Model 9500 Memon 32 Sets Default Destination for ambiguous DEB Title lt Back Cancel Important The Logical Name for a PRINT SERVER 15 also the AE Title for the PRINTER The SCU selects a PRINTER by Logical Name AE Title 4 At the General parameters window enter Logical Name The 2 destinations must be set up separately Name them correctly For example call the first destination 8800 and the second destination 8800 prtB
41. 19 Set He Default Destination ambiguous AE Title Setting Up a PRINT SERVER 21 LP 2180 LP 2180 Finish Cancel Description ngenge Logical Name Site specific name that must be entered for a Destination The Logical Name is also the SCP AE Title for the destination and is used by any SCU that wants to use this destination A unique logical name for the MIM is necessary across all currently installed destinations 1 9 alphanumeric characters No spaces allowed Underscores and hyphens are allowed IP Address Site specific address that uniquely identifies the Destination on the network Necessary only when the destination and input to the PRINT SERVER are on an Ethernet cable Duplicate IP Addresses for installed destinations are allowed if the DICOM AE Titles are unique for each Destination 4 fields of 0 255 where each field is separated by a period For example 149 110 98 10 Database Name The name of the Destination if it is being installed using a known destination from the qualified destination database This is a view only field 1 13 alphanumeric characters Model The model of the Destination The product uses this data to optimize the page format validation for the particular Destination This is a view only field 1 12 alphanumeric characters 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS Kodak Dryvi
42. 6 Type RNIServiceManager for the user name 7 NetServer for the password 8 Click OK 2 34 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software MIM25 pcAnywhere a pg e ik The Kodak Health Imaging security policy requires service users to use SecureLink software to access this product Please establish SecureLink connection with the product and enter the Session ID of the connection SecureLink Session ID Kodak SecureLink Client Ioj Connect Certificate Access Applications Secure Server Server Address 149 98 199 121 Port 443 Save Server Remove Server Connan Session ID 9 Enter the Session ID from the SecureLink Client window gt Note The Session ID is always displayed as 6 upper case letters on the SecureLink screen 10 Click OK The Windows 2000 DESKTOP of the target MIM displays in the pcAnywhere window oe 25 pcANYWHERE Ready Active Jobs JU Open Associations Virtual KEYPAD Check Queue 1 MIM mem All KEYPADS connected to the MIM will be displayed as virtual KEYPADS on the MIM desktop Icons on the lower TASKBAR indicate the application software that is running Remote Network Interface etc 8 8820 NOV 2003 2 35 SERVICE MANUAL You can now use the KEYBOARD and MOUSE on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to control the MIM From your LAPTO
43. 8 IB High Bit 7 IB Pixel Aspect Ratio 13 15 IB Photometric Interpretation MONOCHROME2 IB Polarity NORMAL from Dicom IB Magnification Type CUBIC IB Smoothing Type 15 IB Configuration Information LUT V er693c0 w87 0 IB Set TFT Ver693c0 w87 IB Set Dry Contrast 6 IB Body Part DEFAULT from Connection DB IB Color Profile QDEFO from Connection DB IB Image Tone Adjustment 0 from Connection DB IB found an Image s PLUT IB uses PLUT uid 1 2 840 113564 3 5040 2001 11 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting 5 ibNSet Set the image box This command sends image data to a defined location on film The MODALITY transfers the image data along with position and size information and assigns job number Information provided includes rows and columns bit depth aspect ratio polarity magnification and smoothing type etc 11 29 01 13 32 42 625 5 11 29 01 13 32 42 655 5 11 29 01 13 32 42 685 5 11 29 01 13 32 42 715 5 11 29 01 13 32 42 745 5 11 29 01 13 32 42 775 5 11 29 01 13 32 42 805 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 848 SCP Assoc 4 Setting Image Box IB for Position 1 N SET DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3566 SCP Assoc 4 IB Rows 480 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3576 SCP Assoc 4 IB Columns 748 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3583 SCP Assoc 4 IB Bits Allocated 8 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3601 SCP Assoc 4 IB Bits Per Pixel stored 8 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3632 SCP Assoc 4
44. 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 09 49 59 320 5 8191 000000000 09 49 59 360 5 8191 000000000 09 49 59 400 5 8191 000000000 Media BWDryB E14x17267A 09 49 59 440 5 8191 000000000 09 49 59 471 6 8191 000000000 09 49 59 511 6 8191 000000000 09 49 59 551 6 8191 000000000 09 49 59 591 6 8191 000000000 09 49 59 621 5 8191 000000000 09 49 59 661 5 8191 000000000 09 49 59 701 5 8191 000000000 09 49 59 741 5 8191 000000000 09 49 59 771 6 8191 000000000 09 49 59 811 6 8191 000000000 09 49 59 851 6 8191 000000000 09 49 59 891 6 8191 000000000 09 49 59 931 6 8191 000000000 09 49 59 961 6 8191 000000000 09 50 00 001 6 8191 000000000 09 50 00 041 5 8191 000000000 09 50 00 071 5 8191 000000000 09 50 00 111 5 8191 000000000 a eT rn UU mr rm rm r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 09 50 00 151 5 8191 000000000 09 50 00 182 5 8191 000000000 09 50 00 232 5 8191 000000000 09 50 00 262 5 8191 000000000 09 50 00 302 6 8191 000000000 09 50 00 352 4 8191 000677206 09 50 00 392 3 8191 000677206 09 50 00 422 4 8191 000677206 09 50 00 462 3 8191 000677206 09 50 0
45. Modality Info 2 At the Direct Connect Input Configuration window highlight the test input and click Delete 3 At the message Executing this command will delete the input from the system Are you sure select Yes The KEYPAD goes off line 4 At the Direct Connect Input Configuration window select Add Digital Qualified 7 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Qualified Digital Modalities Bennet ContourMammo jg 4 Camtronics video Flus Unit Cemex Icon Workstation Unix Elscint Esteem 1 5T MRI Elscint Helicet CT Elscint Omnipra Workstation Elscint Omni View Vv arkstation Elscint Select SP CT Elscint Twin CT Fischer Mammo Biopsy Table Fischer Mammawevision WE Fischer Stereo Tactic Unit CE Acheter uindousc Ml gt Note See Table 7 3 for descriptions of the Direct Connect Input Parameters 6 Enter the correct input parameters Board Channel Select from the drop down menu Logical Name Enter a name for the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD for example digl dig2 Database Name For Unqualified MODALITIES only enter a name for the MODALITY Modality ID Name Enter a shortened name for the MODALITY 8E8820 NOV 200300 SERVICE MANUAL Primary Control Type KEYPAD or type of Autofilming connection See Table 7 3 Primary Control COM Port See Table 7 3 e Auxiliary Control Type Used only for Autofilming See Table 7 3 e Auxiliary Control C
46. s NR EA Hi ERI B T EEE TUT CUTTER E RD DC NR LT 4000 3500 S000 2500 2000 1500 1000 8 34 Obtaining Optimum Images ULUT Set Selections for the 8300 LASER IMAGER The following are the set choices available when using the ULUT set for 8300 LASER IMAGER applications GSDF6 Composed of 12 curves all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function with parameters chosen to support the range of density Dmax settings available on the 8300 LASER IMAGER The curves are designed so the contrast and density Dmax settings should be chosen according to the following table Recommended Contrast Settings Maximum Density Recommended Contrast Setting See Note 1 See Note 2 2 0 1 24 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 4 5 2 9 6 2 6 7 27 8 2 9 9 3 1 10 3 3 11 3 5 12 1 As controlled by density setting 2 For best conformance with Grayscale Standard Display Function GSDF6AA0 Composed of 12 curves all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function applied to an 8300 LASER IMAGER printing at its highest density setting Dmax 3 5 All the curves in this ULUT set were designed based on an assumed film Dmin of 0 2 and an assumed light box luminance of 55
47. 3000 3999 Delivery Page full Invalid curve shape Failure sending image to PRINTER 4000 4999 Network Services Problem in DICOM delivery Wrong information for MIM 5000 5999 Storage Memory access error Disk Low Water Mark not reached 6000 6999 KEYPAD KEYPAD cannot send the message KEYPAD test failure 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 11 SERVICE MANUAL Retrieving the Error Frequency Log 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the MIM Service Application 2 Select Connect gt Connect to MIM 3 Select Logs 4 From the Logs pull down menu select Error Frequency Get Error Frequency Retrieve System Application Error Code From Error Code Input View Log Save As Close LER 5 In the Retrieve panel select one of the following System Windows NT Operating System MIM Application all logging subsystems for MIM KELI 160 Application 6 If you chose MIM Application enter Error Code From and Error Code To numbers 7 Click OK 8 At the prompt click View Log 9 To save the log click Save As 11 12 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Error Frequency Log Last Clear Date Error frequency lag has never been cleared Severity Emertede EmwCout 165 010 2 Fatal 300 010 18 308 010 19 Fatal 4004 010 Information 4209 010 51 aming 4211
48. 7 After entering new settings save and exit the BIOS setup 8 Reboot Then re ghost the MIM ELI EN ES ET ES ES 13 14 15 6 1 4 6 2003 8 8820 Upgrading MIM Software Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 667 MHz amp Important Starting with V 5 0 application software the MIM includes a soft off feature for all versions of MIM 200 before serial number 103650 must have a BIOS change before being upgraded to Version 5 0 Otherwise the system will reboot on an attempted shutdown See the necessary BIOS change in Step 12 of Table 4 5 Important Do this procedure before installing new application software in any MIM 200 with a serial number below 100600 to enable booting from the CD ROM 1 Make sure the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE 2 Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application or the KEYPAD 3 De energize the MIM 4 Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM See Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM in Section 2 5 Energize the MIM and access the Configuration Setup Utility menu for the BIOS by pressing when prompted on the MONITOR screen 6 Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items and install the settings from in Table 4 5 Table 4 5 Settings on the Configuration Setup Utility Menu Step Under Menu Item Action Devices and I O Ports Select Not Installed for Mouse Devices and I O Ports US
49. 8E8820 Network Services Log Troubleshooting DICOM communications between SCU and an SCP normally occur in the sequence indicated in the table below Each of the command functions is described following the table Sequence Command Function Command 1 Negotiations between SCU and SCP Open an association 2 Get PRINTER status prNGet 3 Create a film session fsNCreate 4 Create a film box fbNCreate 5 Set the image box ibNSet 6 Print fbNAction 7 End the job fbNDelete 8 End the session fsNDelete 1 Negotiation Phase A new connection is opened and communication between SCU and SCP occurs as in the sample printout below 11 29 01 13 32 38 839 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 859 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 889 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 919 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 939 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 970 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 000 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 030 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 050 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 080 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 1105 11 29 01 13 32 39 1405 11 29 01 13 32 39 1605 11 29 01 13 32 39 2703 11 29 01 13 32 39 300 3 11 29 01 13 32 39 3303 11 29 01 13 32 39 360 2 MIMPrintAcse cpp 836 MIMPrintAcse cpp 840 MIMPrintAcse cpp 845 MIMPrintAcse cpp 846 MIMPrintAcse cpp 847 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1466 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1504 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1523 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1538 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1603 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1730 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1734
50. A set of non S curve TFTs with mid tone density gradually decreasing as the TFT number contrast setting is increased This set was originally requested by Philips Medical Systems who preferred saggy curve shapes to the S shaped curves of VER693C0 and VER713CO All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid tone contrast slope but have a wide variety of brightnesses with contrast setting 1 the darkest image and contrast setting 15 the brightest 4000 4 4 a es FY ERS p eT ERA HERR LER VINE LEES GENS DNE ERR a ERES ED ES VES T E ocu SE pes ux Beet um a c SL ede E Se ee CC EE ae aes E een EE EE eee ERE ees e ee Ee Em E E E pe E e eb La ue sd e E cu El EA sail Sag E ER PE ee EIS
51. Connection Methods on Page 2 23 After you connect the SecureLink window will remain open on your desktop 2 From the TASKBAR select Start gt Programs gt Symantec pcAnywhere 27 pcAnywhere Manager i 2 Bl x File Edit View Tools Help eo i and Settings all Users 4pplication D atas S ymantecspeAnywhere Hosts Remotes Exit Add Remote NETWORK Connect MIM CABLE DSL 77 Remote Control and File Transfer 114 Disconnect emove Server Far Help press F1 eee eee ee eee Remote connection item m Cession ID SecureLink Window 4 1 0 66 4 3 Click Remotes 4 Double click Connect MIM 6 1 gt Note Connect MIM is the pcAnywhere remote connection item you created previously See See Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere on Page 2 21 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 33 SERVICE MANUAL gt Note Do not press Ctrl Alt Del on your keyboard Ctrl Alt Del Icon MIM pcAnywhere E x Welcome to Windows Professional Built on NT Technology Mies EE Press Ctrl Alt Delete begin Ctrl Alt Del helps keep your password secure Click Help For more information 5 Click the Ctrl Alt Del icon Log On to Windows m Windows 2000 Built on NT Technology User name Password Log on using dial up connection Cancel shutdown Options lt lt
52. IB High Bit 7 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3649 SCP Assoc 4 IB Pixel Aspect Ratio 13 15 11 29 01 13 32 42 835 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3679 SCP Assoc 4 IB Photometric Interpretation MONOCHROME2 11 29 01 13 32 42 885 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1166 SCP Assoc 4 IB Polarity NORMAL from Dicom 11 29 01 13 32 42 915 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1197 SCP Assoc 4 IB Magnification Type CUBIC 11 29 01 13 32 42 945 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1215 SCP Assoc 4 IB Smoothing Type 15 11 29 01 13 32 42 975 4 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1333 SCP Assoc 4 IB Configuration Information LUT Ver693c0 w87 006 11 29 01 13 32 43 005 3 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1452 SCP Assoc 4 IB Set TFT Ver693c0 w87 11 29 01 13 32 43 035 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1453 SCP Assoc 4 IB Set Dry Contrast 6 11 29 01 13 32 43 065 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1515 SCP Assoc 4 IB Body Part DEFAULT from Connection DB 11 29 01 13 32 43 156 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1583 SCP Assoc 4 IB Color Profile QDEFO from Connection DB 11 29 01 13 32 43 196 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1616 SCP Assoc 4 IB Image Tone Adjustment 0 from Connection DB 11 29 01 13 32 43 246 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1040 SCP Assoc 4 IB found an Image s PLUT 11 29 01 13 32 43 276 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1063 SCP Assoc 4 IB uses PLUT uid 1 2 840 113564 3 5040 2001 11 29 13 32 6 fbNAction and 8 fsNDelete Print t
53. If you did not change information click Cancel gt Note Changing the Node Name of the MIM will increase the boot time by up to 4 minutes on the next boot only 5 At the message Changes will take effect the next time the MIM is restarted click OK 6 Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application Admin menu and select Restart from the next window 7 Advance to the correct procedure INTERFACE BOARD Go To DIGITAL Setting Up the Input for a DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD VIDEO 60 150LC or 150 Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD 7 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 7 2 Input Parameters Network Information Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Input Parameter Description Range area network WAN setup The MIM Service Application software does not require you to enter data in this field Node Name A unique name that identifies the local MIM to 1 15 alphanumeric characters plus hyphen the TCP IP network This name should identify the location of the MIM For a MODALITY SERVER the Node Name is also the AE Title Update the LABEL on the side of the MIM IP Address The unique address that identifies a node in a 4 fields 1 254 in which each field is separated by a network Update the LABEL on the side of the period MIM Subnet Mask Works with the IP Address to subdivide the 4 fields 0 255 in which each field is separated by a netw
54. Job 11 DICOM RoutingClass cpp 1201 Routing EndOfExam DICOM RoutingClass cpp 10838 context State END OF EXAM PhotonDeliveryJob cpp 120 complete job 10 DeliveryJob cpp 1254 send complete to routing DICOM RoutingClass cpp 10917 Entering JobComplete DICOM RoutingClass cpp 11019 JobComplete this routing is still in use Destination cpp 1325 Destination handling JobComplete Destination cpp 1360 JobComplete is adding job 10 to the to be deleted list DeliveryJob cpp 2870 DeliveryJob state ACTIVATED STUDY MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 680 DVPI Unknown Currently Loaded Film Type Ignored IMIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 691 DVPI pageCount 1 IMIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 696 DVPI numCopies 1 IMIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 755 DVPI UnCollated Printing MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 467 Render the page smoothing number is out of range for 8300 8610 MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 775 DVPI PATH 3 PAGE BUILDER Images are processed and resized MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1197 DVPI printPageWithPageBuilder start ChainBuilder cpp 123 ChainBuilder constructed DryViewChainBuilder cpp 61 DryViewChainBuilder constructed TonescaleResolver cpp A73 TonescaleResolve PLUT TonescaleResolver Constructed TonescaleResolver cpp 313 TonescaleResolve PLUT PrinterTonescaleResol Constructed PageBuilder cpp 105 PageBuilder constructe
55. Modify options for Advanced Power Management APM Plug and Play Configuration Modify options for the system s plug and play features 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 2 4 GHz This version of MIM will come from the factory set to boot from CD ROM The following procedure is provided in case the BIOS 15 corrupted 1 Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE 2 Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application or the KEYPAD 3 De energize the MIM 4 Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM See Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM in Section 2 5 Energize the MIM and access the Configuration Setup Utility menu for the BIOS by pressing when prompted on the MONITOR screen 6 Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items and install the settings in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Settings on the Configuration Setup Utility Menu Under Menu Item Devices and I O Ports USB Setup USB Support Devices and I O Ports Serial Port Setup Serial Port B Address Devices and I O Ports Serial Port Setup Serial Port A Address Start Options Startup Sequence Wake On LAN Start Options Startup Sequence First Startup Device 6 Start Options Startup Sequence Second Startup Device Start Options Startup Sequence Third Startup Device 8 8 Disabled Select CD ROM Select Disk 0 Disabled
56. ON or OFF On On 9 Rename the input module per customer wishes 10 Exposures film counter Do not change Do not change 11 Cal Processor Center Temp 1 Measured Center Zone Reading Readjustment at installation usually not required 12 Cal Processor End Temp 1 Measured End Zone Reading Readjustment at installation usually not required 13 Energy Saver Option Customer preference 14 Image Viewing Emulsion 15 Digital Interface 1 Parity Even Even 16 Modality Group 1 6 17 Smoothing Group 1 18 PM Exposures 0 0 19 Film Count Enable On On 20 Film Type DVM for mammography Parameter settings must match corresponding Communication and Image Transfer parameter settings for MIM 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Kodak DryView 8700 8500 and 969 HQ LASER IMAGERS and Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER Enter the following parameter values using MPC Important For the 969 HQ LASER IMAGER and the 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER you must check that the Transfer Clock Speed JUMPER on the INPUT MODULE that connects to the MIM 15 set to 10 MHz See the procedure the SERVICE MANUAL Communication Image Parity Even Image Size Mode New Data Bits 8 Host System EIB Parameter Set 0 Test Pattern Disable User Priority Normal Header Mode Header Frame or Header Line Command
57. Safety Requirements Change on Page 14 4 SERVICE MANUAL History of Software Table 1 5 Versions of Software for the MIM Version Features of Software 1 Original version for MIM 100 only Developed for SPOOLER for DICOM PRINTERS market Used CP DICOM Input Package to connect with the XLP 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS over the network Used DICOM to connect to MLP 190 Features included Grayscale video image acquisition 8 bit 1 150 MHz Digital image acquisition 8 bit e DICOM Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU e Autofilming control 952 P831 KCL Hitachi YMS Toshiba and Siemens mage delivery to a single destination chosen from a list of all available destinations e 10baseT twisted pair 10base2 thinnet 1Obase5 thicknet using TCP IP V 2 x For MIM 100 only Developed for the Image Distribution for Diagnosis and Review market Added e 12 61 digital image acquisition DICOM Store SCU for Study Delivery to WORKSTATIONS and ARCHIVES DICOM Worklist SCU for HIS RIS Gateway access to retrieve patient demographics Manual patient demographics entry via TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD or full KEYBOARD e Automated patient demographics entry via HIS RIS Gateway connection Delivery to multiple destinations chosen from a list of all available destinations e Study re delivery to any available destination Native 100baseT support e Software licensing ability Introduced MIM 50 an
58. Store Qualified or Unqualified Choose a New Store Destination Archive AuboR ad V5 DI DS WS Med View WS MIL Archive Cancel 3 Select the store destination and click OK 7 60 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER General Logical N ame 1 IP Address Po Database M ame UngualStore 000 Model Finish Cancel 4 At the General parameters window enter the following parameters See Table 7 27 a Logical Name b IP Address 5 Click Next Protocol 3 0 service Class Secondary Capture Store m Fort Number 3002 AE Title Archive Timers Counters Association Retry Counter 40 Response Message 1 lt Back Finish Cancel 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 61 SERVICE MANUAL 6 In the DICOM window enter the required information see Table 7 27 7 Click Finish This will select default values for the following groups of parameters e Supported Items Formats Page Formatting e SCU gt Note Descriptions of the parameters in these groups is provided Table 7 28 through Table 7 31 Table 7 27 Destination Parameters Names Addresses and DICOM Information Item Description Range Logical Name Site specific name that you must enter for a particular Destination The KEYPAD displays this name when the operator selects a Destination The MIM requires a unique
59. Tools Hardware and Software Kodak SecureLink Client nml x Connect Certificate Access Apps Secure Server Server local IPAddress 149 88 199 122 Fort 443 Save Server Remove Server Connection Session ID 4T 1 0 66 4 Connector Symbol Green After you connect This completes the SecureLink authentication procedure You can now use the MIM Service Application or pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to access the target MIM For more detailed connection instructions refer to the following procedures Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 You can use this procedure To access the MIM that you physically connected with the serial cable To establish a pass through connection to any other MIM on the same local area network as the first MIM Note Before you can connect using this procedure you must have completed the setup tasks listed in Setup Tasks on Page 2 3 on your LAPTOP COMPUTER Normally you will set up these items during MIM training 1 De energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM 2 Is there an external MODEM connected to this MIM Yes No Continue with Step 3 Advance to Step 5 3 De energize the MODEM 4 Disconnect the MODEM cable from the MIM SERIAL PORT 5 Connect the SERIAL CABLE TL 5224 between the SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP COM
60. When it is selected Yes No default Off Terminate Video Input See For VIDEO 60 only Disabled for VIDEO 150LC Provides 75 ohms at Yes No RS 232 RS 422 Converter in video input Without this termination the image will indicate horizontal Section 3 ringing MODALITIES with high pixel clock frequency will be affected most Terminate Input Video For VIDEO 150 only Same as Terminate Video Input for VIDEO 60 Yes No described above Terminate Ext CSyn For VIDEO 60 only Provides termination for CSync Yes No Image Display For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only Allows selection of previous region of Yes No interest for image display Image Compression For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only Provides ability to acquire an Yes No uncompressed normal lossy or high lossy image for display Status Grayed out for VIDEO 60 and 150LC For VIDEO 150 displays the9 N A tasks during Auto Setup Set Parameters For VIDEO 60 or 150LC only Stores the parameter information N A permanently Set For VIDEO 150 only Stores parameter information permanently if Permanent Temporary is deselected If Temporary is selected stores until next Temporary time MIM is de energized then energized Reset Parameters Resets the parameters either to the factory default or the last saved set Default Last Saved Reset Board For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only Resets the BOARD to defaults N A OK Exits
61. Yes No from other inputs The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Row Symmetric Enables the user to select formats that only have a line of symmetry in the vertical Yes No Formats direction from an Autofilming Link or through a DICOM network The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Slide Format Enables the selection of slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs The Yes No MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Super Slide Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs Yes No Format The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Allowable A list of standard formats that the destination allows This list can be customized to Yes No Formats control what the users see for a specific destination Each format lup 2up 4up etc has 1 setting NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 23 Page Formatting Parameters for Print Destinations Page Formatting Aspect Ratio in Aow Image Size Mix in Aow Requested Image Size Requested Size Mix on Page True Landscape Image Size Mix in Std DICOM Annotation Box Requested Size Scale Requested Size Mix in Aow Trim Ranges Maximum Images Per Band 20 Id aximum Bands Page 20 Minimum Horizontal Separations Vertical Separation Trim Width Enabled 2 Tnm Width Disabled lo Maximum
62. ee 20 40 100 Input VER703C0 Created to provide a set of S shaped curve choices that are intermediate in perceived brightness 1 between those of VER693CO0 TFT Set and those of VER713C0 TFT Set 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid tone brightness which 15 slightly brighter than the mid tone brightness of the VER693CO tables and slightly darker than the mid tone brightness of the VER713CO0 TFT Set As with the 693 0 and VER713CO TFT Sets there are varying degrees of an S shape contribution which gives the strongest end points contrast slope to Table 1 and the strongest mid tone contrast slope to Table 15 2500 3000 2500 2000 1500 4 1000 S00 4 0 20 40 BO at 100 Input VER713C0 Nearly as popular as the 693 0 Set with a somewhat lower mid tone density than the VER693CO Set This set is similar to the 693 0 TFT Set but with a slight increase in brightness 1 the VER713CO0 TFT Set can be 8 32 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images characterized as having slightly lower mid tone density than the VER693C0 TFT Set 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid tone brightness which is noticeably brighter than the mid tone brightness of the 693 0 tables As with the VER693CO TFT Set there are varying degrees of
63. starts thread 0x201392935145 dim cpp 1786 Dim Stop starts 5 80 in SMessage close 5 72 in SMessage SMessage SMessage cpp 80 in SMessage close dim cpp 1288 Dim DeleteDataConnection starts LaserImager cpp 791 CLaserImager Close ends PrintJob cpp 218 CPrintJob PrintPage returns 0 PrintJob h 55 CPrintJob FinalRelease this 0x20139293513153104 NetworkArbiter cpp 350 NetworkArbiter QueueRemove no print jobs pending on idle printers PhotonPrinter cpp 503 Pecan ReadyEvent is signaled Destination cpp 4391 Destination Class is Handling GetAllIDirectDestinations LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI ee ee LLLI DICOM Patient cpp 1050 Entering Patient ReleaseRef DICOM Patient cpp 1019 Entering Patient Patient Destination cpp 4391 Destination Class is Handling GetAllDirectDestinations Got LIT Open Mutex LaserImager cpp 745 lit init is done LaserImager cpp 740 LaserImager cpp 768 open successful LaserImager cpp 770 CLaserImager Open returns true NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Log continues Sample Log 11 MODALITY SERVER to PRINT SERVER to Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER This log is for an SCP receiving DICOM input from an SCU
64. 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 13 32 42 625 5 1323234276355 5 13 32 42 685 5 13 32 42 715 5 13 32 42 745 5 13 32 42 775 5 13 32 42 805 5 13 32 42 835 5 13 32 42 885 5 13 32 42 915 5 13 32 42 945 5 13 32 42 975 4 13 32 43 005 3 13 32 43 035 5 13 32 43 065 5 13 32 43 156 5 13 32 43 196 5 13 32 43 246 5 13 32 43 276 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 848 SCP Assoc 4 Setting Image Box IB for Position 1 N SET DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3566 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3576 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3583 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3601 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3632 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3649 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3679 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1166 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1197 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1215 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1333 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1452 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1453 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1515 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1583 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1616 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1040 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1063 IB Rows 480 IB Columns 748 IB Bits Allocated 8 IB Bits Per Pixel stored
65. 1 1 000 1 000 17 1 6 11 29 01 13 25 37 253 5 ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 37 353 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 37 383 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS Command executed properly 11 29 01 13 25 37 413 6 16952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand STP 1 16 Set up to print 1 copy at a density setting of 6 11 29 01 13 25 37 433 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket STP 1 16 11 29 01 13 25 37 624 5 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received AMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 37 654 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item STC to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 37 684 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response STC Film is staged ready for printing 11 29 01 13 25 37 7146 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand EXP Start exposing film 11 29 01 13 25 37 744 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket EXP 11 29 01 13 25 37 884 5 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received AMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 37 914 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item EOE to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 37 944 2 m952_sendCommand cpp 1122 m952 sendCommand receiveResponse received EOE try again End of Exposure Image acqu
66. 1 PHONE SERVICE optional and EXT MODEM COM 2 MIM 200 667 MHz not used CUSTOMER NETWORK Ethernet CABLE COM 1 SERVICE W and EXT MODEM DISPLAY KEYPAD SLOT BOARD VIDEO ADAPTER INTERNAL MODEM Pros SERIAL INTERFACE INPUT 1 DIGITAL or VIDEO INPUT 2 DIGITAL VIDEO Ethernet 10 100 BASE T ooh PHONE Dol LASER IMAGER MIM 200 1 GHz 2 CABLE 3 m 10 m available H180 0061 H180 0061EC b gt Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 3 16 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 12 MIM 200 1 2 GHz PRINT SERVER Ethernet OUTPUT CABLE Ej CUSTOMER NETWORK Ethernet CABLE COM 10 AUTO FILMING INPUT 1 COM 11 TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD INPUT 1 SLOT BOARD BRACKET 422 BOARD 422 EMPTY DISPLAY KEYPAD 4 Ethernet 10 100 BASE 8200 or 160 LASER IMAGER Ethernet or 3600 DMI CROSSOVER CABLE 3 m 10 m available MIM 200 1 2 GHz H180 3027HCA 180 3027HC Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 17 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 13 MIM 200 X205 2 4 GHz COMBO BOX Dual Input Ethernet OUTPUT CABLE COM 1 SERVICE and EXT MODEM E CUSTOMER NETWORK AUTO FILMING INPUT 1 Ethernet C
67. 10 11 29 01 13 32 42 154 5 DICOM MIMPresentationLUTSCP cpp 274 SCP Assoc 4 PLUT uid 1 2 840 113564 3 5040 2001 11 29 13 32 21 39 11 29 01 13 32 42 625 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 848 SCP Assoc 4 Setting Image Box IB for Position 1 N SET Begin to set parameters for the image box in position 1 of the film box 11 29 01 13 32 42 655 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3566 11 29 01 13 32 42 685 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3576 11 29 01 13 32 42 715 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3583 11 29 01 13 32 42 745 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3601 11 29 01 13 32 42 775 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3632 11 29 01 13 32 42 805 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3649 11 29 01 13 32 42 835 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3679 11 29 01 13 32 42 885 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1166 11 29 01 13 32 42 915 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1197 11 29 01 13 32 42 945 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1215 11 29 01 13 32 42 975 4 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1333 11 29 01 13 32 43 005 3 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1452 11 29 01 13 32 43 035 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1453 11 29 01 13 32 43 065 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1515 11 29 01 13 32 43 156 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1583 11 29 01 13 32 43 196 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1616 11 29 01 13 32 43 246 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1040 11 29 01 13 32 43 276 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1063 1 2 840 113564 3 5040 2001 11 29 13 32 21 39
68. 11 30 01 10 02 21 041 2 ReporterImpl cpp 247 11 30 01 10 02 21 061 2 11 30 01 10 02 21 072 2 11 30 01 10 02 21 092 2 11 30 01 10 02 21 1122 11 30 01 10 02 21 1222 11 30 01 10 02 21 1422 Log Level for Service set to LOGLEVEL2 Log Level for Import set to LOGLEVEL2 Log Level for Routing set to LOGLEVEL2 Log Level for Network set to LOGLEVEL2 Log Level for Storage set to LOGLEVEL2 ReporterImpl cpp 247 Log Level for Keypad set to LOGLEVEL2 ReporterImpl cpp 247 1 1 1 1 RNISystem cpp 387 System starting up on machine MIMSMALL 1 1 1 ReporterImpl cpp 247 ReporterImpl cpp 247 ReporterImpl cpp 247 LL LL LL LLLI LIII LL 11 30 01 10 02 21 162 2 11 30 01 10 02 21 182 2 11 30 01 10 02 23 635 2 RNISystem cpp 393 MIM Application Version 5 0 b10 RNISystem cpp 402 StatRecorder activated StorageClass cpp 583 Activated chkdsk 11 30 01 10 02 26 239 2 PortManager cpp 138 Model Type 25 11 30 01 10 02 26 299 2 PortManager cpp 285 Mapped Added PortID 0x101 11 30 01 10 02 26 309 W PortManager cpp 289 Could not MapSerialPort for 2 308 11 30 01 10 02 26 499 2 PortManager cpp 285 Mapped Added PortID 0x1305 11 30 01 10 02 26 509 2 PortManager cpp 285 Mapped Added PortID 0x104 11 30 01 10 02 26 529 2 PortManager cpp 1565 Found board copcil0 11 30 01 10 02 26 539 2 PortManager cpp 2475 COPCIL FOPCIL Card 0 Hardware Rev 0
69. 11 30 01 10 02 26 559 2 PortManager cpp 2484 COPCIL FOPCIL Card 0 Driver Version 0 1 5 11 30 01 10 02 26 569 2 PortManager cpp 1691 Added Output Port ID 0x601 11 30 01 10 02 26 589 2 PortManager cpp 1700 High Speed COPCIL Interface Card at Slot 18 11 30 01 10 02 27 401 2 MIMDry ViewPrintInterface cpp 1 12 DVPI MIMDryViewPrintInterface start 11 30 01 10 02 27 511 2 MIMDry ViewPrintInterface cpp 2384 DVPI StartDVReportingInstance start DVReporting cpp 30 DVPrintserver logging is up 99 MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 128 DVPI m_pLaserlmager Created MIMDry ViewPrintInterface cpp 1867 DVPI createDVDiagnosticInstance start MIMDry ViewPrintInterface cpp 2 12 DVPI MIMDryViewPrintInterface end KisManager cpp 118 KisManager Activated 11 30 01 10 02 27 531 E 11 30 01 10 02 27 561 2 11 30 01 10 02 27 621 2 11 30 01 10 02 27 641 2 11 30 01 10 02 27 881 2 11 30 01 10 02 27 991 E 11 30 01 10 02 28 021 1 ImgDevExt cpp 176 Something wrong with channelNum 300 ImgCapDev cpp 137 mutex string NETWORK 0 11 30 01 10 02 28 052 2 NetImgCapDevExt cpp 103 NetworkImageCaptureDeviceExt AttachAndLoad 11 30 01 10 02 28 132 2 ConventionalKeypad cpp 104 Conventional Keypad constructed LL LI LI LL LL LI LL LL LI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI 11 30 01 10 02 28 162 2 DICOM MIMPrintSCP cpp 249 PrintSCP listener is activated on port 5040 11
70. 11952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand RQS Request status of the Film Processor 11 29 01 13 17 29 502 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ROS 11 29 01 13 17 29 712 5 ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged 11 29 01 13 17 29 742 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item STA 1 RDY to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 17 29 772 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response STA 1 RDY Film Processor status is 11 29 01 13 17 29 812 6 LaserImager cpp 778 CLaserlmager Close starts thread 0x2013929351258 Begin to close session and print summary 11 29 01 13 17 29 842 6 dim cpp 1786 Dim Stop starts 11 29 01 13 17 29 882 6 11 29 01 13 17 29 912 6 11 29 01 13 17 29 942 6 11 29 01 13 17 29 982 6 11 29 01 13 17 30 013 6 11 29 01 13 17 30 053 6 11 29 01 13 17 30 083 5 11 29 01 13 17 30 113 5 11 29 01 13 17 30 143 5 11 29 01 13 17 30 183 5 11 29 01 13 17 30 213 5 11 29 01 13 17 30 243 5 11 29 01 13 17 30 283 5 11 29 01 13 17 30 313 6 11 29 01 13 17 30 343 6 11 29 01 13 17 30 383 6 End of log SMessage cpp 80 SMessage close ccpacket cpp 845 M952 startPacketTask Quitting SMessage cpp 72 SMessage SMessage SMessage cpp 80 SMessage close dim cpp 1288 Dim DeleteDataConnection starts LaserImager cpp 791 CLaserImager Close ends LaserImag
71. 26 M952 Usage Parameters for Print Destinations E 952 Usage Item Description Range M952 Select M952 to display the information indicated in this table N A Minimum Horizontal Vertical Enter the minimum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is 0 64 Magnification allowed by the destination This parameter does not apply to store destinations Maximum Horizontal Vertical Enter the maximum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is 0 64 Magnification allowed by the destination This parameter does not apply to store destinations Minimum DMAX for M952 Enter the minimum DMAX value that is allowed by the destination when 1 5 2 0 Command Devices mapping to click counts 8 8820 NOV 2003 7 59 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up a Network Store Destination amp Important Before you enter the Storage Destination Parameters verify the information at the Destination e If this is the first Storage Destination see Enabling Software Licenses in Section 4 In the Destination Parameters window press Tab on the LAPTOP COMPUTER to advance to the next field 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Destination Installed Destinations IP Address Default Direct Conn HARD DISK Default Update Configuration View Add Modify Delete 2 At the Installed Destinations window select Add
72. 30 01 10 02 28 192 2 DICOM KeypadBase cpp 85 Loaded new Resource DLL RniResources dll 11 30 01 10 02 29 434 2 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 789 Conventional Keypad Activated 11 22 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting 11 30 01 10 02 29 454 1 11 30 01 10 02 29 474 1 11 30 01 10 02 29 714 2 11 30 01 10 02 29 744 2 11 30 01 10 02 44 004 2 11 30 01 10 02 44 035 2 End of log Sample Log 2 KEYPAD to MODALITY SERVER This log monitors acquisition and print commands from a TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD to a MODALITY SERVER Logs have been filtered to include only the Source Import Subsystem DICOM CKMainDisplayScreen cpp 226 Initialized the hint list DICOM CKMainDisplayScereen cpp 233 Attached to ViewManager DICOM DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 1104 A print spooler conventional keypad has been detected 1 Dry ViewStatusEvent cpp 454 DVPS Printer 1 FP Status FP Unknown FP Normal Dry ViewStatusEvent cpp 464 DVPS Printer 1 mapped status NORMAL NORMAL ConventionalKeypad cpp 1183 Conventional Spooler Keypad firmware version 5 m rr rm rm Network MODALITY SERVER VID I F BOARD MODALITY Target Devices KEYPAD Note The bold text in is not part of the log 11 30 01 13 09 38 818 5 2056 01210904 vid1 Scorpion60ImgCapDev cpp 1340 Scorpion60ImageCaptureDevice Grayscale Store Start 11 30 01 13 09 38 828 5 2056 01210904
73. 31 210 6 DICO DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor CKMenuScreen cpp 52 CKMenuScreen constructor called CKSServiceMenu cpp 196 CKSMachineSetupMenu constructor called ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0xb8 from the frame processor ConventionalKeypad cpp 468 Unknown command received 0xb8 ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor CKScreen cpp 374 CKScreen OnDownButtonPressed called ConventionalKeypad cpp 1504 CK received the command Oxffffffcl from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 31 250 6 DICO 11 29 01 13 37 31 290 6 DICO 11 29 01 13 37 31 450 6 DICO 11 29 01 13 37 31 490 4 DICO 11 29 01 13 37 36 527 6 DICO 11 29 01 13 37 36 567 6 DICO 11 29 01 13 37 36 608 6 DICOM 11 29 01 13 37 36 638 6 DICOM Log continues CKMenuScreen cpp 52 CKMenusScreen constructor called CKSServiceMenu cpp 898 CKSSystemInfo constructor called ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0xb8 from the frame processor ConventionalKeypad cpp 468 Unknown command received 0xb8 ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor CKSServiceMenu cpp 1059 CKSSystemInfo destructor called CKMenuScreen cpp 567 CKDisplayScreen destructor called SSS ESS SS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ConventionalKey
74. 50 60 fal oO gn 95 100 Digital Input X The best curve contrast setting to use to obtain a linear in density response depends on the current Dmax density setting as indicated in the following table 8 40 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images Preferred Pairings of Density and Contrast Settings See Note 1 Density Setting Contrast Setting for Linear in Density Response 15 16 1 13 14 2 11 12 3 9 10 4 7 8 5 5 6 6 3 4 7 1 2 8 1 When using linear in density curves from WKSTN83A on an 8300 LASER IMAGER operating in linear in transmittance 1 3 mode When you choose the contrast setting from this table the density printed by an 8300 LASER IMAGER should decrease in approximately equal steps of Optical Density as the digital input is increased by a given step size The approximate linear in brightness curves in this ULUT set are obtained at Contrast settings of 9 through 12 As the Contrast setting is increased from 9 to 11 mid tone contrast is increased slightly while the contrast in the near black and near white portions of the image is decreased slightly Curve 12 is a repeat of curve 9 For further details on these U693C0 type curves see the description of the U693C0 ULUT Set ULUT Set Selections for the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER The current MODALITY Contrast Table Groups contained in the file Luts86 G5B 1 txt include the following 11 ULUT sets Group 1 UPMSV3K A relatively wide ranging set of saggy curves
75. 50 60 fall au 90 95 100 Digital Input 50 U713C0 Consists of S shaped variations about a central curve which is somewhat brighter than the central linear in perceived brightness curve of U693C0 ULUT Set As with the U693C0 ULUT Set all curves of this set also intersect at the 50 point of maximum input but the mid tone brightness of the curves in this set is somewhat higher than the mid tone brightness of the U693C0 ULUT Set As with the U693C0 ULUT Set as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12 the mid tone contrast 1 e the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale is increased while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased This ULUT set has rather wide applicability and is often used for ultrasound nuclear medicine and DSA It may also be used for other MODALITIES when a brightness greater than that from the U693C0 ULUT Set is desired Perceived Brightness 0 5 10 20 30 40 I 60 fo og 40 95 100 Digital Input X 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 39 SERVICE MANUAL UPMSV3K A relatively wide ranging set of saggy curves This set provides a wider choice of brightnesses than curves 1 6 of the U1 1095 or U1_109B ULUT Set This set is widely used in applications including ultrasound nuclear medicine and others where an S shaped response curve is not desired For these curves overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting 1s increased from 1 to 12 The brighter curves in t
76. 745 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 775 6 8191 000000000 09 44 49 805 5 8191 000000000 09 44 49 835 5 8191 000000000 09 44 49 875 5 8191 000000000 09 44 49 905 5 8191 000000000 09 44 49 935 5 8191 000000000 09 44 49 965 5 8191 000000000 09 44 49 995 5 8191 000000000 09 44 50 026 6 8191 000000000 09 44 50 056 6 8191 000000000 09 44 50 086 6 8191 000000000 End of log 1 p rom orm opm om orm om om m m rm 11 40 t dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Sta FP 1 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Sta FP 10eel ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Sta Y Ready LT14DB ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Sta Y Ready LT LaserImager cpp 778 CLaserImager Close starts thread 0x2013929351297 dim cpp 1786 Dim Stop starts SMessage cpp 80 in SMessage close SMessage cpp 72 in SMessage SMessage SMessage cpp 80 in SMessage close dim cpp 1288 Dim DeleteDataConnection starts LaserImager cpp 791 CLaserImager Close ends LaserImager cpp 1353 currentFilmSize E14X17 currentFilmType BLUE LaserImager cpp 1358 sheetsLeft 103 LaserImager cpp 1361
77. 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 9 2 6 2 1 2 8 2 9 3 0 3 4000 3500 a000 2500 2000 1500 1000 Optimum Contrast Setting 1 00 109 tA d lt lt WN RW N KF c 15 20 40 Input al 100 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images HYB60516 A hybrid multi MODALITY TFT set that supports the diverse needs of several imaging MODALITIES such as may be operating within a Lockheed formerly Loral network These MODALITIES include Fuji Computed Radiography CR Digital Subtraction Angiography DSA or DSI C Arm applications CT MR Ultrasound and Nuclear Medicine The following table defines how these 15 individual TFTs can best be applied to the needs of various imaging modalities supported by this TFT set HYB60516 Applications Imaging MODALITY Suitable Dmax Range Preferred Dmax Suitable TFTs Preferred Contrast Settings Contrast Setting Fuji CR 2 7 3 0 3 0 2 2 DSI DSA 3 0 3 0 4 7 4 C Arm 3 0 3 0 1 4 1 3 0 3 0 2 7 2 MR 3 0 3 0 1 7 2 Ultrasound 2 9 2 9 3 5 7 11 15 9 Nuclear Medicine 2 3 2 3 I2 4000 3500 R S000 IN H 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 20 40 Bu 100 Input MAXXUS Created specifically for use with the YMS SPECT to match Konica film All 15 curves are very close to a single curve The MAXXUS TFT Set provides a set of tables suitable for
78. 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 LL LII LL pp qo sp pro pM o p opm LL LL rm orm om or pm orm m m LL ma LL Size 4096 4096 Beta 5 5 Con 63 fbf 09 50 05 039 5 8191 000000000 09 50 05 079 5 8191 000000000 09 50 05 189 5 8191 000000000 09 50 05 229 5 8191 000000000 09 50 05 269 5 8191 000000000 09 50 05 299 5 8191 000000000 09 50 05 339 6 8191 000000000 09 50 05 379 6 8191 000000000 09 50 05 419 5 8191 000000000 09 50 05 459 5 8191 000000000 09 50 05 499 5 8191 000000000 09 50 05 539 6 8191 000000000 09 50 06 350 5 8191 000000000 09 50 06 431 5 8191 000000000 09 50 06 461 5 8191 000000000 09 50 06 501 6 8191 000000000 09 50 06 541 6 8191 000000000 09 50 06 581 6 8191 000000000 09 50 06 621 6 8191 000000000 09 50 06 651 6 8191 000000000 09 50 06 691 5 8191 000000000 pr r3 or m op pr rp op 8E8820 NOV 2003 ecpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Set YOB17 ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Set Y ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Fmt Id 99 DMax 309 Media BWGen E14X17 dim cpp 2065 Se
79. Acquire From Current Settings Frame Average Constant Acquire From Last Saved Settings Terminate Input Video Use Only Lossless Compression Hau Save mage Status Board Programming Default Set temporary Reset Last Saved VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 15 SERVICE MANUAL Config Horizontal Parameters Vertical Parameters Gain and Offset Sync Parameters Pixel Clock Parameters Press to enter values for 5 sets of parameters Auto Setup Automatically adjusts the values for certain parameters Parameter Description Range Video Input Channel Allows selection of an RGB channel or monochrome 1 2 3 RGB or monochrome window opens to the user to enter the number of frames 2 4 on which to base the calculation of the average Acquire Automatically acquires and displays a test image VIDEO 150 provides option of acquiring from Current Settings or Last Saved settings Constant Acquire Do repetitive acquisitions Ignore Lock Detect on When enabled the MIM will acquire an image even if an error occurs Not Enabled Acquire The software will not compute the Lock Detect Count Do not enable this mode Ignore Signal Detect on For VIDEO 60 and 150LC only The MIM will acquire an image even if Yes No Acquire a signal is not detected Frame Average This feature reduces the signal noise in the image
80. Boot options in the BIOS and change if necessary The following pages provide procedures for setting up the BIOS in the following devices Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Both 1 GHz and 667 MHz Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER 25 PS Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 MIM 100 Note Setting up the BIOS to boot from CD ROM normally involves only changing the settings that select the first and second boot devices CD ROM must be selected to be the first boot device and the HARD DRIVE to be the second But if the BIOS is corrupt all settings will have to be checked Table 4 1 shows general options that are available during BIOS setup Table 4 1 BIOS Setup Functions Menu Use to Main Set up and change the main options for example time date FLOPPY DRIVE HARD DRIVE CD ROM Advanced Change advanced features for example peripheral configuration and advanced chipset configuration Security Enter a password to limit access to the system Exit Save or discard changes Sub Menu Use to Hard Drive Configuration Set up the HARD DRIVE Boot options Modify options for the system to boot up for example boot sequence Peripheral Configuration Modify options for the SERIAL PORTS the PARALLEL PORT and the HARD DRIVE interfaces Advanced Chipset Configuration Modify options for memory and system buses Power Management Configuration
81. DIGITAL MODALITY gt Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 11 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 7 MIM 200 2 4 GHz MODALITY SERVER CABLES TO DIGITAL MODALITY fo RS 485 DATA 75 ohm CABLE 10 m or COAX CABLE 45 m 10 m or 45 m RS 485 Ye ADAPTER 8 CABLE a d o o O 1m 9 8 8 2 m o 2 6 56 gt 73 g ae o 50 gt 5 DIGITAL ADAPTER VIDEO S VIDEO INTERFACE ADAPTER 1 CABLE AUTO FILMING INPUT 2 TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD INPUT 2 COM 1 SERVICE and EXT MODEM COM 2 not used COM PORT o ADAPTER CABLE gt oe TELCO RJ11 oe Ethernet CABLE PHONE optional CUSTOMER NETWORK H180_0114ECA H180_0114EC b 3 12 TO VIDEO MODALITY 25 gas 5 9 so g 9 80 FEES E HR x COLOR rae VIDEO COLOR INTERFACE EN 2 ABLE EN 8 m or 20 M COM 10 AUTO FILMING INPUT 1 a TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD BOARD INPUT 1 CABLE COM 10 11 INTERNAL MODEM or NETWORK ISOLATION SERIAL INTERFACE NPUT 1 DIGITAL or VIDEO VGA PORT INPUT 2 DIGITAL or VIDEO BLANK NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 8 MIM 100 MODALITY SERVER CABLES TO DIGITAL MODALITY pan TO VIDEO MODALITY
82. Display list of all qualified PRINTERS and storage devices Printing Statistics Database Display print count per DICOM or direct MODALITY input 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Starting the MIM Service Application amp Important Only 1 user can connect to a MIM at a time amp Important The beginning and end IP Address for the RAS must be set up for passthrough access Fora PRINT SERVER see Setting up the Network Address of the PRINT SERVER in Section 6 For a Modality Server see Setting up the MODALITY SERVER for the NETWORK in Section 7 1 Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the target MIM Refer to Connecting Your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM on Page 2 23 2 At the Windows TASKBAR select Start gt Programs gt MIM Service 3 Open the correct version of the MIM Service Application gt Note If the application software for the MIM is V 6 1 the MIM Service Application will also be V 6 1 4 At the MIM Service Application window select Connect Connect to MIM The MIM Service Application is now ready for use Quitting the Service Application 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Connect gt Disconnect 2 Select Connect gt Exit to quit the MIM Service Application Your LAPTOP COMPUTER remains connected to the MIM 2 32 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Using pcAnywhere The pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE allows yo
83. Error Frequency LOS oos 4640 ae eed E dd ede BES 11 13 Nei 22 5222225554 4 65 11 13 Troubleshooting with pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE 11 15 Transferring Files Using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE 11 51 Using Windows TASK MANAGER from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE 11 53 Using NT Event Viewer from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE 11 55 oss hc os Soh es ed bo ee ee oe es ee he ae 11 57 Illustrated Parts 5 6 Ewe 12 1 Illustrated Parts 12 1 MIM 100 and MIM 200 1 2 GHz Field Replaceable 12 20 hos mb DC oe eos eh bs ab S 5 bee oe SE TIPP 13 1 Beh and COGS i aD 44005640 wa a 14 1 Safety Regulatory and Marking 14 3 ores es oe Se eh be oe Se oh ee eee Bho eee ban 14 3 Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Safety Requirements 14 4 Compliancy with IEC 60601 1 1 60601 1 1 14 4 14 5 Non Compliancy with 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1
84. LINK NOV03 25 PRINT SERVER QUICK REFERENCE QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK SE868 LAMINATED CARD PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE JULO03 MANAGER with DISPLAY KEYPAD QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK 8E8682 PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE JULO03 MANAGER 200 with PRINT KEYPAD QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK 8E8684 PACS Link 25 PRINT SERVER JULO03 QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE for the KODAK 8E8683 PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE JULO03 MANAGER TOUCH SCREEN KEYPAD SERVICE MANUAL Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE 8E8820 for systems with V 6 1 MANAGER 100 200 Kodak PACS LINK 25 NOVO3 application software PRINT SERVER USER GUIDES Introduction to the Kodak PACS LINK 8 8676 PRODUCTS JULO03 USER S GUIDE for the DISPLAY KEYPAD for 8E8678 use with KODAK PACS LINK MEDICAL JULO03 IMAGE MANAGER 200 and KODAK PACS LINK 25 Print Server USER S GUIDE for the PRINT KEYPAD for use 8E8679 with the KODAK PACS LINK MEDICAL JULO03 IMAGE MANAGER 20 USER S GUIDE for the TOUCH SCREEN 8 8680 KEYPAD for use with the KODAK PACS LINK 03 MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 and 200 Security and Privacy Features for use with the 8E9002 KODAK PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE JULO03 MANAGER and 25 Print Server Security Policy Customer Security Obligations 8E9122 and Best Practices JULO03 USER S GUIDE ADDENDUM for SOFTWARE 8E9892 VERSION 6 1 for KODAK PACS LINK NOV03 MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 and 200 1 16 NOV 2003 8E8820 System Description Glos
85. LaserImager cpp 369 CLaserImager NewPrintJob returns S SUCCESS PrintJob cpp 16 CPrintJob SetJobInfo starts PrintJob cpp 19 PrintJob cpp 22 PrintJob cpp 25 PrintJob cpp 28 PrintJob cpp 3 1 PrintJob cpp 34 inJobInfo gt gammaTable 1 m952 cpp 48 m952 GetPrinterStatus called Printer 1 11952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand RQS inJobInfo gt numCopies 1 inJobInfo gt filmDestination FDCURRENT inJobInfo gt maxDensity 300 inJobInfo gt borderDensity 0 inJobInfo gt numImages 1 LLLI LLLI LL LL LI Request status of PRINTER 11 29 01 13 25 26 387 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 598 5 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ROS ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received PRINTER acknowledged request 11 29 01 13 25 26 628 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 658 5 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item STA 1 RDY to packet List Items 1 11952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response STA 1 RDY PRINTER status is Ready 11 29 01 13 25 26 678 6 11952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand ALI Allocate LASER imager for printing 11 29 01 13 25 26 708 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 848 5 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ALI ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received AMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 1
86. MANAGER 1 E 2 PLUS 969 HQ optional 41 CONTROL LASER IMAGER 9 2 6 FIBER MIM 200 1 GHZ optic CABLES 3 m 10 30 60 m available H180_0062ECA H180_0062EC b Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 19 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 15 MIM 200 1 2 GHz PRINT SERVER FIBER OPTIC FOPCIL OUTPUT CABLES CUSTOMER NETWORK To UPS MIM 200 1 2 GHz Ethernet CABLE COM 10 C DISPLAY COM 11 ane KEYPAD SESS ror IMAGE CONTROL 8500 8700 LASER IMAGER PLUS 969 HQ LASER IMAGER or 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER H180 3028DCA H180 3028DC gt Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 16 MIM 200 PRINT SERVER FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT CABLE CUSTOMER NETWORK Ethernet CABLE POWER To UPS SLOT BOARD SWITCH Ej DISPLAY KEYPAD 2180 or 1120 LASER PRINTER CABLE 8m OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD PHONE optional SERVICE and EXT MODEM COM 2 not used COM 1 SERVICE and CUSTOMER EXT MODEM NETWORK 2 To UPS Ethernet CABLE 2 used DISPLAY KEYPAD 2180 or 1120 LASER PRINTER E NEN MIM 200 1 GHz
87. MIM 200 can operate as both aMODALITY SERVER and PRINT SERVER When it is set up to do so it is identified as a COMBINATION BOX The MIM 200 1 2 GHz only functions as either a MODALITY SERVER or a PRINT SERVER but not a COMBINATION BOX A COMPUTER using Windows 2000 and application software from Kodak controls and processes the functions of the MIM Special purpose INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS are added to the COMPUTER for external communication The MIM does not include a MONITOR KEYBOARD or MOUSE For access to the MIM for service the FE must connect e A LAPTOP COMPUTER or A MONITOR KIT that includes a MONITOR KEYBOARD and MOUSE Figure 1 2 Example MIM 200 667 MHz 1 4 GHz and 2 4 GHz Setup KEYPADS or HOST DIGITAL or VIDEO CONTROL CONSOLES MODALITIES Fiber Optic or Copper DICOM DICOM PRINTER PRINTER US DICOM 3 0 Print Class 9410 01L 8E8820 NOV 2003 1 3 SERVICE MANUAL Printers Used with MIMs The software version listed in the table indicates the minimum software version required for each product Table 1 2 PRINTER from PRINT SERVER Cross Reference Chart Print Interface PRINTER Type Output Data Format CABLES MIM 200 Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER Laser Optical Interface Fiber Optic Print Request Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER Laser Optical Interface Fiber Optic Print Request Kodak Ektas
88. MIMPrintAcse cpp 1743 MIMPrintAcse cpp 710 MIMPrintAcse cpp 694 MIMPrintAcse cpp 706 LL LI LI SCP 4 gt NEW CONNECTION OPENED lt SCP 4 SCU Modality AE Title MIMP SCP Assoc 4 SCU Host IP Address 149 98 199 86 SCP Assoc 4 SCU Implement Version Name SCP Assoc 4 SCU Implement UID 1 2 840 113564 3 1 3 SCP Assoc 4 Destination AE Title MIM SCP Assoc 4 Destination Name MIM SCP Assoc 4 The Default Printer is 83 SCP Assoc 4 No perfect Name match for MIM SCP Assoc 4 No unique ShortName match for MIM SCP Assoc 4 No unique Type match for Destination MIM SCP Assoc 4 Using the Default Printer for Destination MIM SCP Assoc 4 The Printer being used for this session 15 83 SCP Assoc 4 Verification SOP negotiated SCP Assoc 4 Basic Grayscale Print Meta SOP negotiated SCP Assoc 4 Presentation LUT SOP negotiated MIMDicomDevice cpp 59 SCP Assoc 4 Up for 83 from modality MIMP 2 prNGet Get PRINTER status The MODALITY SCU asks for the status and characteristics of the PRINTER that 15 connected to the PRINT SERVER 11 29 01 13 32 40 321 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3753 SCP Assoc 4 Sending Printer SOP N GET 11 29 01 13 32 40 352 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3792 SCP Assoc 4 Sending status for 83 gt Severity NORMAL Status NORMAL N Get 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 19 SERVICE MANUAL 3 fsNCreate Create a film sessi
89. Note This procedure applies only to the VIDEO 60 and 150LC VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS 1 At the Video Board Setup window click Acquire 2 In the Uncompressed Region Of Interest window hold and drag the left mouse button to select a region of interest including a grayscale area The Uncompressed Region of Interest screen is displayed 3 Select a Region of Interest ROI to include grayscale a Use the MOUSE to click and drag a rectangle around an ROI You must drag the MOUSE from the top left position of the ROI to the bottom right position of the ROI b Release the MOUSE click The uncompressed image displays 4 Move the cursor to the blackest point of the screen Hold the b key and press the right MOUSE button The x and y coordinate values will be entered the Black area of the Advanced Leveling window Advanced Leveling BLACK x y 130 364 WHITE s y 254 367 5 Move the cursor to the whitest point of the screen Hold the key and press the right MOUSE button The x and y coordinate values will be entered in the White area of the Advanced Leveling window 6 In the Advanced Leveling window select Perform Leveling 7 36 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER 7 Close the Region Of Interest window 8 In the Video Board Setup window select Set Parameters 9 Select Acquire 10 Select a Region of Interest ROI to check
90. Publication History Publication Changed Date Publication No ECO No Pages File Name Notes 03NOV03 8 8820 8E8820 fm Added information for MIM embedded enclosures e Rev 8E8820 NOV 2003 14 7 Kodak Digital Science DryView and Ektascan are trademarks Printed in U S A SE8820 safety fm EASTMAN KODAK COMPANY Rochester NY 14650 Kodak Service amp Support
91. SHOCK DETECTOR is clear The PRODUCT LABEL on the CARTON indicates that the EQUIPMENT is correct for the site 4 Unpack the CARTON holding the MIM 5 Unpack the other CARTONS and check the contents They should include A LASER IMAGER if the MIM will be used as a PRINT SERVER See the LASER IMAGER SERVICE MANUAL for installation instructions An UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UPS See the installation instructions sent with the UPS A UPS is optional with the MIM 100 See Installing the 25 PS on an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER for special instructions for the 25 PS CABLES for connecting the MIM to the MODALITY KEYPAD HOST CONTROLLER if used network and or PRINTER CD ROMS with the current version of the MIM Application Software User Guides 3 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Installing the 25 PS The 25 Print Server is the print server for new orders as it can be used in a hospital clinic or mobile unit and has a number of mounting options gt Note When installing connect the following components UPS to the POWER STRIP 25 Print Server to the UPS UPS COMMUNICATIONS CABLE to COM 2 on the 25 Print Server In this configuration the power switch on the power strip will be used to safely power up and down the 25 Print Server Important If the 25 Print Server is installed without using the power strip or the UPS communications cable it is necessary to exit the system software u
92. Set 969 Density 13 0 Port 0 Prescale Parity Disable Interface Digital EIB Parity Even 969 Cmd Set Beta Stop Bits 1 Horizontal 3 Vertical 3 Match Border YES P4 0 Baud 19200 Dmin Mode 0 Normal End of Message None 4095 12 bit 0 Media Size 14x 17 Parity Enable Enable Media Type Port see Note 2 BWGEN ID Fgnd Intensity Time out 25 255 8 bit Protocol Packet ID Bgnd Intensity 0 Pixels Per Line 0 TFT VER 693 0 P6 0 Rotate All Images No Character Pacing 0 Note Click on 969 Command Set in the Defaults box to enter all of the above values Horizontal Smooth 8 Vertical Sharp 0 Destination Processor 0 Vertical Smooth 8 Density Test Contrast Source NVRAM Framing No Pixel Correction Yes Slides 35 mm Dual Switch Off Scale Format No Scale Magnif Yes Memory Full Resp MOV Requeue 5 Image Lines 0 Override 952 Beta No Modality Digital Pixel Width see Note 1 Aspect Ratio 1 00 User ID Customer Digital IF Timing Preference T6 200 Horizontal Sharp 0 Memory Management 17 255 Best Fit 10 255 Parameter settings must match corresponding Communication and Image Transfer parameter settings for the MIM NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting up a PRINTER Communi
93. Sync Parameters e anne Eiane E deae Figure 7 7 VIDEO 150 BOARD Sync Parameters Ed GR rt pup ESL Li purse es Ur 7 20 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 11 Windows Pixel Clock Parameters Parameter Description Range VCO Divisor VIDEO 60 only External divisor setting for PLL Select from Values from 3 80 but not all drop down menu The Video Control Oscillator VCO divisor numbers are included default 3 maintains the VCO frequency in the range of 75 to 150 MHz and is calculated automatically VCO Divisor VIDEO 150 only External divisor setting for PLL The divisor is 1 2 4 8 No default selected automatically to keep the VCO frequency in the range of 15 to 150 MHz A view only field VCO Divisor VIDEO 60 only Allows override of calculated PLL VCO divisor On Off Default Off Override value VCO Frequency Automatically calculated A view only field VIDEO 150 75 000 150 000 VIDEO 60 14 000 230 000 VIDEO 150LC 150 000 450 000 No defaults for any Vsync Capacitor Vsync extraction capacitor setting Automatically calculated See Table 7 12 0 3 Default 3 See Table 7 12 calculated A view only field Lock Detect Count VIDEO 60 and 150LC only The number of pixel clock periods 0 9999 no default detected b
94. The MIM Service Application allows you to view and modify the parameters for the TCP IP and Ethernet circuit that are used to set up the MIM as a device on the network In most MIMs the RJ45 Ethernet connector is on the CPU MOTHERBOARD In some MIMs the RJ45 connector is NETWORK BOARD located a slot in the back of the MIM In either case you will use the LAPTOP COMPUTER to set it up 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Network Network Configuration Node Mame SCLI AE Title MIM IP Address 23 123 123 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address Transceiver HAS Serge 2 e Begin IP Address 149 98 140 200 End IP Address 143 38 140 201 Cancel 2 Determine from the customer if you must change any of the factory default settings in the MIM Network Configuration window 3 See Table 6 2 on Page 6 5 for descriptions of the parameters in the MIM Network Configuration window Node Name A name that identifies the MIM on the Local Area Network LAN The Node Name of a PRINT SERVER is also the COMPUTER name of the MIM Address See Network Administrator Subnet Mask See Network Administrator Gateway Address See Network Administrator RAS Server Begin and End IP Addresses See Network Administrator The 2 addresses must be sequential and the End IP Address must be higher than the Begin IP Address
95. Touchscreen Keypad Operating Language ENGL Date Format 1 r Store Connection 4 Demographics Input Device f mensam Footswitch Bar Code Reader European Modality Configure Cancel 3 At Demographic Input Device select Code Reader 4 Click Configure Bar Code Reader r Demographic Field Configurations Primary Field Frefis Sut fis Leading Field Mame Size Size Discriminator ero Filter 7 PATIENT NAME C PATIENT ID C BIRTHDATE SEX X D ACCESSIONNUMBER 0 o Ff C REFERRING PHYSICIAN o o o Automatic Search Date Format Delimiter nne e cancel 7 72 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER 5 Based on the customer needs select the primary field that matches the BAR CODE LABEL at the site Enter prefix and or suffix sizes discriminators and or leading zero filter as needed Parameter Description Range Primary Field The demographic field that is used to search the patient list for a matching record This 1s also the field that receives scanned data when no discriminator is found e the scan was done while in the Acquisition screen no field is currently selected on the Study Info screen PATIENT NAME PATIENT ID BIRTHDATE SEX ACCESSION NUMBER REFERRING PHYSICIAN Prefix Size A prefix filter size for e
96. ULUT set with all of its curves close to each other and close to a single central curve that was designed to provide printed densities which match as accurately as possible a table of target densities defined by Siemens for their CT systems There is a very small variation range provided in this ULUT set Curves 1 4 7 and 10 give a slightly lowered mid tone brightness Curves 2 5 8 and 11 give the nominal or target mid tone brightness and curves 3 6 9 and 12 give a slightly elevated mid tone brightness Within each of these three groups the mid tone contrast increases very slightly as the contrast setting is increased e g from 2 to 5 to 8 to 11 SIEMRS3C A tight ULUT set with all of its curves close to each other and close to a single central curve that was designed to provide printed densities which match as accurately as possible a table of target densities defined by Siemens for their MR systems There is a very small variation range provided in this ULUT set Curves 1 4 7 and 10 give a slightly lowered mid tone brightness Curves 2 5 8 and 11 give the nominal or target mid tone brightness and curves 3 6 9 and 12 give a slightly elevated mid tone brightness Within each of these three groups the mid tone contrast increases very slightly as the contrast setting is increased e g from 2 to 5 to 8 to 11 U1 109B The original standard ULUT set for the 8300 LASER IMAGER A recommended replacement for this ULUT se
97. UTP 3 UPS optional mem NETWORK MODEM ON OFF E SWITCH blue green SLOT BOARD B AUTOFILMING CABLE P ND ER ERTOE MIM 100 NR 433 MHz with SERIAL INTERFACE MICRO INDUSTRIES CPU SLANE DIGITAL or VIDEO BLANK 6 BLANK TOUCHSCREEN or VGA ADAPTER PRINT KEYPAD 8 ISOLATION INTERNAL MODEM H180_0088DCA H180_0088DC 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 13 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 9 MIM 100 1 2 GHz WITH 2 MODALITY CONNECTIONS COM 10 AUTO FILMING COM 11 INPUT 1 TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD AUTO FILMING TOUCHSCREEN To UPS INPUT 2 OR PRINT KEYPAD COM 1 2 ty CUSTOMER NETWORK ISOLATION 4 Wo9 BOARD 422 INPUT 1 VIDEO or DIGITAL INPUT 2 VIDEO or DIGITAL COM PORT ADAPTER CABLE H180_3026DCA H180_3026DC 3 14 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 10 TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD CABLES Cable ZEN Barcode Reader Mini Keypad Keyboard Footswitch H180 0117HCA H180 0117HC 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 15 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 11 MIM 200 PRINT SERVER Ethernet OUTPUT CABLE Ej CUSTOMER NETWORK Ethernet CABLE POWER To UPS SWITCH SLOT BOARD Ethernet 10 100 BASE T DISPLAY KEYPAD INTERNAL MODEM 8200 or 160 LASER IMAGER Ethernet or 3600 DMI CROSSOVER TELCO CABLE 3m 10 m available 8211
98. V 2 2 MODALITY SERVERS only See Figures 12 SP4E99 16 BOARD video 150LC interface 10 and 12 11 The BOARDS can be used in 4 5524 BOARD single channel video 60 interface A oo installed in slots 3 and 4 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 7 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 6 25 PS FRAME AY External rd H180 0091HCA H180 0091HC 1 5 8 2908 Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER Includes HARD DRIVE with pre loaded software FRU for U S and International Does not include INTERNAL MODEM or OUTPUT BOARD See Figure 12 7 7 7814 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY For international use UPS 230 V 7E2998 POWER STRIP KIT For mobile applications 5 6E7293 UPS HOLDOWN KIT Not illustrated For mobile applications 26 1011 5783 7 FASTENERS Anchor self tapping Not illustrated Used to fasten MIM to wall Supplied in bag 7 42 0007 5371 7 CABLE Ethernet 7 ft Not illustrated 4E8061 External Modem Includes POWER ADAPTER not illustrated TELEPHONE CORD not illustrated e SERIAL CABLE not illustrated 3 5E5800 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY For U S and Canada UPS 120 V 12 8 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Figure 12 7 25 PS BOARDS and CABLES 2 H180_0096DCA H180_0096DC 1 6 7866 BOARD MODEM See Figure 12 8 Used in 25 PS units manufactured with MIM software earlier than V 6 0 C CAE Hm 6 5 5554 MEMORY STICK 128 MB PKD Not illustrated 3E
99. an S shape contribution which gives the strongest end points contrast slope to Table 1 and the strongest mid tone contrast slope to Table 15 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1 3 1000 500 20 40 BO 100 Input VER723C0 Designed to offer another choice of curves similar to the S shaped curves of VER713C0 but at a brightness higher than VER713CO which in turn is brighter than VER703CO which is brighter than VER693C0 This choice is needed at certain customer sites e g at GE CT I sites where higher brightness is desired for mid brain gray white matter and or abdominal soft tissue 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1 1000 s00 20 40 60 al 100 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 33 in optical density results on film for density settings of 3 2 through 1 8 respectively Curves 9 through 11 are the same as VER693CO curves 6 through 8 Curves 12 through 14 are designed for film digitizer applications Curve 15 is the same as curve WRKSTN2A Designed for post processing imaging workstations in which curves 1 through 8 are designed to produce linear SERVICE MANUAL NOV 2003 8E8820 100 uui ll LLELLEELEELEBSSBEEN LEER EL EE LLL ELLE 8 THOTT CTS o7 EA c EOS 2592 EA o5 RENS ETa rc EE AES SENA OA RR
100. and sending it to a Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER for printing The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the Network and Delivery Subsystems set at level 5 DICOM Network MODALITY MODALITY 11 30 01 16 19 04 501 3 3058 0003661 1 being updated 11 30 01 16 19 04 501 4 3058 23691267 11 30 01 16 19 04 501 4 3058 0003661 1 11 30 01 16 19 04 501 2 3058 0003661 1 11 30 01 16 19 04 501 5 3058 23691267 rea m rm Severity NORMAL Status NORMAL Get 11 30 01 16 19 09 508 4 3049 23691523 Destructed 11 30 01 16 19 09 508 5 11 30 01 16 19 09 508 4 11 30 01 16 19 09 508 4 11 30 01 16 19 09 508 4 Destructed 11 30 01 16 19 09 508 5 3058 23690243 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 4 3056 23693059 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 4 3049 23692803 Constructed 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 5 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 4 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 3 4008 00029955 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 3 4008 00029955 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 5 3058 00036611 3058 23691267 3056 23690755 3056 23691779 3049 23690499 II II II II 3058 23692547 3058 0003661 1 SS m Tq rea m rm rm SERVER 8200 LASER IMAGER PRINT SERVER MIMDicomInterface cpp 334 SCU Assoc 10247 8200 Reporting status is stale no longer MIMPrintService cpp 3678 Printer Status Request End Received MIMDicomInterface cpp 275 SCU Assoc 10247 8200 Releasing 8200 IMIMDicomlnterf
101. area 4 fields 1 254 in which each field is separated by a period Transceiver Type The TRANSCEIVER type of the NETWORK BOARD or circuit used for network communications This is a view only field UTP RJ45 is the only option for the MIM 200 or 25 PS Although the MIM 100 has various options RJ45 1s recommended These options are available only when using the NETWORK COMBO CARD 10base e UTP RJ45 Thickwire 10 base 5 Thinwire 10 base 2 RAS Server Begin IP Address Beginning IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool The Begin IP Address must be lower than the End IP Address and located on the same subnet The Begin and End IP Addresses must be sequential 4 fields 1 254 in which each field is separated by a period RAS Server End IP Address Ending IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool The End IP Address must be higher than the Begin IP Address and located on the same subnet The Begin and End IP Addresses must be sequential 4 fields 1 254 in which each field 15 separated by a period 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up Network Profiles for a Mobile 25 PS For a 25 PS installed in a Mobile Van to connect to the network at different customer sites a different Network Profile for each site is necessary The IP Addresses can be set up in the MIM Service Application or on the KEYPAD by using Network Profiles Creating Networ
102. behavior of the 3M Toshiba or YMS interface Extended Page Flag that determines if the MIM will allow the extended page Yes No Formats formats 15 1 16 1 20 1 24 1 that can be selected at the Auxiliary KEYPAD Older YMS Imaging Devices do not support the new page formats Note Parameters indicated by do not apply to all types of Autofilming 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 43 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up a Network Print Destination amp Important See the tables on 7 49 and following for detailed information on the Destination Parameters 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Destination The Installed Destinations window will display Installed Destinations IP Address Default Direct Conn HARD DISK Default Update Configuration WEIN Add Modify Delete Important The following procedure for installing destinations must be done for each network destination 2 At the Installed Destinations window select from the Update Configuration panel the following sequence Add Print Network Qualified 7 44 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Choose a New Network Print Destination DM 1200 DM 3600 DPS5 KELP 1120 DPS5 KELP 2180 160 100 LP CF Input Package KELP 1120 CP DICOM Input Package KELP 2180 CP DICOM Input Package I
103. certain nuclear medicine applications specifically to provide a relatively flat low contrast curve shape in the brightest portions of an image This minimizes the visibility of soft tissue in a bone nuclear medicine image in which bone is printed as black on a white background This is a relatively tight TFT set offering limited variation with contrast setting 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 23 SERVICE MANUAL 4000 3500 A 3000 S z500 ee S000 SSS eS SS See 1500 1000 Input MSFDUPI1 Designed to meet the density printing requirements of a TFT based LASER IMAGER for Kodak that is used as the PRINTER in a DUPLICATOR for Kodak equipped with a MULTI SHEET FEEDER The 15 individual TFTs of this TFT set are designed to map 15 different Dmin and Dmax nominal input ranges original film into the full density range of the imager approximately 0 2 to 3 1 for Kodak DryView Blue film Example If the original film is a blue based film from a LASER IMAGER with a film Dmin of about 0 2 and a printed Dmax of about 3 0 a reasonable contrast setting for duplicating this film would be 11 However since these input density ranges are approximate other similar settings 6 in this example could give optimal results from a user perspective Refer to the following table of nominal contrast settings Nominal Contrast Settings Dmin Dmax 3 0 Dmax 3 2 Dmax 3 4 Dmax 3 6 Dmax 3 8 0 05 C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5
104. film Film Output Destination Indicates film destination Processor Magazine or for 2180 PRINTER only Bin 0 9 Send N Event Reports Enables SCP support of N Event reporting for this SCU Warning Status Enables or disables PRINTER warning messages to SCU Annotation Common Text Elements Print Date Prints the date the image file was received Print Time Prints the time the image file was received Page Number Prints page numbers on film Hospital Name Prints the Hospital Name text field entered in the Service Tracking Menu of the MIM Service Application Modality ID Prints the text entered in the adjacent field Image Resizing Image Resizing The Requested Decimate Crop DICOM element within DICOM Basic Print is supported and determines if an image should be cropped minified or scaled when the size or requested size of the image is greater than the printable area of the film Images are automatically resized using a combination of Scaling Minification and Cropping An icon is printed at the bottom right hand corner of the film indicating images were resized and the type of resizing method applied Negotiate Color Print When enabled the MIM SCP will attempt to negotiate color print SOP with the SCU 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Parameter Descriptions Minify Scale Select Minify Scale to enable both minification and scale reduction and ap
105. for phone lines RJ 45 8 WIRE MODULAR CONNECTORS for Ethernet twisted pair wiring RS 232 RS 422 standards for physical and electrical specifications of a serial interface between a COMPUTER and a peripheral for example a MODEM 5 485 EIA standard for digital data connections between devices Service Class User DICOM Service Class Provider 8E8820 NOV 2003 1 17 SERVICE MANUAL ransmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Set of communication protocols developed for the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency DARPA to connect dissimilar systems The TCP controls he transfer of the data and the IP provides the routing mechanism S T C OUCHSCREEN KEYPAD Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen UT distance with less risk of electrical interference ser Lookup Table nqualified he MODALITY has not been field tested Input nshielded Twisted Pair ide Area Network wisted Pair iring used in telephone systems and many networks consisting of a pair of COPPER WIRES twisted around each other to counteract the effects of noise Commonly used instead of coaxial Ethernet cable in network applications Usually unshielded however the more expensive shielded version supports greater 1 18 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Section 2 Tools Hardware and Software Introduction This section provides information about the tools used for installation and service of the
106. in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200 Table 3 10 CABLES for Digital Autofilming RS 422 Serial Control m 49 2 ft or 45 m 147 6 ft The KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure Catalog CABLE Description Length Number Notes RS 485 DATA CABLE DB37 10 m 32 8 ft 197 2330 Both ends are male F F gender changer included 45 m 147 6 ft 877 7021 The CONNECTORS not installed Both ends are male F F gender changer included RS 485 ADAPTER CABLE for the MIM 1 m 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 200 RS 422 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE 10 m 32 8 ft 842 9391 Both ends male F F gender changer included DB37 45 m 147 6 ft 1970862 The CONNECTORS not installed Both ends are male F F gender changer included RS 422 ADAPTER CABLE 1 m 3 2 ft 814 5732 DB37 to DB15 KEYPAD CABLE 3 m 9 8 ft Included with the KEYPAD KEYPAD Extension CABLE Extends the 12m 39 4 ft 8815144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels One KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 15 42 m 137 8 ft 848 3539 end is labeled Keypad and the other end is labeled Rear Panel KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT ADAPTER CABLE 1 m 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 Odd numbered COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for KEYPADS and even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 31 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 20 MODALI
107. menu 3 Select Grayscale Print 4 Check the quality of the test print Running a Network Ping Test from the MIM Service Application 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the MIM Service Application 2 Select Connect gt Connect to MIM 3 Select Diagnostics gt Network Network Diagnostics 2 4 Select the Ping field only and click Run Input IP Address 123 123 123 50 5 Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to enter the IP Address of the network target 6 Click OK 7 Check that Ping was successful 11 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Running Network Ping from the DISPLAY KEYPAD 1 Select the Menu button on the KEYPAD 2 Using the Arrow keys advance from the Service menu to the Diagnostic menu 3 Select Network Ping 4 Check that Ping was successful Running a Network DICOM Echo Test 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and launch the MIM Service Application 2 Select Connect gt Connect to MIM 3 Select Diagnostics gt Network Network Diagnostics 4 Select the DICOM Echo field only and click Run KELP 180 5 Enter the IP Address Port Number and AE Title of the network target Then click OK 6 Check that DICOM Echo was successful 8 8820 NOV 2003 11 5 SERVICE MANUAL Running Diagnostics of the INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS The procedure includes tests for the f
108. monochrome 2 Variable Border Indicates whether the destination allows the user to select a border density Yes No Density between black and clear The parameter has no meaning for store destinations Curve Shape Specifies whether the destination allows Curve Shape Tonescaling with Curve Yes No Tonescaling shape and contrast Determines if the MIM will send Curve Shape Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of PLUTs Has no meaning for store destinations Perception LUT Specifies whether the destination allows Perception LUT Tonescaling with TFT Yes No Tonescaling set and contrast setting Determines if the MIM will send Perception LUT Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of PLUTs Has no meaning for store destinations PLUT Service Specifies whether the destination allows Presentation Lookup Tables PLUTs Yes No PLUTs are used to standardize tonescaling information for the same image on any type of PRINTER Information in PLUT includes curve shape contrast pivot density TFT set DMIN DMAX and border DMAX Parameter has no meaning for store destinations Extended Print These attributes MODALITY body part and image tone adjustment can be Yes No Attributes used by some destinations to enhance image quality The parameter attributes are automatically sent to the store destination 7 58 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7
109. network DICOM 1 Fiber Copper or Ethernet output NOV 2003 8E8820 INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS The INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS used in MIMS are identified in Table 1 4 Table 1 4 INPUT and OUTPUT BOARDS System Description Type of BOARD MIM 200 2 4 GHz MIM 200 1 GHz MIM 200 1 2 GHz MIM 200 667 MHz MIM 100 433 MHz MIM 100 1 2 GHz 25 PS Input PRIMARY Ethernet 10 100base T NETWORK ISOLATION EEC countries VIDEO 60 INTERFACE VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE VIDEO 150 INTERFACE DIGITAL INTERFACE Output SECONDARY Ethernet 10 100base T FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT FOPCIL COPPER OUTPUT COPCIL MIM OPTICAL INTERFACE x gt gt Communication RS422 SERIAL I F 8 Channel 5422 DIST 2 Channel RS 422 1 Channel MODEM X X X X PRIMARY Ethernet connection is on the MOTHERBOARD of the COMPUTER An EXTERNAL MODEM is an option on the MIM 200 all 25PS and MIM 100 1 2 GHz gt Note For MIM s with software V 6 1 and higher the boards must be installed in the correct slots in order for the system to boot See MIM 200 1 2 GHz BOARDS on Page 12 6 and MIM 100 1 2 GHz BOARDS on Page 12 7 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL MODEM
110. or Black For Film Base Select Clear Film Blue Film or Paper For Film Size Select the film size to be used For Film Output Destination Select Bin 0 9 969 Processor or 969 Magazine Image Resizing Select Minify Scale or Crop to resize images Text Box Relocation For Text Box Relocation select Top Bottom or None to cut and place text information back in cropped images SourcelD Not adjustable for information only Border DMAX Type a number from 0 00 to 3 99 Note for the 160 2180 and 8900 the default border Dmax Image Dmax Selecting Always Apply will cause the parameter set at the SCP to be used not the corresponding parameter from the SCU Table 8 3 Image Processing Parameter Definitions Parameter Descriptions PLUT Presentation Lookup Table This DICOM standard for tonescaling attribute can be sent by the SCU to help provide an optimum image If checked the SCP will negotiate PLUT Service if requested by the SCU Tonescaling Method Perception LUT This is a Kodak standard that uses TFT sets to help provide optimum images It is used normally with Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS but can be used also with the 1120 and 2180 LASER IMAGERS Curve Shape This is a Kodak standard that uses curve shape to help provide optimum images It is used normally with 1120 2180 and 160 IMAGERS PRINTERS TFT ULUT file Transfer Functio
111. printerStatus Normal LaserImager cpp 1367 imsStatus IMS Normal availableMemory 33548288 bytes LaserImager cpp 1373 CLaserImager GetPrinterStatusHelper returns S SUCCESS LaserImager cpp 1200 PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper ends LaserImager cpp 672 CLaserImager PollPrinterStatusChange ends LaserImager cpp 1370 1 1 LaserImager cpp 1356 j LaserImager cpp 1364 fpStatus FP Ready 1 J NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Sample Log 10 PRINT SERVER to PRINTER Superset_cmdset Job Transfer This log is for a MIM SCP communicating with a Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER during a job transfer using Superset_cmdset The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the System General Subsystem set at level 6 MODALITY MODALITY SERVER DICOM Network PRINT SERVER System General PRINTER Superset command set is used in communications with the 8500 8700 and 969 LASER IMAGERS and the 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER The following table indicates the normal sequence of commands in a print job transfer between PRINT SERVER and PRINTER LASER IMAGER Host Command Response Comment Sta Pr x Ask status of PRINTER Sta Y LT 35 Status of LT PRINTER is Ready 35 sheets of black and Media BWDryB E14x17 white DryView Blue film siz
112. should be logically related to the name for the first destination n Step 5 if the second destination 15 to be the default destination enter a check mark in the field for Set As Default Destination for ambiguous DICOM AE Title n Step 9 the second destination Printer 2 will automatically be selected 15 Advance to Completing Configuration of the Destinations below 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 19 SERVICE MANUAL Completing Configuration of the Destinations 1 Check that you correctly set up the destination s by running a test print using MIM Service Application Diagnostics gt System 2 After completing configuration of the PRINT SERVER advance to Type of System Go To PRINT SERVER Section 8 Obtaining Optimum Images COMBO BOX Section 7 Setting Up a MODALITY Server Parameter Tables Important Do not change any of the items in the tables for a qualified destination unless directed by the TSC If an item is not checked in the Supported Items or Media Information windows the customer will not be able to use that item e The KEYPAD of the MIM will not display a feature or function that is not allowed The MIM will not recognize a request for an item that the destination does not support 6 20 NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 6 4 General Parameters Logical Name SCP AE Database Name Model Memon MegaPitels E
113. status of IMAGER memory 11 29 01 13 25 28 581 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket INQ 11 29 01 13 25 28 841 5 ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged request 11 29 01 13 25 28 871 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item ANQ 504 504 0 0 to packet List ZItems 1 11 29 01 13 25 28 901 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response ANQ 504 504 0 0 IMAGER responded that available memory is 16 meg 504 blocks x 32K all contiguous with no holes or bad blocks 11 29 01 13 25 28 931 5 m952 sendImagelnfo cpp 555 LIT Send Command AQU I Acquire Image number 1 11 29 01 13 25 28 961 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket AQU 1 11 29 01 13 25 29 0915 ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 29 121 5 ImageBox cpp 283 CImageBox SetImagelInfo returns 0x 20139293510 11 29 01 13 25 29 151 6 ImageBox cpp 311 CImageBox PrintData starts 11 29 01 13 25 35 170 6 LaserImager cpp 732 LIT in use by thread 0x2013929351212 wait and retry 2 11 29 01 13 25 36 572 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 36 602 5 m952 sendImageData cpp 303 m952 sendImageInfo LIT Get Response returns PAS Image transfer executed properly 11 29 01 13 25 36 632 5 ImageBox cpp 394 lit sendImageData time 7 4
114. system on MIMs from Windows NT to Windows 2000 V_6 0 supports only the following MIM platforms MIM 100 433 MHz MIM 200 667 MHz MIM 200 1 0 GHz MIM 200 2 4 GHz Kodak PACS Link 25 Print Sever With V 6 0 the following items no longer supported MIM 50 DPS DICOM Print Server Kodak 3600 DESKTOP MEDICAL IMAGER Kodak 1200 DESKTOP MEDICAL IMAGER supports VPN remote access Film border default setting Image Dmax for 2180 8900 and 160 applications Date annotation format is configurable according to international requirements Printing of patient demographics in the quotation box at the bottom of the film if DICOM Store is enabled HISRIS enhancements Polling interval can be configured Record retention window can be configured Enable disable scheduled procedure step start time Enable disable Study Description V 6 1 Adds support for embedded enclosure mproves workflow for bar code reader by allowing use from Acquisition screen Uses image capture time in DICOM study date time and page annotation date time Supports underscore character in AE Title 8 8820 NOV 2003 1 15 SERVICE MANUAL Specifications For machine specifications see the SITE SPECIFICATIONS document for the MIM Documentation Publication Product Pub No Notes SITE Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE 8 9891 SPECIFICATIONS MANAGER 100 and 200 and Kodak PACS
115. the MIM and start the MIM Service Application 2 Select Connect gt Connect to MIM 3 Select Logs 4 From the Logs pull down menu select Error History gt Note Log Levels do not apply to the Error History Log All errors are logged Emm Error History 5 Enter View From and View Through dates and times for the log to be retrieved gt Note The right 2 boxes in the View fields specify time in hours and minutes using the military system of 1 to 24 hours For example 23 and 41 corresponds to 11 41 PM 6 Click OK 7 Select the mode of retrieval To view the log on the MONITOR of the LAPTOP COMPUTER click View Log To store the log on the HARD DRIVE of the LAPTOP COMPUTER click Save As 11 10 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Interpreting the Error History Log Cancel Date Time 300 010 02 01 2002 11 25 33 7026 4059 01 31 2002 11 53 25 The following boot start or system start driver s failed to load Mouclass 305 010 01 31 2002 11 53 20 An invalid port was encountered based on the model 305 010 01 31 2002 11 53 20 An invalid port was encountered based on the model 308 010 017 3172002 11 53 20 An invalid port was encountered based on the model 36 402 01 31 2002 11 5457 While validating that COMS was really serial port the contents of the divisor 36 402 01 31 2002 11 5457 While validating that COM4 was really serial port the contents of
116. the aspect ratio is not 1 1 the software corrects for non square pixels Page Pre When enabled this feature ensures that sufficient On Off allocation memory is available on the HARD DISK to prevent a Buffer Full condition while the MIM stores a page 7 14 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 6 Windows Video Board Setup Video Board Setup Video Input Channel f C C 1 2 3 AGB Contig Horizontal Parameters Sunc Parameters Gain amp Offset Parameters Vertical Parameters Parameters The Terminate Video Input panel Terminate Video Input Miscellaneous applies to VIDEO Auto Setup Channel 1 lgnare Lock Detect on Acquire 60 only VIDEO 2 Channel 2 ignore Signal Detect on Acquire 150LC is Active Channel 3 Lossless File Compress on Transfer Passthrough Constant Acquire Terminate Ext C5yn Stop xui Frame Average Save Image Use previous region of interest to display image Image Compression eorr Mone C Normal Lossy High Lossy Status Scorpion60 Setup Board 0 Board Programming Reset Board Image Display VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD Video Board Setup Video Input Channel li nfi Horizontal Parameters Sync Parameters Gain amp Offset Parameters Vertical Parameters Fisel Clock Parameters LE Ignore Lock Detect on Acquire
117. the destination allows different printing qualities Remote Image Enables images to be sent to the destination when they are acquired from the imaging source Yes No Deletion image node Select if the destination allows remote image deletion Rotation Allows the KEYPAD to prevent the customer from selecting a page orientation of landscape for Yes No NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 21 Interpolation Parameters for Print Destinations Interpolation Item Description Range Interpolation Select Interpolation to display the supported features indicated in this table N A list of interpolation modes Interpolation allows the user to use the KEYPAD or other input to select from a No Magnification Bilinear Replication Cubic Spline Cubic Convolution 2 Cubic Convolution 3 8 8820 NOV 2003 7 53 SERVICE MANUAL Table 7 22 Format Parameters for Print Destinations Formats Custom Formats Slide Format Bow Symmetric Formats Super Slide Format lup 15up 2up 16 up 4up 20 up 6 up 24 up Sup 30 up 3up 35 up 12up lt Back Finish Cancel Item Description Range Format Types Select Format Types to display the information indicated in this table N A Custom Formats Custom formats enables the selection of formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD or
118. the divisor 36 402 01 31 2002 11 5457 while validating that COMS was really serial port the contents of the divisor 3 402 1 31 2002 11 5457 User configuration data for parameter COM overriding firmware configuration 3 402 01 31 2002 11 5457 User configuration data for parameter COM overriding firriware configuration FOOO 405 01 31 2002 11 54 57 The Scorpion60 service failed to start due to the following enor 1450 7000 4056 01 31 2002 11 54 57 The U lBrdDre service Failed to start due to the following eror 1450 26 34 017 3172002 17 54 56 Exceeded the allowable number of retries configurable via the registry on de Fatal Jb 4 017 3172002 17 52 56 Exceeded the allowable number of retries configurable via the registry on de EZ Fatal 4187 41 013122002 11 54 55 Invalid address was specified for adapter E10UUB3 Parameters s TCPIP This EZ Fatal 4187 41 013122002 11 54 55 Invalid address Y was specified for adapter 1006 3 This EZ Fatal 001 433 01 31 2002 11 52 55 45 77777 b Pan 4192 41 UT1 31 200211 5255 Invalid default gateway address 9 252 was specified for adapter E1006 3 sPar EZ Fatal 5012 336 01 31 2002 11 52 55 Elnk31 The 170 base address supplied does not match the jumpers an the EZ Fatal orale 013122002 11 54 55 Invalid address was specified for adapter E100B3 Parameterss T CPIP This EZ Fatal erate 013122002 11 54 55 Invalid address 83 30 was specified for adapter E1TO0BS Param
119. the window without saving changes N A or Close 7 16 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 7 Horizontal Parameters Honzontal Parameters Horizontal Line Time u5 Total Fisele Per Line Horizontal Display Time 5 Image Pirels multiple of 4 Fisel Clock Frequency Mhz Horizontal Syne width Horizontal Front Porch uS Horizontal Back Porch uS Horizontal Blanking uS Hold Display Time mage Pixels Auto Horizontal Centering 0 aay T or Right VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD Hornzontal Parameters Horizontal Line Time u5 Total Pixels Per Line 2 720 Horizontal Display Time 22 851 548 Image Pixels multiple of 4 Pixel Clack Frequency Mhz 241 94 Horizontal Sync Width uS 4 0 829 Horizontal Front Porch uS Horizontal Back Porch u5 31 4 7 1 09 Horizontal Blanking u5 Hold Calculate Display Time C mage Pixels Shift Image Auto Honzontal Centering 5 Piwals Left or Aight Camee VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 17 SERVICE MANUAL Horizontal Parameter Description Range Line Time Time in microseconds for one HSYNC cycle 1 00 99 99 Total Pixels per Line Number of pixel clock pulses that occur in one horizontal line 1 9999 Display Time Time in microseconds for active video one horizontal line 1 00 99 99 Image Pixels Number of image pixels per line A co
120. these LASER IMAGERS An Ethernet BOARD and CROSSOVER CABLE are used to drive the 8200 LASER IMAGER the 160 LASER IMAGER and the 3600 DMI 1 5 SERVICE MANUAL Output Data Formats Allowed e DICOM Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU TOUCHSCREEN and PRINT KEYPAD DICOM Color Print Management SCU TOUCHSCREEN and PRINT KEYPAD e DICOM Secondary Capture Grayscale and Color Image Store SCU TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD MIM Optical Interface Print Request 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTER e 10 100baseT Ethernet HOSTCOM Print 160 LASER IMAGER e 10 100baseT Ethernet DICOM Print 8200 LASER IMAGER e COPCIL 8700 and 8500 LASER IMAGERS STANDARD and 8600 8610 8300 and 8100 LASER IMAGERS e FOPCIL 8700 and 8500 IMAGERS PLUS 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER and 969 HQ LASER IMAGER Maximum Inputs and Outputs Maximum inputs and outputs allowed for MIMs are described in Table 1 3 Table 1 3 Maximum Inputs and Outputs for MIMs MIM Function Maximum Inputs Maximum Outputs 200 MODALITY SERVER SCU PRINT 2direct Video or Digital SERVER SCP OR COMBINATION 1 network DICOM 1 Fiber Copper or Ethernet output 200 1 2 GHz MODALITY SERVER SCU or PRINT 2 direct Video or Digital 1 Fiber Copper or Ethernet SERVER SCP network DICOM output 100 MODALITY SERVER SCU direct Video or Digital 1 DICOM 100 1 2 GHz MODALITY SERVER SCU 2 direct Video or Digital 1 DICOM 25 PS PRINT SERVER SCP
121. to power this equipment Position the power cord so it will not be tripped over or pulled Connect this equipment to a grounded outlet e Do not place a portable multiple socket outlet power strip on the floor Mount the power strip on a wall or on the underside of a table A Warning Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines A Warning This equipment is not contained in a sealed cabinet Do not use this equipment in locations where it can come in contact with liquids including body fluids A Warning This equipment contains a lithium battery There 1s a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Warning Do not substitute or modify any part of this equipment without approval of Eastman Kodak Company Warning Do not use the presence of flammable anesthetics oxygen or nitrous oxide This equipment does not have a gas sealed electronics enclosure and could ignite any flammable or explosive gases present in its environment 8E88
122. up the MIM for application of power as follows The MIM 200 667 MHz and the 25 PS have a 115 230 V POWER SWITCH located on the rear of the MIM adjacent to the POWER CONNECTOR Set this SWITCH to the correct position for the site gt Note Later MIM 2005 2 4 GHz and 1 GHz and the MIM 100 do not include the 115 230 V SWITCH They include Autosensing circuits which automatically set the MIM for the correct source voltage The MIM 200 and the 25 PS are provided with a UPS for either 115 or 230 V operation A UPS is optional with the MIM 100 Connect the UPS to the MIM and to source power using the instructions included with the UPS amp Important The UPS for the 25 PS is a smart unit It includes software which allows communication with the 25 PS If a source power failure occurs the UPS provides battery backup for the 25 PS for about 1 minute adjustable to allow the 25 PS to shut down its processes in order Then about 7 or 8 seconds later the UPS turns off De energizing the MIM 1 Shut down the MIM either from the KEYPAD or from the MIM Service Application The MIM 200 and 25 PS will power off automatically 2 For the MIM 100 De energize the MIM by pressing the POWER SWITCH off after the KEYPAD indicates that it 15 safe to do so The power light will turn off Energizing the MIM After all components have been set up and CABLES have been connected apply power to the system 1 Energize the UPS if t
123. will cause the parameter set at the SCP to be used not the corresponding parameter For 8600 and 8610 The range is 1 12 Set Contrast to 3 for GE Senographe 200D 6 for Lorad TDMS and 3 for Fischer For 8600 and 8610 Set Modality Group to 6 for GE Senographe 200D 7 for Lorad TDMS and 3 for Fischer from the gt Note Functions of the image processing parameters are described in Table 8 3 on Page 8 6 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Table 8 2 Setting Defaults for Status Reporting Annotation Printer Parameters Film and Page Options and Image Resizing Parameter For all Kodak LASER IMAGERS PRINTERS Status Reporting For N Event Reporting Select Send N Event Reports Default is De Select for Siemens products May need be selected for other products For Warning Status Select Off or On Default is On Annotation Common Text Elements Select Print Date to display current date on film Select Print Time to display current time on film Select Page Number to display sequential numbers on film Select Hospital Name to display Site Hospital name field within Service Tracking Information screen on film Select Modality ID to display a name of the MODALITY on film Type the name to be displayed the adjacent text box Printer Parameters For Priority Select Low Normal or Stat Film and Page Options For Border Select Clear
124. 0 Stop Bits n H ata Bits H Parity NONE Image Transfer Pixel Depth 12 Transfer Rate 2000KHz Header Mode HEADER Acquire Acquire Mode lt Back Finish Cancel 9 Select Printer 1 at the top of the Output Parameters window 10 Set the Communication variables to match those of the 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER 11 Set the Image Transfer variables to match those of the 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER Pay special attention to Pixel Depth Acquire Mode and Transfer Rate gt Note The application software automatically selects defaults for these groups of destination parameters To select values other than the defaults advance to the Supported Items windows 12 Click Finish to select the defaults for these destination parameters Supported Items Interpolation Format Types Page Formatting mage Processing e M952 Usage gt Note When Finish is clicked the Installed Destinations window will display and the MIM will process the parameter information 13 When processing is completed click Close 14 Return to Setting Up the Destination Dual PRINTER Setups on Page 6 16 Step 1 and set up the second destination For the second destination in a dual PRINTER setup In Step 3 select the second destination n Step 4 enter the Logical Name for the second destination This name
125. 0 Digital Input X Curves 7 9 and 11 of this ULUT set are a subset of the U713C0 ULUT Set see the graph below A contrast setting of 7 gives the lowest mid tone contrast in this group of 3 while a contrast setting of 11 gives the highest mid tone contrast These 3 curves have a higher mid tone brightness than curves 8 10 and 12 of this ULUT set Curves 8 10 and 12 of this ULUT set are a subset of the U693C0 ULUT Set A contrast setting of 8 gives the lowest mid tone contrast in this group of 3 while a contrast setting of 12 gives the highest mid tone contrast These 3 curves have a lower mid tone brightness than curves 7 9 and 11 of this ULUT set Perceived Brightness ell 30 40 50 60 fl B gn 95 100 Digital Input 3 Because this ULUT set has such a variety of curve shapes with no simple relationship between contrast setting and either mid tone brightness or mid tone contrast this set may be useful primarily as a finder set to help a user decide on some other ULUT set as a final choice within which the curve shape varies in a more continuous intuitive way as the contrast setting is changed e g UPMSV3K 7693 0 or 0713 0 109S Like the UI 109B ULUT Set it replaces this set has a diversity of curve shapes designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of imaging modalities Its 12 curves consist of 6 saggy curves that span a wide range of mid tone brightnesses and 3 S shaped curves at each of 2 mid tone brig
126. 0 01 16 21 23 842 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1583 Connection DB 11 30 01 16 21 23 852 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1040 11 30 01 16 21 23 852 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 10063 1 2 840 113564 3 5040 2001 11 30 14 22 30 3 11 30 01 16 21 23 852 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1616 Connection DB 11 30 01 16 21 27 507 3 4008 00029955 11 30 01 16 21 27 507 3 4008 00029955 11 30 01 16 21 29 089 2 4042 23708931 Log continues DICOM DICOM DICOM 4030 23709187 4030 23709187 4030 23709187 4030 23709187 4030 23709187 4030 23709187 LL PrintSCPService cpp 1197 PrintSCPService cpp 1215 PrintSCPService cpp 1166 PrintSCPService cpp 1452 PrintSCPService cpp 1453 PrintSCPService cpp 1515 _ m LL LB Lm LL DICOM DICOM DICOM cp LL _ LI m rm LL LL LL 11 50 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 IB Bits Allocated 8 IB Bits Per Pixel stored 8 IB High Bit 7 IB Pixel Aspect Ratio 1 1 IB Photometric Interpretation IB Magnification Type CUBIC IB Smoothing Type 5 SCP Assoc 10255 IB Polarity NORMAL from Dicom SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 102
127. 0 12 C 6 C 7 C 8 9 10 0 20 C 11 C 12 C 13 14 15 For various original film density ranges 3000 4 HAT HAT HT er ee eer i RENE ERE DES Se DES 2500 2000 iu mmm EE EM e t value 1500 ELE aia E RN a L L L L L LE L EE Q 1000 Ell EE 500 4 20 40 BO at 100 8 24 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images PMSB Developed as a slight modification to the PMSV3K TFT Set that was previously developed for Philips Medical Systems This set was created by adjusting the t values within the PMSV3K TFT Set so that when using Contrast 9 of the PMSB TFT Set match the densities print as accurately as possible the latest target densities requested by Philips Medical Systems All 15 of these tables have essentially the same mid tone contrast slope but have a wide variety of brightnesses with contrast setting 1 the darkest image and contrast setting 15 the brightest 4000 3500 S000 2500 HH thin 1 ih ul n zx h 4 meg 2000 es d PELLE EL Er EM 1500 MH X 1000 500 Iam SESS ERES Cen Eme ES 40 Bt 100 Input PMSV3K
128. 0 502 6 8191 000000000 09 50 00 542 6 8191 000000000 09 50 00 572 6 8191 000000000 09 50 00 612 6 8191 000000000 09 50 00 652 6 8191 000000000 09 50 00 692 6 8191 000000000 09 50 00 732 4 8191 000000000 09 50 00 772 6 8191 000000000 8E8820 NOV 2003 ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Sta YOB13 ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Sta Y ss cpp 557 ss getAvailableMemory started ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Show Mem dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Show Mem ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Show Mem0e75 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received cepacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Show Y Mem 32768 32768 1 6 02255 ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Show Y Mem 32768 32768 1 6 0 55 36 ss getPrinterStatus started ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Sta Pr 1 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Sta Pr 1 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Sta Pr 10e0d ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Sta Y LT 103 II II H II II II II II ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Sta Y LT 103 Media BWDryB E14x17 ss cpp 301 ss getFPS
129. 0 and 3600 DMI Does not apply to V_6 0 and above Modality Group 1 11 Used by the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER only The number selects a ULUT from among a group 1 upmsv3kp w8u 2 u693c0p 8wu 3 u7 13c0p w8u 4 gsdfp w8u 5 gsdfll0p w8u 6 gsdfaa0p w8u 7 11 upmsv3kp w8u Interpolation Type Selected to help provide an optimum image by specifying characteristics of image pixels and image appearance Options are Cubic Replicate Bi linear or None Used only with the 1120 and 2180 PRINTERS Convolution kernel Group 0 11 Used only with the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER to select the smoothing group to be used Gamma Table 0 1 Used only with the 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER to select either the Linear in Density 0 or Linear in Transmittance 1 algorithm Border DMAX Limits the maximum density of the image border Increasing the value increases the maximum density of the image border The value must be equal to or greater than the image dmax value Smoothing Type 0 15 Selects a smoothing value level of smoothing sharpness Used only with Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS Image polarity Determines whether image 15 normal or reversed polarity Priority Determines whether print priority is Low Normal or Stat high Border Selects either a Black or Clear image border Film Base Selects BLUE FILM CLEAR FILM or PAPER Film Size Selects a default size for the
130. 00 cd sq m The variable parameter in this family of curves is the assumed reflected ambient light for the different contrast settings The following table shows the values used Assumed Reflected Ambient Light Values Contrast Setting Assumed Reflected Ambient Light cd sq m 1 5 5 2 11 3 16 5 4 22 5 27 5 6 33 7 38 5 8 44 9 49 5 10 55 11 60 5 12 66 8 8820 2003 8 35 SERVICE MANUAL GSDF6LLO0 Composed of 12 curves all based on the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function applied to 8300 LASER IMAGER printing at its highest density setting Dmax 3 5 of the curves this ULUT set were designed based on an assumed film Dmin of 0 2 In this family of curves see the following table the assumed light box luminance was set to different values for the different contrast settings and at each contrast setting the reflected ambient light was set to be 0 5 of the light box luminance of that setting Assumed Light Box Luminance Values Contrast Setting Assumed Light Box Luminance cd sq m 1 2000 2 2210 3 2442 4 2699 5 2982 6 3295 7 3641 8 4024 9 4447 10 4914 11 5430 12 6000 LORADO03 A moderately tight ULUT set intended for printing Lorad digital mammography images using 8300 LASER IMAGER linear in transmittance 1 3 gamma mode of the curves of this ULUT set are close to each other and close to a single central curve curve 6 which was designed to provide printed densi
131. 000000 09 50 01 614 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 654 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 694 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 734 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 764 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 804 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 844 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 884 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 914 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 954 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 994 5 8191 000000000 09 50 02 034 5 8191 000000000 09 50 02 074 5 8191 000000000 09 50 02 104 6 8191 000000000 09 50 02 144 6 8191 000000000 oi 11 l 1 1 1 1 H 11 1 1 JA po m or op orm orm opm opm opm orm pm om rm pm rm 09 50 02 184 6 8191 000000000 09 50 02 214 5 8191 000000000 09 50 02 255 5 8191 000000000 09 50 02 295 5 8191 000000000 09 50 02 335 5 8191 000000000 09 50 02 375 6 8191 000000000 09 50 02 405 6 8191 000000000 09 50 02 445 6 8191 000000000 09 50 02 485 5 8191 000000000 09 50 02 525 5 8191 000000000 09 50 03 376 6 8191 000000000 09 50 03 406 6 8191 000000000 09 50 03 446 6 8191 000000000 09 50 03 486 6 8191 000000000 09 50 03 526 6 8191 000000000 09 50 03 556 6 8191 000000000 09 50 03 596 6 8191 000000000 or op orm orm opm orm orm opm orm orm opm om opm opm om opm opm orm orm opm orm orm om orm orm m orm rm m om rm 11 44 Destination cpp 2739 GetMinBandSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 27
132. 003 4 11 SERVICE MANUAL Enabling Software Licenses Software licensing is necessary when The customer purchases additional features for an existing system DICOM Store Output Enabling connection to WORKSTATIONS and archives HIS RIS Connection Enabling connection to a HIS RIS Gateway You reload software ghosting in a MIM set up with destinations other than PRINTERS amp Important Using the LAPTOP COMPUTER the FE must set the Software License to state for each Feature before the MIM can add a DICOM Store Destination or HIS RIS GATEWAY 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the MIM Service Application amp Important After ghosting all V_6 0 and above MIMs MIM 100 MIM 200 and 25 PS have the default IP Address 123 123 123 10 2 From the MIM Service Application screen select Admin gt Software Licenses S oftware Licenses Authorization Site Code 0657 ABE2 3074 39 7 51 Site 4 12 2003 8 8820 Upgrading MIM Software 3 From the Software Licenses screen record the Site Code information 4 Call the TSC and provide The Site Code of the MIM The K of the MIM Note The TSC will provide the necessary Site Key information 5 On the Software Licenses screen enter the Site Key provided by the TSC 6 Click Update 7 On the Software Licenses screen check that the correct Feature
133. 00NR For MIM 200 it is COM 4 6 8 or 10 Auxiliary Control Keypad Enables the KEYPAD for auxiliary control when Autofilming is the primary control KEYPAD Touchscreen or Conventional Autofilming On Important For a MIM with Autofilming Auxiliary Control is always On memory 15 available on the HARD DISK to prevent a Buffer Full condition while MIM Stores a page Auxiliary Control The COM Port for the KEYPAD when itis used KEYPAD COM 5 for MIM 100 For MIM 200 it Port No for auxiliary control is COM 5 7 9 or 11 Autofilming or 6 for HCL COMS 7 or 9 for KEYPAD Aspect Ratio Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio The 1 255 Horizontal software automatically determines this ratio Aspect ratios not equal to 1 1 correct for non square pixels Aspect Ratio Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio The 255 Vertical software automatically determines this ratio Aspect ratios not equal to 1 1 correct for non square pixels Page Preallocation When enabled this feature ensures that sufficient On Off 7 8 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Setting Up the Digital Interface Image Parameters amp Important e Set Up the digital input for the smallest image size used at the site Check the MODALITY DATABASE to determine correct parameters To advance to each item in the Digital Interface Parameters window press Tab on th
134. 01 13 25 22 011 5 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged request 11 29 01 13 25 22 0516 cepacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item STA 1 RDY to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 22 081 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response STA 1 RDY Response from IMAGER is that IMS is Ready 11 29 01 13 25 22 121 5 m952 cpp 804 m952 GetAvailableMemory 11 29 01 13 25 22 1516 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand INQ Request status of IMAGER memory 11 29 01 13 25 22 1816 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket INQ 11 29 01 13 25 22 432 5 l ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged request 11 29 01 13 25 22 462 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item ANQ 504 504 0 0 to packet List ZItems 1 11 29 01 13 25 22 492 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response ANQ 504 504 0 0 IMAGER responded that available memory is 16 meg 504 blocks x 32K all contiguous with no holes or bad blocks 11 29 01 13 25 22 512 5 m952 cepp 48 m952 GetPrinterStatus called Printer 1 11 29 01 13 25 22 542 6 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand RQS Request status of the PRINTER 11 29 01 13 25 22 5726 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ROS 11 29 01 13 25 22 7725 l ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received PRINTER acknowledged request 11 29 01 13 25 22 8
135. 010 4 Rig Information 115 011 1 aid Information 119 011 1 Rig Information 121 011 Fatal 126 011 1 Fatal 130 011 1 Rig Information 131 011 1 Information 142 011 b 1 Information 154 011 4 1 4 nformatian 155 011 r 1 2 Information 160 011 44 1 Information 161 011 L1 Infarmatian 8 33 376 He Fatal 1003 331 13 aming 1006 331 1 Fatal 41 332 36 Fatal 5012 336 2 ud Information 6005 338 105 big Information 6006 238 96 Tw 004 xod LI Clearing the Error Frequency Log Important Use this function after repairing a problem to observe if the Error Frequency Log indicates the error again 1 From the MIM Service Application window select Logs gt Clear Error Frequency Log 2 Click Clear 3 At the prompt Are you sure click Yes Viewing Printing Statistics The MIM uses print counters For PRINT SERVERS From a source on DICOM For MODALITY SERVERS From direct input from a MODALITY video or digital 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the MIM Service Application 2 Select Connect gt Connect to MIM 3 Select Admin 4 From the Admin pull down menu select Printing Statistics Database 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 13 SERVICE MANUAL Print Statistics Source Page Count vid 14 gt Note The MIM has the ability to reset a particular counter or all counters 11 14 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Troubleshoo
136. 02 4176 E PL REHR EXE Br 00 0 00 03 PRUMon gb 00 0 00 00 1036 K EXE 968 00 0 00 00 1876 sglmanur exe 106 00 0 00 00 1755 K MIMBaute exe 108 0 00 00 KES K 113 00 0 00 00 1060 exe 119 00 0 00 00 11576 TAPISAY EXE 128 00 0 00 00 ebrz K rniszervicenanag 130 00 0 00 00 1332 K End Process Processes 3l CPU Usage 2 Mem Usage 2425 4445048 Z 6 Click the Performance tab to display the Performance window which provides a graphic of COMPUTER and memory usage for the entire system Windows NT Task Manager File Options Help Applications Processes Performance CPU Usage CPU Usage History MEM Usage Memon Usage History Physical Memory K Total 130472 Available aria a n File Cache 22600 Totals Handles Threads Processes Commit Charge F Total 118408 Lirnit 208072 Peak 121332 Kernel Memory K Total 25436 Paged Monpaged Processes CPL Usage Mem Usage 1184U8RK 2400726 11 54 NOV 2003 8E8820 Using NT Event Viewer from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE Troubleshooting Event Viewer is a Windows 2000 function that can be used to display information relating to COMPUTER processes It can help to Detect COMPUTER hardware problems Study communication processes 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM 2 Start the pcAnywher
137. 0255 Presentation LUT SOP negotiated MIMPrintAcse cpp 694 SCP Assoc 10255 Basic Grayscale Print Meta SOP negotiated SCPPrinter cpp 202 SCP Assoc 10255 Sending status for 8200 gt Severity NORMAL IMIMDicomDevice cpp 59 SCP Assoc 10255 Up for 8200 from modality MIM150 11 30 01 16 21 20 036 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3753 SCP Assoc 10255 Sending Printer SOP N GET 11 30 01 16 21 20 036 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3792 SCP Assoc 10255 Sending status for 8200 gt Severity NORMAL Status NORMAL N Get 11 30 01 16 21 21 358 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1670 SCP Assoc 10255 Creating Film Session FS N 11 30 01 16 21 21 398 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1689 SCP Assoc 10255 FS default Contrast 0 from Connection DB 11 30 01 16 21 21 458 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1746 SCP Assoc 10255 FS default Modality CT from Dicom 11 30 01 16 21 21 488 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1826 SCP Assoc 10255 FS Copies 1 11 30 01 16 21 21 488 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1817 SCP Assoc 10255 Setting Film Session FS N SET 11 30 01 16 21 21 498 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1944 SCP Assoc 10255 FS Medium DONT CARE BASE 11 30 01 16 21 21 498 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1982 SCP Assoc 10255 FS Using FilmBase from Connection
138. 026 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item STA 1 RDY to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 22 832 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response STA 1 RDY PRINTER is Ready 11 29 01 13 25 22 862 6 m952_ sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand ALI Allocate LASER IMAGER for printing 11 29 01 13 25 22 882 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ALI 11 29 01 13 25 23 033 5 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 23 053 6 ecpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 23 083 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS Command executed properly 11 29 01 13 25 23 113 6 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand MSZ Show and set the media size 11 29 01 13 25 23 143 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket MSZ 11 29 01 13 25 23 443 5 ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 23 473 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS 0810 0810 0810 to packet List Items 1 rea rm orm rm rm m rm rm 11 34 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting 11 29 01 13 25 23 503 5 1952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS 0810 0810 0810 Command executed properly Media size is 8 x 10 inches 11 29 01 13 25 23 533 5 m9
139. 045 or higher comes from Manufacuring with the correct BIOS configuration and memory The following procedure is provided if the BIOS becomes corrupted 1 Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE 2 Shut down the MIM application from the Service Application or the KEYPAD 3 De energize the MIM 4 Connect the MONITOR KEYBOARD and MOUSE to the equipment 5 Energize the MIM 6 When the MIM is booting press F2 to enter the BIOS Setup Table 4 7 Settings on the PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility Menu Step Under Menu Item Action 1 Advanced Disable Legacy USB Support 2 Advanced I O Device Configuration Disable Parallel Port 3 Advanced Select Other for Large Disk Access Mode 4 Advanced Advanced Chipset Control Select 4MB for Graphics Aperture 2 Boot Disable QuickBoot Mode 6 Main Secondary Master Select Type Auto 7 Boot Boot Device Priority Change the Boot Device Priority to ATAPI CD ROM Drive HARD DRIVE Diskette Drive Network Boot 8E8820 NOV 2003 4 9 SERVICE MANUAL Loading New MIM Application Software Ghosting It may be necessary to re load the MIM application software ghost if A software upgrade is necessary e The HARD DRIVE is corrupt The current software is corrupt amp Important This ghosting procedure for MIM 100 requires the use of the external CD ROM DRIVE KIT TL Tools 1
140. 075 _ SP6E7386 BOARD COPCIL PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 14 5 74040182136 BOARD FOPCIL PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 15 m DES 2E4017 BOARD optical interface CPOI PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 16 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 5 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 4 MIM 200 1 2 GHz BOARDS H180_3033HCA H180_3033HC UC 5E2762 BOARD RS422 a interface 8 channel Used in all MIM 200s See Figure 12 9 1 5 2119 BOARD digital interface 8 mb V 2 2 MODALITY SERVERS only See Figures 12 SPAE9916 BOARD video 150LC interface 10 and 12 11 The BOARDS can be used in any combination installed in slots 3 niin 4 MEE BOARD Ethernet 10 100baseT Secondary PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 13 3E2429 replaces 3H8075 BOARD channel video 60 interface SP6E7386 BOARD COPCIL PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 14 SP74040182136 BOARD FOPCIL PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 15 2E4017 BOARD optical interface CPOI PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 16 12 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Figure 12 5 MIM 100 1 2 GHz BOARDS B Li E E EI ge EL Ki 65559559 KR N H180_3046HC _ SP6E5193 BOARD BOARD network isolation isolation See Figure 12 12 Required in EEC countries Pope BOARD RS422 interface 8 channel Used all MIM 200s See Figure 12 9 V i or 4 5E2119 BOARD digital interface 8 mb
141. 1 129 2 0102 00489781 123 010 00489781 123 2 010 00489781 123 2 0102 00489781 123 2 lnz n 04897231 2 3058 00497717 341 2 3058 00497717 573 2 3058 00497717 553 2 3058 00497717 163 2 4010 00499509 Log Class Object Source Level ID ID Key to Columns in the Sample Log Tr Ln m m rm m kl el e e e PortHanager PortHanager PortHManadqger PortHanager PortHanager PortHManadger PortHanadger PortHanager PortHanager PortHanadger m m m m m m m ee ee ee ee o o m EL e e e ee File Name Date Date of log is selected on Get Activity History window Time Time is in military 24 hour day ReporterImpl ReporterImpl ReporterImpl ReporterImpl ReporterImpl ReporterImpl RNIS3ystsem cpp RNIS stem cpp RNIS ystem cpp StorageClass cpp 563 cpp l138 epp 285 2831 epp 285 cpp 285 epp 1700 cpp 2475 2484 1691 cpp l565 MIMDryViewPrintlInterfacse MIMDryViewPrintlInterfacse MIMDryViewPrintlnterface MIMDryViewPrintlInterface 118 cpp 247 cpp 247 2471 cpp z47 cpp z47 cpp 247 384 380 323 Line No Log Level for Log Lag Log Log Log Import set Service Network Routing Storage Keypad set zet
142. 1 13 32 41 473 4 11 29 01 13 32 41 503 3 11 29 01 13 32 41 533 5 11 29 01 13 32 41 563 5 11 29 01 13 32 41 633 5 11 29 01 13 32 41 683 5 11 29 01 13 32 42 084 5 CREATE DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2445 PrintSCPService cpp 2505 PrintSCPService cpp 2560 PrintSCPService cpp 2576 PrintSCPService cpp 2772 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2796 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2884 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2981 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3056 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3356 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3380 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3392 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3497 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3526 DICOM eee eee SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 MIMPresentationLUTSCP cpp 118 SCP Assoc 4 PLUT Creating Presentation LUT PLUT N FB Film Orientation PORTRAIT FB Image Display Format STANDARD 2 2 FB Contrast 0 from Connection DB FB Set default contrast to 0 FB Max Density 3 99 from Connection DB FB all DRY VIEW use Min Density of 0 21 FB Border Density BLACK FB Trim NO FB Configuration Information LUT VER693C0 W87 006 FB set to TFT by default FB Magnification Type CUBIC FB Smoothing Type 15 FB Illumination 2000 FB Reflected Ambient Light
143. 1 18 624 5 11 30 01 16 21 18 624 5 11 30 01 16 21 18 624 5 11 30 01 16 21 18 624 5 11 30 01 16 21 18 624 5 11 30 01 16 21 18 624 5 4031 23708675 11 30 01 16 21 18 624 5 4031 23708675 11 30 01 16 21 18 624 5 403 1 23708675 11 30 01 16 21 19 986 3 4031 23708675 11 30 01 16 21 19 986 5 4031 23708675 11 30 01 16 21 19 996 3 4031 23708675 11 30 01 16 21 19 996 3 4031 23708675 11 30 01 16 21 19 996 3 4031 23708675 11 30 01 16 21 20 016 5 4045 23712515 Status NORMAL NER 11 30 01 16 21 20 026 2 4042 2370893 1 4008 00029955 4008 00029955 4008 00029955 4008 00029955 4008 00029955 4008 00029955 4008 00029955 4008 00029955 4008 00029955 403 1 23708675 403 1 23708675 403 1 23708675 403 1 23708675 403 1 23708675 403 1 23708675 403 1 23708675 ee LI LL LL LI LLLI LLLI p To p Mo pr CR M CR OR pM o m 4 m mm mm m mm m LT mL m LLLI LLL LL LL L mM m m m m 73 SS p p DI 22 ra pm or or rm r1 r7 T oT CREATE NetworkServicesFactory cpp 350 NetworkServicesFactory cpp 350 NetworkServicesFactory cpp 322 NetworkServicesFactory cpp 350 NetworkServicesFactory cpp 322 NetworkServicesFactory cpp 350 NetworkServicesFactory cpp 322 NetworkServicesFactory cpp 350 Reply 1 from 100 100 100 40 bytes 12 time 0 ms MIMPrintAcse cpp 1528 SCP Assoc 10255 Find the perfect Name match for 8200 MIMPrintAcse cpp 840 SCP Assoc 10
144. 1 32 Per Band Maximum Bands Enter the maximum bands per page allowed by the destination 1 32 Per Page Maximum Image Enter the number of maximum image columns allowed by the destination 0 5000 Columns Maximum Image Enter the number of maximum image rows allowed by the destination 0 5400 Rows Pixel Pitch Enter the number of pixels per millimeter for the destination 0 32 Minimum The number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction The MIM 0 20 Horizontal uses this parameter to validate the format Separation Minimum Vertical The number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction The MIM uses 0 10 Separation this parameter to validate the format Trim Width Enabled The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction 0 5 when trim is on The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Trim Width The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction 0 5 Disabled when trim is not on The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format 7 66 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 31 SCU Parameters for Store Destinations SCU Ea Supports Density Space L xo LUT Luminance Space adaig cudi Content Curve Shape Tonescaling Extended Print Attributes Perception LUT Tonescaling Protecalleme Iw PLUT Service lt Back Finish Can
145. 1000 500 40 Input SIEFC969 Designed to satisfy the requirements of Siemens for use with the Fluorospot Compact MODALITY The t values in this TFT Set are similar to the values defined for the SFH301A4 TFT Set but the SIEFC969 values have been adjusted to optimally meet the needs of the F uorscope Compact The t value plots below show a shape that is approximately linear in brightness with the different minimum t values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values 4000 3000 2500 EN 2000 T mur p ae 1500 tt cee 1 LI 1000 at ai Sed E EE ed IEIESELSEEEEEE nS A Er EC V PR cg md Pel p n vy E Ap n ES peer pem em pm om o comm e s mmm pom em ps m m Tom emp A T RECHT ae ERE re ES onem YP pen emo oe res 0 20 40 B au 100 Input 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 27 SERVICE MANUAL SIEFL87B A slight modification to the SFH301A4 TFT Set designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for Fluorospot DSA The t value plots below show a shape
146. 191 000000000 09 49 58 459 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 499 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 539 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 579 5 8191 000000000 09 49 58 619 5 8191 000000000 LL or orm orm opm opm orm om orm pm pm m rm pm rm 11 42 LaserImager cpp 1367 imsStatus IMS Normal LaserImager cpp 1370 availableMemory 33548288 bytes LaserImager cpp 1373 CLaserImager GetPrinterStatusHelper returns 5 SUCCESS LaserImager cpp 1200 PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper ends LaserImager cpp 672 CLaserImager PollPrinterStatusChange ends MIMUIDGeneration cpp 128 Invalid K Number recorded 99 Patient cpp 1175 Entering Patient Patient worklist pIF Patient cpp 151 Entering Patient GetContainingStudy Patient cpp 1003 Entering Patient GetKey Patient cpp 1034 Entering Patient AddRef Patient cpp 460 Entering Patient GetCommaDelimitedPatientName Patient cpp 920 Entering Patient GetSetFields Patient cpp 1003 Entering Patient GetKey Patient cpp 960 Entering Patient SetStudyK ey MIMUIDGeneration cpp 128 Invalid K Number recorded 99 LLLI LLLI LLLI LL rm rm orm m rm DeliveryJob cpp 313 DeliveryJob Created 0 Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Destination cpp 2956 GetMinImageSepar
147. 1982 SCP Assoc 4 FS Using FilmBase from Connection DB 1 11 29 01 13 32 40 021 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2002 SCP Assoc 4 FS Value received for FilmBase was BLUE FILM 11 24 NOV 2003 8E8820 OO Troubleshooting 11 29 01 13 32 40 321 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3753 11 29 01 13 32 40 352 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3792 Status NORMAL N Get 11 29 01 13 32 40 692 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2193 N CREATE Begin to set parameters for the film box 11 29 01 13 32 40 772 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2234 11 29 01 13 32 40 802 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2265 11 29 01 13 32 40 842 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2302 11 29 01 13 32 40 872 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2317 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 Sending Printer SOP N GET Sending status for 83 gt Severity NORMAL Creating Film Box FB FB get FilmSize from ConnectionDB 14INX17IN FB get FilmSize from Dicom 8INX10IN FB Using FilmSize from Dicom FB Checking the FilmSize value of 8INX10IN 11 29 01 13 32 40 962 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2426 SCP Assoc 4 FB Using FilmType of SINXIOIN with Base of BLUE FILM 11 29 01 13 32 41 002 5 11 29 01 13 32 41 032 5 11 29 01 13 32 41 063 5 11 29 01 13 32 41 103 5 11 29 01 13 32 41 263 5 11 29 01 13 32 41 333 2 11 29 01 13 32 41 383 5 11 29 01 13 32 41 443 5 11 29 0
148. 2 11 29 01 13 25 24 755 3 Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 4 returns 24 11 29 01 13 25 24 785 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 468 Portrait Mode 11 29 01 13 25 24 995 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 589 PrepareRenderedPage End 11 29 01 13 25 25 026 4 DICOM 11 29 01 13 25 25 056 4 DICOM LaserImager cpp 1358 LaserImager cpp 1361 Laserlmager cpp 1364 Laserlmager cpp 1367 Laserlmager cpp 1370 ee LI LaserImager cpp 1356 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DICOM DICOM Number of Planes 1 Pixel Depth 8 DICOM Print Quality 2 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 178 BorderDensity 100 399 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 394 PrepareRenderedPage Begin Destination cpp 2728 GetMinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 1326 PageBuilder cpp 139 PageBuilder cpp 140 PageBuilder cpp 141 LL S LL LIS LL rea rm orm rm orm rm LL LL LI LL PageBuilder cpp 1325 RenderImageAnnotation Begin PageBuilder cpp 1379 RenderImageAnnotation End 11 29 01 13 25 25 086 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 611 RenderImage 0 0 11 29 01 13 25 25 106 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 616 Image Columns 748 11 29 01 13 25 25 136 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 617 Image Rows 480 11 29 01 13 25 25 166 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 618 Bits Stored 8 11 29 01 13 25 25 196 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 619 Interpolati
149. 20 NOV 2003 14 1 SERVICE MANUAL A Warning The device is not intended to be installed within patient vicinity The equipment must be installed no closer than 1 83 meters from a patient bed or chair This Caution does not apply to the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 Laser Warning Avoid Laser Beam The CD ROM drive in this product uses an invisible 5 milliwatt laser beam Laser radiation may be present when the machine operates without panels or covers installed Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those described in this document may result in eye damage This Warning does not apply to the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 Caution Only trained service personnel are authorized to remove covers There are no user serviceable parts in this machine Caution This equipment is intended to connect to other medical devices Only qualified service personnel may perform installation and service maintenance Caution The Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules Those limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Howe
150. 206 ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Start SS SS qe 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 23 SERVICE MANUAL 11 30 01 13 09 53 750 2 2056 01210904 ImgCapDev cpp 2406 Image Stored Columns 548 Rows 512 BitsPerPixel 8 11 30 01 13 09 53 760 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 772 DiskArbiter Writing image to disk 11 30 01 13 09 53 760 5 2056 01210904 vid1 Scorpion60ImgCapDev cpp 1491 Scorpion60ImageCaptureDevice Grayscale Store Complete 11 30 01 13 09 53 760 5 2056 01210904 11 30 01 13 09 53 770 5 2051 01211160 11 30 01 13 09 53 770 5 2051 01211160 vidl ImgCapDev cpp 221 ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Complete 1 1 11 30 01 13 09 59 398 5 2017 00000278 vi 1 1 1 DiskArbiter cpp 302 DiskArbiter Run checking queue DiskArbiter cpp 352 DiskArbiter Run done checking queue dl ImagePixelVersion cpp 716 ImagePixelVersion GetImageData Stop 11 30 01 13 09 59 398 5 2017 00000278 11 30 01 13 10 00 149 5 2017 00000279 11 30 01 13 10 00 159 5 2017 00000279 vid1 End of log Sample Log 3 MODALITY SERVER to PRINT SERVER This log monitors input from a DICOM SCU to an SCP for printing It has been filtered to include only the log for the Network Services Subsystem set at level 5 All other subsystems are set at 0 Network Services PRINT SERVER ImagePixelVersion cpp 683 ImagePixelVersion G
151. 2429 BOARD Ethernet 10 100baseT See Figure 12 13 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 9 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 8 MODEM BOARD MIM 200 and 25 PS H180_0044BCA H180_0044BC 12 10 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Figure 12 9 SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD MIM 200 J UU UU LIAO 2 t gt H180_0112DCA gt H180 0112DC 5E2762 BOARD 5422 serial interface 8 channel 1 5E2726 CABLE RS422 6 PORT external SP1F5038 CABLE RS422 3 PORT external Used in MIM 200 2 4 GHz 4 SP3H9609 CABLE COM 10 COM 11 internal Used in MIM 200 2 4 GHz 5 7E6267 FUSE Not illustrated 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 11 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 10 DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD and CABLES MIM 200 ERU o Tananan J USED FOR 1 2 U1 U2 U3 U4 EXPANSION AREA DO NOT BREAK OFF COBRA BOARD 12 12 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Figure 12 11 VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE BOARD MIM 200 1 seca P6 8888 7 NE ELT CA A 3 2 J1 Video1 In J1 Red In 4 X J2 Video1 Out J2 Green In lt lt Video In a J3 Video In J3 Blue In N 4 Video Out AS J4 Video2 Out Ae J4 Sync In J5 Videos In J5 Red eon 3X 4 J6 Video3 Out J6 Green Out 2 Wy Csync O
152. 255 SCU Modality AE Title MIM150 NetworkServicesFactory cpp 322 MIMPrintAcse cpp 845 SCP Assoc 10255 SCU Host IP Address 149 98 199 90 Reply 1 from 100 100 100 40 bytes 12 time 0 ms Reply 1 from 100 100 100 40 bytes 12 time 0 ms Pinging 100 100 100 40 with 12 bytes of data Reply 1 from 100 100 100 40 bytes 12 time 0 ms Pinging 100 100 100 40 with 12 bytes of data Reply 1 from 100 100 100 40 bytes 12 time 0 ms Pinging 100 100 100 40 with 12 bytes of data Pinging 100 100 100 40 with 12 bytes of data LL LL ee LLLI MIMPrintAcse cpp 846 SCP Assoc 10255 SCU Implement Version Name not specified II II II II MIMPrintAcse cpp 847 SCP Assoc 10255 SCU Implement UID 1 2 840 113564 3 1 3 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1466 SCP Assoc 10255 Destination AE Title 8200 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1504 SCP Assoc 10255 Destination Name 8200 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1523 SCP Assoc 10255 The Default Printer is 8200 MIMPrintAcse cpp 336 SCP Assoc 10255 gt NEW CONNECTION OPENED lt MIMPrintAcse cpp 1743 SCP Assoc 10255 The Printer being used for this session is 8200 MIMPrintAcse cpp 710 MIMPrintAcse cpp 91 1 MIMPrintAcse cpp 702 MIMPrintAcse cpp 706 1 1 SCP Assoc 10255 Verification SOP negotiated SCP Assoc 10255 N Event Reporting NER is ON SCP Assoc 10255 Basic Annotation Box SOP negotiated SCP Assoc 1
153. 29 Video Imaging Device with 1 Video Output to the MONITOR Non terminating Passthrough 3 30 Table 3 4 Functions of PORTS for MIMs MIM 200 Figure 3 7 COM Figure 3 5 MIM 200 1 2 GHz MIM 100 MIM 100 1 2 GHz 25 PS PORT Function Figure 3 4 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 21 Service BACK PANEL BACK PANEL BACK PANEL BACK PANEL BACK PANEL RS232 BACK PANEL BACK PANEL BACK PANEL BACK PANEL BACK PANEL Not Used Not Used Not Used UPS Comm 3 MODEM Slot2 N A BACK PANEL N A Not used 4 Autofilm SERIAL CABLE N A BACK PANEL N A MODEM BD 5 KEYPAD SERIAL CABLE N A BACK PANEL N A BACK PANEL 6 Autofilm SERIAL CABLE N A Not Used N A Not Used 7 KEYPAD SERIAL CABLE N A Not Used N A Not Used 8 Autofilm 2 SERIAL CABLE SERIAL CABLE Not Used SERIAL CABLE _ Not Used 9 KEYPAD 2 SERIAL CABLE SERIAL CABLE Not Used SERIAL CABLE _ Not Used 10 Autofilm 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Not Used Slot 2 Not Used 11 KEYPAD 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Not Used Slot 2 Not Used For 25 PS the MODEM PORT is COM 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 4 MIM 200 667 MHz MODALITY SERVER CABLES TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD COM PORT ADAPTER CABLE g P ol n Q 3 e m AUTO FILMING CABLE See Note below Cond To UPS J8 Sync Out COLOR VIDEO CABLE J7
154. 3 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 6 MIM 200 1 2 GHz MODALITY SERVER CABLES TO DIGITAL MODALITY TO VIDEO MODALITY RS 485 DATA 75 ohm CABLE 10 m or COAX CABLE 45 m 10 m or 45 m co S E 5 8 RS 485 85 38 ADAPTER 5 ce 2 5 qw co e 7 7 a 1 O9 8 8 9 5 58 gt gt 8 vx E 5 Q a 8 20 Th or gt gt m 9 a 22 3 4 S 9 gt 5 Y gt gt 5 x COLOR DIGITAL VIDEO ADAPTER CABLE CABLE IDEO 2 m p ADAPTER COLOR VIDEO _ CABLE VIDEO E C INTERFACE TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD INPUT 2 INPUT 2 CABLE PORT ADAPTER CABLE 08080 o 09999985900 09595009590 0059505059590 0950005050090 005950000950000 5050500059000 020202020202020 950909090909090 9050095909595 90505009590 90095060590 050909090 0500097 COM 10 AUTO FILMING INPUT 1 E8080 09999999990 020202020 0059500059590 0009500059090 080209090909090 COM 11 TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD INPUT 1 COM 1 gt BOARD 422 T __ BOARD 422 INPUT 1 VIDEO or DIGITAL INPUT 2 VIDEO or DIGITAL MIM 200 1 2 GHz CUSTOMER NETWORK H180_3025ECA H180_3025EC Note For information on Autofilming CABLES e See Figure 3 23 for connections to a VIDEO MODALITY e See Figures 3 25 through 3 28 for connections to a
155. 3 25 26 868 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 898 5 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS to packet List Items 1 14952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS Command executed properly 11 29 01 13 25 26 928 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 958 6 11 29 01 13 25 27 229 5 11952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand MSZ Rquest size of media dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket MSZ ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged request 11 29 01 13 25 27 259 6 11 29 01 13 25 27 289 5 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS 0810 0810 0810 to packet List Items 1 1 22952 1144 LIT Get Response PAS 0810 0810 0810 Command executed properly Media size is 8 x 10 inches 11 29 01 13 25 27 319 6 11 29 01 13 25 27 3395 gammaTable 1 11 29 0 13 25 27 369 5 11952 sendPagelInfo cpp 322 m952 sendPagelnfo called m952 sendPagelInfo cpp 332 pageInfo formatID 1 numImages 1 borderDensity 0 maxDensity 300 11952 sendPagelInfo cpp 342 numCopies 1 filmType 1 filmSize 1 filmDest 1 orientation 1 Jl 11 29 01 13 25 27 399 5 m952 sendPagelnfo cpp 347 annoFomrat 1 annoText 4544680 11 29 01 13 25 27 4296 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand ALI Allocate LASER IMAGER for printing 11 29 01 13 25 27 459 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ALI 11 29 01 13 25 2
156. 3 25 28 140 6 LaserImager cpp 1207 GetPrinterStatusHelper starts LaserImager cpp 702 CLaserImager Open starts maxRetries 100retryWaitSeconds 7 11 29 01 13 25 28 170 6 LaserImager cpp 732 LIT in use by thread 0x2013929351212 wait and retry 1 11 29 01 13 25 28 200 5 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 28 2306 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 28 2605 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS Command executed properly 11 29 01 13 25 28 290 6 PrintJob cpp 147 CPrintJob SetJobInfo returns 0 11 29 01 13 25 28 310 6 PrintJob cpp 157 CPrintJob NewImageBox starts 11 29 01 13 25 28 340 6 PrintJob cpp 176 CPrintJob NewImageBox returns 0 LaserImager cpp 1174 PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper starts LLLI LLLI LLLI LL 11 29 01 13 25 28 370 6 ImageBox cpp 20 CImageBox SetImagelInfo starts 11 29 01 13 25 28 400 5 ImageBox cpp 35 kernelGroup 2interp 1 modalityGroup Icontrast Orotate 0 ImageBox cpp 47 columns 2256rows 2676bitsAllocated 8bitsStored 8highBit 7pixelRep 1 11 29 01 13 25 28 460 5 11 29 01 13 25 28 491 6 11 29 01 13 25 28 521 5 Rows 2676 con 6 11 29 01 13 25 28 5516 1952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand INQ Request
157. 361 4247 41 27 LUE IM 11 14in 3272 4361 4241 MEN 11 11 2048 2048 2048 10 12 2200 3526 3926 satin 2286 2036 2714 ed est eed ext a lt Back Finish Cancel with Common Text Maximum rows can be selected for each media size with or without common text The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Item Description Range Media Info Select Media Info to display the Media Information indicated in this table N A Size Media sizes allowed by the Destination 35 x 43 cm 35 35 cm 11 x 14 in 11 x 11 in 10 x 12 in 8 5 x 11 in 8 x 10 in 4x 61n A4 Maximum Maximum number of printable pixels in the x direction for a particular media size 1 9999 Columns Maximum columns can be selected for each media size The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Maximum Rows Maximum number of printable pixels the y direction for a particular media size 1 9999 Maximum rows are selectable for each media size with or without common text The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Maximum Rows Maximum number of printable pixels the y direction for a particular media size 1 9999 Types Media types allowed by the Destination Media types can be selected for each media size Any indicates that the Destination will use the media type that matches the media size selected blue or clear The selections Reflective an
158. 40 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2505 SCP Assoc 10255 STANDARD 2 2 11 30 01 16 21 22 740 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2560 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 22 740 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2576 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 22 810 2 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2683 SCP Assoc 10255 Format NONE 11 30 01 16 21 22 810 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2667 SCP Assoc 10255 NONE 11 30 01 16 21 22 820 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2754 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 22 830 2 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2796 SCP Assoc 10255 of 0 21 11 30 01 16 21 22 840 5 4030 23709187 11 30 01 16 21 22 870 5 4030 23709187 11 30 01 16 21 22 890 3 4030 23709187 11 30 01 16 21 22 890 4 4030 23709187 LUT VER693C0 W87 006 DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2884 PrintSCPService cpp 298 1 PrintSCPService cpp 3356 PrintSCPService cpp 3056 ee LL LII LL 1 lie 1 je 11 30 01 16 21 22 890 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3380 SCP Assoc 10255 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3392 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 22 910 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3481 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 22 890 5 4030 23709187 1 2 840 113564 3 5040 2001 11 30 14 22 30 3 11 30 01 16 21 22 920 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPServ
159. 44 48 273 6 8191 000000000 09 44 48 303 6 8191 000000000 09 44 48 343 6 8191 000000000 LaserImager cpp 660 CLaserImager PollJobStatus Change ends LaserImager cpp 668 CLaserImager PollPrinterStatus Change starts atus LaserImager cpp 1174 PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper starts LaserImager cpp 702 CLaserImager Open starts maxRetries 100retryWaitSeconds 7 Got LIT Open Mutex lit init is done Laserlmager cpp 740 Laserlmager cpp 745 09 44 48 373 6 8191 000000000 LaserImager cpp 768 lit open successful 09 44 48 403 6 8191 000000000 LaserImager cpp 770 CLaserImager Open returns true 09 44 48 433 6 8191 000000000 ss cpp 238 ss GetIMSStatus started 09 44 48 463 6 8191 000000000 ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Sta IMS Request status of the IMS in the IMAGER 09 44 48 493 6 8191 000000000 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Sta IMS 09 44 48 523 6 8191 000000000 cepacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Sta 50 5 09 44 48 563 5 8191 000000000 cepacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags 09 44 48 593 5 8191 000000000 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged receiving request 09 44 48 624 5 8191 000000000 ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Sta YOB13 09 44 48 654 5 8191 000000000
160. 45 GetMinBandSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 1 Destination cpp 2956 GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 PrintJob cpp 16 CPrintJob SetJobInfo starts PrintJob cpp 19 inJobInfo numCopies 1 PrintJob cpp 22 inJobInfo gt filmDestination FDCURRENT PrintJob cpp 25 inJobInfo gt maxDensity 309 PrintJob cpp 28 inJobInfo gt borderDensity 0 PrintJob cpp 31 inJobInfo gt numImages 1 PrintJob cpp 34 inJobInfo gt gammaTable 1 1 ss cpp 36 ss getPrinterStatus started 1 ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Sta Pr 1 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Sta Pr 1 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Sta Pr 10e0d ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received cecpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Sta Y LT 103 ss_sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Sta Y LT 103 Media BWDryB E14x17 1 ss sendPageInfo cpp 356 ss sendPagelInfo started 1 ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Del Fmt 99 Box All dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Del Fmt 99 Box All ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Del Fmt 99 111813 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags
161. 496 6 8191 000695382 m rm rm rm rm LL LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LL rm rm rm orm m mm 09 49 56 616 W 8191 000000000 DICOM Patient cpp 1050 Entering Patient ReleaseRef 09 49 56 727 6 8191 000695382 09 49 56 767 3 8191 000000000 09 49 56 857 4 8191 000677206 09 49 56 897 3 8191 000677206 09 49 56 927 4 8191 000677206 09 49 56 967 3 8191 000677206 09 49 57 087 4 8191 000677206 09 49 57 117 3 8191 000677206 09 49 57 157 4 8191 000677206 09 49 57 197 3 8191 000677206 09 49 57 237 4 8191 000677206 09 49 57 267 3 8191 000677206 09 49 57 307 4 8191 000677206 09 49 57 347 3 8191 000677206 09 49 57 388 4 8191 000677206 09 49 57 428 3 8191 000677206 09 49 57 458 4 8191 000677206 09 49 57 498 3 8191 000677206 po ro om om om opm om m m LL S LL LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLL pR m or op orm orm opm om orm opm om orm pm om rm pm rm 09 49 57 728 W 8191 000000000 09 49 57 878 3 8191 000000000 09 49 57 978 4 8191 000677206 09 49 58 028 4 8191 000677206 09 49 58 089 5 8191 000677206 09 49 58 149 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 189 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 189 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 239 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 279 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 279 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 329 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 369 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 409 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 409 6 8191 000000000 09 49 58 459 6 8
162. 5 42 m 137 8 ft 848 3539 One end is labeled Keypad and the other is m 49 2 ft or 45 m 147 6 ft The labeled Rear Panel KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT 1 m 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 Odd numbered ADAPTER CABLE COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for KEYPADS and even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming Table 3 9 Color Key for the CONNECTORS in Figures 3 18 through 3 21 Symbol Label Notes BlacK CONNECTOR of the RS 485 ADAPTER CABLE that connects to the MIM 200 has a black label Blue Green Only RS 232 CABLE that is supplied by Kodak has red labels White end of the RS 485 DATA CABLE that connects directly to the MIM has a white label Yellow lt lt 3 30 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 25 MODALITY SERVERS Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode RS 422 Serial Control Device Cable DB37 H180_0010BCA H180_0010BC amp Important RS 422 Serial Control RS 485 Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 Imaging AN RS 485 Data Cable DB37 7 sse Digital Input Pkg RS 422 Adapter Cable DB37 to DB15 Keypad Keypad Cable Com Port Adapter Cable or the MIM 200 only f 27 100 200 G Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only The CABLES
163. 5 Input Data Formats ALDWEI oh ao Se awe a eee RE 1 5 ee ede on eee elem en 1 5 Maximum Inputs and Outputs ek nes bo Sue eee ae eee ES A PESCE 1 6 eee recess Gets es Se a ee ee eee 1 8 PUT vay oc sse E3902 1S3 ES 1 8 MIM Service Application 1 8 be SSO Bows ES 1 8 MIM 200 and 25 Print Server Patient 1 13 Documentation ee eee ee re eer er ee 6 eee 1 16 Tools Hardware and 2 1 Software 2 2 Installing the Service LAPTOP COMPUTER Software for MIM Based Products 2 3 Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 2 9 Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 2 15 Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows NT 2 17 Installing SecureLink Client Software 2 19 Installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL 5 2 21 Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere 2 21 Connection
164. 5 seconds Transfer took 7 45 seconds 11 29 01 13 25 36 662 6 PrintJob cpp 186 CPrintJob PrintPage starts Set up for printing 11 29 01 13 25 36 692 6 m952 printPage cpp 902 m952 printPage called 11 29 01 13 25 36 722 5 1952 printPage cpp 421 m952 printPage used page width 2256 amp height 2676 11 29 01 13 25 36 752 5 m952 printPage cpp 443 m952 printPage PrintPage add FID 1 0 ImageBox cpp 53 x0 0 y0 0 width 2256 height 2676 m952 sendImageInfo cpp 424 m952 sendImagelnfo called m952 sendImagelInfo cpp 410 LIT adjBox mimagelID lindex 1 X 0 0 W 2256 H 2676 Cols 2256 LL LI LLL LLL LL ma man mn rm rm m 11 29 01 13 25 28 430 5 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 37 SERVICE MANUAL 11 29 01 13 25 36 782 5 m952 printPage cpp 474 m952 printPage PrintPage Setup free format 2 11 29 01 13 25 36 812 5 m952 printPage cpp 483 m952 printPage PrintPage FID 0 2 11 29 01 13 25 36 843 5 m952 printPage cpp 493 m952 printPage PrintPage FID 1 0 11 29 01 13 25 36 863 6 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand DZO 2676 6 1 1 000 1 000 17 1 6 Define zone on the sheet of film 2676 lines 6 top border lines 1 image in zone horizontal mag of 1 000 vertical mag of 1 000 5th order interpolation Image id is 1 contrast setting is 6 11 29 01 13 25 36 893 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket DZO 2676 6
165. 52 cpp 485 m952 GetFPStatus called 11 29 01 13 25 23 563 6 11952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand RQS Request status of Film Processor 11 29 01 13 25 23 593 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ROS 11 29 01 13 25 23 784 5 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged request 11 29 01 13 25 23 8146 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item STA 1 RDY to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 23 8445 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response STA 1 RDY Film Processor status is Ready 11 29 01 13 25 23 874 6 Laserlmager cpp 778 CLaserlmager Close starts thread 0x2013929351160 Begin to close setup session and print summary 11 29 01 13 25 23 894 6 dim cpp 1786 Dim Stop starts 11 29 01 13 25 23 924 6 11 29 01 13 25 23 954 6 11 29 01 13 25 23 984 6 11 29 01 13 25 24 014 6 11 29 01 13 25 24 044 6 11 29 01 13 25 24 064 6 11 29 01 13 25 24 094 5 SMessage cpp 80 in SMessage close 11 29 01 13 25 24 124 5 ccpacket cpp 845 M952 startPacketTask Quitting SMessage cpp 72 SMessage SMessage SMessage cpp 80 SMessage close dim cpp 1288 Dim DeleteDataConnection starts LaserImager cpp 791 CLaserImager Close ends currentFilmSize E8X10 currentFilmType FTUnknown sheetsLeft 99 printerStatus PR Normal fpStat
166. 55 SCP Assoc 10255 IB Set TFT Ver693c0 w87 IB Set Dry Contrast 6 IB Body Part DEFAULT from IB Configuration Information IB Color Profile DEFO from IB found an Image s PLUT IB uses PLUT uid IB Image Tone Adjustment 0 from NetworkServicesFactory cpp 350 Reply 1 from 100 100 100 40 bytes 12 time 0 ms NetworkServicesFactory cpp 322 Pinging 100 100 100 40 with 12 bytes of data MIMDicomDevice cpp 78 SCP Assoc 10255 Down NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Using Windows 2000 EXPLORE on the MIM through pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM 2 Start the pcAnywhere application and connect with the MIM 3 At the taskbar right click Start 4 Click Explore The Explore Window for the MIM appears 5 Use Windows EXPLORE to find and move files as necessary Transferring Files Using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE The pcAnywhere FILE TRANSFER FEATURE allows you to easily transfer files between your LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM 2 Start the pcAnywhere application and connect with the MIM 2 25 pcANYWHERE E 26 ele wl x File Transfer Icon 3 Click the File Transfer icon The pcAnywhere File Manager screen appears The left pane shows files on your LAPTOP COMPUTER The right pane shows files on the MIM You can copy files
167. 55 of approximately 2 A D counts default 128 VIDEO 60 and 150LC 0 255 default 128 Fine Offset Fine video offset control One Fine Offset step will provide a change of 0 255 default 128 approximately one half A D count Coarse Gain Coarse video gain control Set the gain level with the Coarse Gain before 0 255 default 128 you use the Fine Gain Fine Gain Fine video gain control 0 255 default 128 LF Cable VIDEO 60 and 150LC only Low frequency compensation Calculated 0 255 default 128 Compensation value The lower the number the longer the CABLE See Figure 7 1 on Page 7 21 and the Cable Compensation Adjustment on page 7 21 HF Cable VIDEO 60 and 150LC only High frequency compensation Calculated 0 255 default 128 Compensation value The lower the number the longer the CABLE See Figure 7 1 on Page 7 21 and the Cable Compensation Adjustment on Page 7 21 Amp Offset VIDEO 150 only Sets the offset voltage level applied to the variable gain 0 255 default 150 video amplifiers Used with the coarse and fine gain offset controls Auto Level VIDEO 150 only Pressed to do automatic gain and offset calculations N A Requires an image with a grayscale bar or one with brightest white and brightest black Auto Offset Sets the offset Requires an image with a grayscale bar or one with brightest white and brightest black 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 21 SERVICE MANUAL
168. 65535 default 104 socket connection for sending and receiving DICOM messages AE Title The Applications Entity AE Title specifies the Destination 1 16 alphanumeric characters application that the MIM must communicate with for successful DICOM communications The field width for this parameter is 1 16 alphanumeric characters Timers Counters This feature is used for DICOM communication and is configurable per site It specifies the number of retries per message and the amount of time to wait for a response after sending a message 7 62 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 28 Supported Items Parameters for Store Destinations Supported Items E4 Collatior Print Quality Iw Common Text Remote Image Deletion Tonescaling on Image Basis I Rotation Pivot Density lt Back Finish Cancel Item Description Range Supported Select Supported Items to display the supported features indicated in this table N A Items Collation Enables study mode operation at the KEYPAD and has the Destination print the set of all Yes No films that belong to the same study Select if the destination allows Collation Common Text Enables the user to enter common text information including the macros for time date etc at Yes No the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Select if the dest
169. 7 5 Primary Control COM Port See Table 7 5 e Auxiliary Control Type Used only for Autofilming See Table 7 5 Auxiliary Control COM Port Used only for Autofilming See Table 7 5 Aspect Ratio and Page Preallocation See Table 7 5 7 Click OK to return to the Direct Connect Input Configuration window 8 Ifthe input is from a Qualified MODALITY advance to Using Auto Setup to Set Up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD 9 Ifthe input is from an Unqualified MODALITY consult TSC before entering parameters a Select Acquisition Modify to display the Video Board Setup window see Table 7 6 b Select Config Horizontal Parameters The Horizontal Parameters window displays see Table 7 7 c Enter parameter information from the MODALITY DATABASE and then click OK d Repeat steps b and c for each of the 4 remaining parameter types that can be selected on the Video Board Setup window Vertical Table 7 8 Video Gain and Offset Table 7 9 Video Sync Table 7 10 and Pixel Clock Table 7 11 After entering the parameters select Set Parameters from the Video Board Setup window f Advance to Using Auto Setup to Set Up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 13 SERVICE MANUAL Table 7 5 Direct Connect Input Parameters Parameter Description Range Board Channel INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS selected channel VIDEO BO
170. 7 589 5 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 27 6196 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 27 6495 1952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS Command executed properly 11 36 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting 11 29 01 13 25 27 6796 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand ORI P Set page orientation to Portrait 11 29 01 13 25 27 6996 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ORLP 11 29 01 13 25 27 880 5 ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 27 900 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 27 9305 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS Command executed properly 11 29 01 13 25 27 9606 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand CLR ALL Clear all pages from memory 11 29 01 13 25 27 990 6 Laserlmager cpp 624 CLaserImager PollJobStatusChange starts 11 29 01 13 25 27 990 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket CLR ALL 11 29 01 13 25 28 020 6 11 29 01 13 25 28 050 6 LaserImager cpp 660 CLaserImager PollJobStatusChange ends 11 29 01 13 25 28 080 6 LaserImager cpp 668 CLaserImager PollPrinterStatusChange starts 11 29 01 13 25 28 110 6 11 29 01 1
171. 820 PE PERE Obtaining Optimum Images 2 Click Refresh List to see all the image sizes that have been sent to the Print Server gt Note If you know the image size from the modality and it does not appear in the list click Add to directly add this image size for Text Box Relocation configuration 3 Select an image size in Columns x Rows and click Modify to edit Text Box Coordinates Configure Text Box Coordinates pu 8 8820 NOV 2003 8 13 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Click View Image to view an image in MIM Look Images ce 200209091 359411 9900778 200209091 4554575279165 img 2002090915451129 4604 img 2002091 00540245111991 2 1 2002091006402561 32566 img Files of type Image Files img Cancel Open as read only 5 Select the appropriate image and click Open 1 ar lm PORT ADL 8 14 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images 6 Move your mouse to the Text Area for the text box that you are relocating Click to zoom an area of interest Click and drag to select an area of interest and zoom C lmages4 200203091 356411599007 78_img ROI gt Note If you increase the image size too much and you can no longer determine coordinates right click to get the original image size 7 Position the mouse over the top left corner and bottom right corner of each text box and record the coordinates The
172. 8700 LASER IMAGER MIM 100 DICOM WORKSTATION DISPLAY KEYPAD DICOM 25 Print Server 8120 LASER IMAGER Imaging sd Device pn CROSSOVER ETHERNET DICOM CABLE Color or CHE rinm ideo 8200 LASER IMAGER MIM 200 RS 422 COPPER DICOM CABLE H180_3003ECA H180_3003EC 8300 or 8610 KEYPAD LASER IMAGER DISPLAY MIM 200 NOV 2003 8E8820 System Description Figure 1 4 MODALITY SERVERS PRINT DICOM over Ethernet KEYPAD Digital Data Imaging Device i Digital Data Imaging Device 200 KEYPAD KEYPAD Imagin quo 2 Autofilming E Link 52 Grayscale Video Imaging Device Keypad TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD lec a Digital Data Imagin gt 2 Autofilming Link iue E 52 Color is 2000 Grayscale 52 fee Video 55 p 9 259 oo iE Imaging Device UM pon MIM 200 TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD H180_3004EC 8 8820 NOV 2003 1 11 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 1 5 MODALITY SERVER PRINT SERVER and COMBINATION BOXES DICOM over Ethernet COPPER PRINT CABLE KEYPAD DICOM Imaging Ld DISPLAY Device TOUCHSCREEN SSSI KEYPAD Grayscale KEYPAD FI rq MIM 200 8100 LASER IMAGER Ethernet CABLE T 1 DISPLAY a07 KEYPAD 160 LASER IMAGER Imaging Device Imaging Device Grayscale Video EE MIM 200 DICOM Imaging Device Gra
173. ABLE TOUCH SCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD INPUT 1 COM 2 not used DISPLAY KEYPAD INPUT 2 O cS 5 5 gt TOUCH SCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD INPUT 2 O T VGA PORT INPUT 2 DIGITAL OR VIDEO TELCO el gt RJ11 sd Ethernet 10 100 BASE T to 209 2c E 8200 or 160 optiona MIM 200 X205 2 4 GHz Ethernet LASER IMAGER CROSSOVER 180 0108HCA CABLE 3m 10 m available H180 0108HC b Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 3 18 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 14 MIM 200 X200 1 GHz PRINT SERVER FIBER OPTIC FOPCIL OUTPUT CABLES 1 CUSTOMER NETWORK Ethernet CABLE BOWER To UPS SLOT BOARD SWITCH Ethernet 10 100 BASE T DISPLAY KEYPAD INTERNAL MODEM SERIAL INTERFACE 8500 8700 LASER IMAGER PLUS 969 HQ LASER IMAGER or 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER OPTIC CABLES 3 m 10 30 60 m available COM 1 SERVICE and EXT MODEM 000000 optional COM 2 MIM 200 667 MHz not used To UPS COM 1 CUSTOMER SERVICE and EXT MODEM NETWORK Ethernet CABLE lw SLOT BOARD DOMO VIDEO ADAPTER not used INTERNAL MODEM SERIAL INTERFACE DISPLAY KEYPAD 55 Jr 8 8500 8700 IMAGE gt LASER IMAGER EIRE or 8800 MULTI INPUT
174. ARD 1 Channel 1 2 or 3 RGB Logical Name Name of the BOARD receiving the input 1 5 alphanumeric Database Name of the MODALITY A view only field 1 30 alphanumeric Primary Control Type What the customer uses to control the MIM KEYPAD Touchscreen or Conventional Autofilming Hitachi KCL M952 P831 Siemens DASM FSPOT SPCI 3M DASM FSPOT SPCI Toshiba YMS Primary Control COM Port Port for the KEYPAD or the SERIAL CONTROL CABLE connection KEYPAD COM 5 for MIM 100 For MIM 200 itis COM 5 7 9 or 11 Autofilming RS422 COM 4 for MIM 100 For MIM 200 it is COM 4 6 8 or 10 Auxiliary Control Keypad When Autofilming is selected as the Primary Control Auxillary Keypad is automatically checked The type of KEYPAD 1s selectable KEYPAD Touchscreen or Conventional Auxiliary Control The COM Port for the KEYPAD when it is used for KEYPAD COM 5 for MIM 100 For MIM 200 Com Port auxiliary control If the KEYPAD is the Primary itis COM 5 7 9 11 Control then the Auxiliary Control Com Port is not user changeable Aspect Ratio Horizontal component of pixel aspect ratio The 255 Horizontal software automatically determines this ratio When the aspect ratio 1s not 1 1 the software corrects for non square pixels Aspect Ratio Vertical component of pixel aspect ratio The software 1 255 Vertical automatically determines this ratio When
175. ASER PRINTER The soft boot process might result in incorrectly terminated operations in the LASER PRINTER Use the RESET on the front of the CPOI to soft boot the CPOI without de energizing the LASER PRINTER 8 After executing the diagnostics de energize and energize the LASER PRINTER 9 Return operation of the MIM to the customer Table 11 5 Troubleshooting the CPOI Indication Action One or more of the 8 boot up tests fails ChSum not OK Reseat the DAUGHTER BOARD of the CPOI and reboot If necessary install a new CPOI CPCP node does not match node configured in Page 6 11 Execute item 3 in the Utilities Menu If the Anchor is incorrect see the indication below Date Time of the CPOI and the Print Server do not match Execute item 8 in the Utilities Menu Do not execute item 9 unless the TSC instructs you Version CPOI Ver 1 2 The version must be 1 2 Install Mod 1 Spurious interrupts counts are display for your information Mod 49 must be installed for the 2180 LASER PRINTER To reset to zero execute Ctrl kill Incorrect Anchor Configure the Destination See Page 6 12 If the Anchor remains incorrect execute item 8 in the Utilities Menu If the diagnostic does not indicate a malfunction of the MIM OI and the FIBER OPTIC CABLE then check that the other CP interfaces on the VMEbus operate correctly If necessary install a new CPO
176. Ack received LaserImager cpp 624 CLaserImager PollJobStatusChange starts LaserImager cpp 660 CLaserImager PollJobStatusChange ends LaserImager cpp 668 CLaserImager PollPrinterStatusChange starts LaserImager cpp 1174 PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper starts LaserImager cpp 1207 GetPrinterStatusHelper starts LaserImager cpp 702 CLaserImager Open starts maxRetries 100retryWaitSeconds 7 LaserImager cpp 732 LIT in use by thread 0x201392935145 wait and retry 1 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting 09 50 03 797 5 8191 000000000 09 50 03 837 5 8191 000000000 1 09 50 03 867 6 8191 000000000 m m Lm m 09 50 03 907 6 8191 000000000 09 50 03 947 6 8191 000000000 Media BWGen E14X172b20 09 50 03 987 5 8191 000000000 09 50 04 027 5 8191 000000000 09 50 04 077 5 8191 000000000 09 50 04 117 5 8191 000000000 09 50 04 147 6 8191 000000000 09 50 04 187 6 8191 000000000 09 50 04 227 6 8191 000000000 09 50 04 297 6 8191 000000000 09 50 04 337 5 8191 000000000 09 50 04 378 5 8191 000000000 09 50 04 418 5 09 50 04 458 6 09 50 04 498 5 09 50 04 538 6 09 50 04 578 6 09 50 04 608 6 09 50 04 648 5 09 50 04 688 5 09 50 04 808 5 09 50 04 848 5 09 50 04 888 5 09 50 04 928 6 Beta 5 5 Con 6 09 50 04 968 6 8191 000000000 Beta 5 5 Con 6 09 50 04 998 6 8191 000000000 II II II II II II 11
177. Address the side of the MIM After re ghosting the IP Address for all V 6 1 MIMs is 123 123 123 10 2 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Service Tracking Information Service Tracking Information Oakdale Svc Eng 7 Code 55 fossa mes i Check that the information in the Service Tracking Information window is correct See Table 7 1 4 Did you change information e Yes Click OK e No Click Cancel 5 Advance to the next procedure to set up the MODALITY SERVER for the network NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 7 1 Input Parameters Service Tracking Information Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Input Parameter Description Range manufacturing Site Hospital Name The location of the MIM This will appear as an 1 14 alphanumeric characters annotation if enabled within the SCU Connection Database K Number The K Number assigned to this MIM by 1 11 alphanumeric characters Serial Number The Serial Number assigned by manufacturing to the MIM family The Service Tracking window displays the corresponding service code below the Serial Number 1 6 alphanumeric characters Model Indicates the type of equipment MODALITY SERVERS MIM 200 MIM 100NR Service Code Indicates the service code of the equipment 4 digit code Power On Hours The number of hours that the MIM has been energized The so
178. B Setup Disable USB Keyboard Mouse Support Devices and I O Ports IDE Drives Setup Select High Performance for IDE Performance default setting IDE Hard Disk Drive 0 Devices and I O Ports IDE Drives Setup Disable IDE Read Prefetch default setting IDE Hard Disk Drive 0 Select CD ROM for the Primary First Startup Device Select Hard Disk 0 for the Primary Second Startup Device Select Disabled for the Automatic Power On Startup Sequence Select Primary for the Error Startup Sequence Enable Keyboardless Operation Mode Disable Network Boot F12 Option Power Management APM Enable APM BIOS Power Management APM Disable Automatic Hardware Power Management Power Management Automatic Power On Disable Wake on LAN Wake on LAN 4 2 7 10 1 1 3 EN 12 13 14 7 After entering new settings save and exit the BIOS setup 8 Reboot Then re ghost the MIM 8E8820 NOV 2003 4 7 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the BIOS for the 25 PS This version of MIM comes from the factory set to boot from the CD ROM Use this procedure if the BIOS is corrupted 1 Make sure the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE 2 Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application or the KEYPAD 3 De energize the MIM 4 Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM See Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM in S
179. Blue Out 8 m or 20 m J6 Green Out KAS SWITCH J5 Red Out 115 230 V J4 Sync In t J3 Blue In a J2 Green S J1 Red In COLOR a VIDEO 5 INTERFACE gt s VIDEO a TELCO A J8 Csync Out ADAPTER RJ 11 H J7 Csync kma SH PHONE J5 Video3 In NEMO 9899 COM 1 66060 J4 Video2 Out W SERVICE 000000 75 J3 Video In 4 000000 S OOOOOO J2 Video1 Out gt gt CABLE ideo u 5 VIDEO gt H d RS 485 DATA CABLE 10 m or m Ethernet 10 100 BASE T lt INTERNAL MODEM RS 485 ADAPTER SERIAL INTERFACE O H 1m CABLE DIGITAL INTERFACE as needed BLANK H180_0058ECA H180_0058EC CABLE DIGITAL VIDEO INTERFACE as needed ADAPTER 5 gt Note For information on Autofilming CABLES e See Figure 3 23 for connections to a VIDEO MODALITY e See Figures 3 25 through 3 28 for connections to a DIGITAL MODALITY Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 9 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 5 MIM 200 1 GHz MODALITY SERVER CABLES
180. C CHASSIS see Figure 12 3 SP8E7078 PC AUR ENCLOSURE AY 2 4 Includes HARD DRIVE CD ROM DRIVE CPU BOARD GHz and VGA BOARD For BOARDS added to PC CHASSIS see Figure 12 2 2 PC AUR ENCLOSURE 1 2 GHz 2 3E0840 KEYPAD touchscreen Shipped with the latest FIRMWARE For proper operation must be loaded with correct level of firmware See Section 2 for procedure 3 SPEI KEWAD o 12 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List 5 SP7E8011 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER For U S and Canada SUPPLY UPS 120 V 4E8357 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER For international use SUPPLY UPS 230 V 4E8061 External Modem Includes POWER ADAPTER not illustrated e TELEPHONE CORD not illustrated SERIAL CABLE not illustrated 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 3 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 2 MIM 200 2 4 GHz BOARDS O O A CRORPPPPPERS O OO N Oo O 180 0115HCA 180 0115HC SP3H9600 CABLE COM 10 COM 11 CABLE 10 COM 11 Internal Used in all MIM 200s AL s d DL NM MODEM 3 com 56K PCI Used in MIM 200s manufactured with software earlier than 6 0 See Figure 12 8 SP6E5193 BOARD BOARD network isolation isolation See Figure 12 12 Required in EEC countries rmm BOARD RS422 n EPA interface 8 channel Used in all MIM 200s See Figure 12 9 V 1 19 BOARD digital interface 8 mb V_2 2 in
181. CIL BOARD 3 4 Network Isolation for MIM 200 667 MHz 1 MHz 1 2 GHz 2 4 MHz European 3 42 Primary Ethernet Isolation Connections 3 42 Secondary Ethernet Isolation Connections 3 42 Patient Environment 3 42 Connecting the KEYPAD to the 3 43 Preparing to Apply POS sw sense soy os hd ar ee hance dado 3 44 De energizing MIM uuu ida oce aS DASA vU el iR FUP Sw ws bw edi eae OR 3 44 A dh PPPP C 3 44 Upgrading MIM Software a eios ddp ach hee REG ES RE bad oder ha eR ewe PO dE LESSEE dos 4 1 Saving and Restoring the System Set Up isses aoe oe eee dead ede Rae TIE 4 1 Saving and Restoring from a PRINT or DISPLAY KEYPAD 4 2 Backing up from the TOUCHSCREEN 4 2 Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 667 2 4 7 some Up te BKIS Ior oi ah oe oe ied hs EEG PE DSS weed 4 8 Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 100 4 9 Loading New MIM Application Software 4 10 Installing MIM DEVICE DRIVERS 4 14 bet
182. COM_PHINT 2180 KELP 2180 Image Optimization Other Printer Options Services Frovided to 5 0 r Curve Shape Tonescaling ULUT fle 4 r Contrast dry x ITE PLUT Curve Shape Contrast wet upmz ak wilt 3k p Wau ote FR Always Apply F Always Appl r Tonescaling Method Perception LUT Always Apply 5 gu x n 1 E 1 c A jar m Modality ppe S60U 361 Always Apply Modality Group Convolution Group Gamma Table Linear instance 7 Prafile Common mage Drin Generic CAT 1 Genenc CAT 2 Genenc CAT 3 Interpolation Type CUBIC SPLINE Always Apply avs Apply Body Part Image Dimas r Smoothing Type ma Polarity 3 6 Normal Always Apply Always Apply n Always Apply F Always sop 4 Check the parameters on the Image Optimization Tab and change if necessary See Table 8 1 on Page 8 5 for recommended parameter values 5 Click on the Other Printer Options tab to select the second screen of parameters 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 3 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 8 2 SCP Parameters Other Printer options SCP Parameters 149 98 196 41 rick DryView dv83 8300 Image Opt
183. CPU FAN CD ROM DRIVE MOTHER BOARD MIM 100 1 2 H180_3035DCA H180_3035DC NOV 2003 8E8820 Additional Information Section 13 Additional Information Setting Up the Mitra PACS BROKER to Send Event Notifications to the MIM Starting with Version 5 0 the MIM uses the DICOM N Event reporting capability of the Mitra PACS BROKER MODALITY Worklist push model To have automatic notifications sent to it the MIM must be registered in the Mitra PACS BROKER If the MIM is not registered or until the first push notification is received the MIM will use the normal pull mode for obtaining MODALITY worklists Note V_ 1 5 2 of the Mitra PACS BROKER does not allow Study description which also will cause the MIM software to revert to the pull mode 1 Open the BROKER Toolbar You might need the password Broker I oolbmr 2 Click Device Manager second button from the left Device Manager A mm RON RON ROSE ROOM RON Kodak CR device DIRECTVIEWS10 Standard PACS Device mim SIMHIS Standard PACS Devic
184. Click Finish Select Communications cable between two computers Click Properties Set Maximum Port Speed to 115200 Click OK Click OK again to close the Phone and Modem Options window Continue with the next procedure 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 15 SERVICE MANUAL Creating a Dial Up Networking Icon for the SERIAL PORT Windows 2000 1 At the TASKBAR select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt Network and Dial Up Communications 2 Click Make New Connection The Network Connection Wizard starts 3 Click Next 4 Select Connect directly to another computer and click Next 5 Select Guest and click Next 6 Select Communications cable between two computers COM1 and click Next 7 Select Only for myself and click Next 8 Enter the name Connect to MIM products or some other title you choose 9 Click Finish An icon now appears in the Networking and Dial Up Connections window with the name you entered 10 Make a desktop shortcut for connection you just created a Right click the MOUSE on the icon you just created b Click Create Shortcut c Click Yes to place the shortcut on the desktop 11 Close the Networking and Dial up Connections window 12 Continue with the next procedure Creating Dial Up Networking Icons for MODEM Connections Windows 2000 You should create a dial up networking icon for each of the
185. Consists of S shaped variations about a central curve which is somewhat brighter than the central linear in perceived brightness curve of the U693C0 ULUT Set As with the U693C0 ULUT Set all curves of this set also intersect at the 50 point of maximum input but the mid tone brightness of the curves is somewhat higher than the mid tone brightness of the U693C0 ULUT Set As with the U693C0 ULUT Set as the contrast setting 1s increased from 1 to 12 the mid tone contrast 1 e the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale is increased while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale 1s decreased This ULUT set has rather wide applicability and is often used for Ultrasound nuclear medicine and DSA It may also be used for other MODALITIES when a brightness greater than that from the U693C0 ULUT Set is desired Perceived Brightness 0 5 10 2l 30 40 50 60 fo 80 90 95 100 Digital Input 99 Group 4 GSDFP All the contrast tables of this set are based on the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function parameterized with a D min of 0 2 a lightbox luminance of 2000 cd sq m and an ambient light fraction of 0 005 Light fraction is the amount of reflected ambient light coming off the film expressed as a fraction of the lightbox luminance For this ULUT Set the parameter which varies as the contrast setting is changed is D max As the contrast setting is changed from 1 through 12 the D max parameter goes through the foll
186. DB 11 30 01 16 21 21 498 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1888 SCP Assoc 10255 FS Print Priority MED 11 30 01 16 21 21 498 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2002 SCP Assoc 10255 FS Value received for FilmBase was BLUE FILM 11 30 01 16 21 22 009 5 4041 23711491 DICOM MIMPresentationLUTSCP cpp 118 SCP Assoc 10255 PLUT Creating Presentation LUT PLUT N CREATE 11 30 01 16 21 22 400 5 4041 23711491 DICOM MIMPresentationLUTSCP cpp 274 SCP Assoc 10255 PLUT uid 1 2 840 113564 3 5040 2001 11 30 14 22 30 3 11 30 01 16 21 22 630 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2193 SCP Assoc 10255 Creating Film Box FB N CREATE 11 30 01 16 21 22 680 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2234 SCP Assoc 10255 FB get FilmSize from ConnectionDB 14INX17IN 11 30 01 16 21 22 690 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2302 SCP Assoc 10255 FB Using FilmSize from Dicom 11 30 01 16 21 22 690 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2317 SCP Assoc 10255 FB Checking the FilmSize value of 14INX17IN 11 48 NOV 2003 8E8820 11 30 01 16 21 22 690 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2265 SCP Assoc 10255 14INX17IN 11 30 01 16 21 22 740 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2426 SCP Assoc 10255 with Base of BLUE FILM 11 30 01 16 21 22 740 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2445 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 22 7
187. De energize then energize the MIM The software will begin to load automatically 10 Wait 6 minutes for ghosting to complete For the MIM 100 and MIM 200 The MIM will beep 3 times if ghosting was successful If the MIM beeps 10 times ghosting has failed For the 25 PS The CD and HDD LED s will stop blinking after 6 minutes indicating that ghosting has completed successfully 11 Remove the CD ROM from the MIM De energize the MIM then energize it Important After a MIM has been ghosted the first reboot will take about 4 minutes CHKDSK will be performed once Then the MIM will reboot and do CHDSK 3 more times before reaching the Ready state The length of this process is not an indication of a bad Hard Drive You should allow at least 7 minutes before assuming that the boot process has failed When in doubt connect a MONITOR to the MIM and watch the boot process gt Note After V 6 0 and above ghosting is completed the MIMs and RAS Server will have the following default IP Addresses MIM 100 MIM 200 PS 25 123 123 123 10 RAS Server Begin IP Address 123 123 123 200 End IP Address 123 123 123 201 12 After successfully ghosting re enable the correct software licenses See Enabling Software Licenses on Page 4 12 13 Restore the cofiguration from the backup disk or manually configure the system See the instructions in Section 6 for PRINT SERVERS or Section 7 for MODALITY SERVERS 8E8820 NOV 2
188. DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER PLUS Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER STANDARD Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER The procedures this section include Obtaining Optimum Images Creating optimum images for an SCP Either the MIM Service Application or the DISPLAY KEYPAD is used for this procedure Creating optimum images for an SCU Either the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD or the PRINT KEYPAD is used for this procedure Note Information on Transfer Function Tables TFTs and User Lookup Tables ULUTS is provided at the end of this section 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Using the MIM Service Application to Create Optimum Images for the SCP This procedure sets up SCP image processing defaults for all MODALITIES that sends images to a PRINTER through the MIM 1 Send an image from each SCU to record its IP Address with the MIM 2 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt SCP Services SCP Services List of Connected SCUs Address AE Title 127 0 0 1 DICOM_PRINT CICOM_PRINT 2750 KELP 2180 Delete Close 3 From the List of Connected SCUs select the first SCU and click Modify 8 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images Figure 8 1 SCP Parameters Image Optimization SCP Parameters 127 0 0 1 DICOM_PRINT gt DI
189. DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER Installation of the hardware includes Unpacking Installing a 25 PS Connecting System CABLES Terminating Video Inputs Connecting a Telephone Line to an INTERNAL MODEM Installing an EXTERNAL MODEM Installing a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT FOPCIL BOARD Installing a COPPER OUTPUT COPCIL BOARD Network Isolation for the MIM 200 European MIM 200 System Setup Per IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 Requirements Connecting the KEYPAD Directly to the MODALITY Preparing for Application of Power Energizing the MIM De energizing the MIM L1 LJ L1 LI LJ C3 L3 CIL LJ CIC CIL 11 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 1 SERVICE MANUAL Important The site must be prepared for installation of the MIM as described the SITE SPECIFICATIONS for the MIM Before installation of the MIM the customer must provide IP and RAS Addresses for all equipment to be installed Also before the MIM can be installed the customer must install e All NETWORK CABLES e All FIBER OPTIC CABLES All 42 m 138 ft and 45 m 148 ft CABLES e Space on wall for installation of MIM if necessary This is optional for MIM 100 and PS 25 Analog telephone line for a MODEM Unpacking System Components 1 Check with the customer where to install the MIM and move the equipment to this area 2 Check the CARTON for damage Caution The SHOCK DETECTOR on the carton for the MIM changes from clear to red if damage occurs during shipment 3 Check that e The
190. EEC Compliancy with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 Requirements Under some circumstances the EEC the MIM 200 complies with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 general requirements for safety Collateral Standard Safety requirements for Medical Electrical Systems Depending on the MIM 200 configuration the following requirements must be met to comply with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 Print Server only The MIM 200 must be connected to the imager by fiber optic cable e Modality Server only Each image source must comply with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 If there are multiple image sources each must comply with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 or meet approval for the patient contact environment Combination Modality Print Server Each image source must comply with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 If there are multiple image sources each must comply with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 or meet approval for the patient contact environment and The MIM 200 must be connected to the imager by fiber optic cable or by ethernet cable through the network isolation board In addition in the EEC for all configurations the MIM 200 must be connected to the building power source and the network according to the Setup Diagram See Setup Diagram on Page 14 5 Where each of the requirements is met the MIM 200 meets the following MDD standard English EUROPEAN MARKET ONLY This processor is Class 1 Type B medical equipment as defined by EN 60601 1 AUT
191. ER PLUG 3H9543 To connect the KEYBOARD and MOUSE to the 25 PS and MIM 100 use Y CABLE TL5371 The 25 PS and MIM 100 have a single CONNECTOR for KEYBOARD and MOUSE 2 Energize the MIM and the MONITOR 3 Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM using SecureLink gt Note Use any of the connection methods described in Connecting Your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM on Page 2 23 4 At the MONITOR KIT KEYBOARD press Ctrl Alt Del Log On to Windows Professional Built on NT Technology ERN SS NNI User name Password Log on using dial up connection Cancel shutdown Options 5 Enter Username RNIServiceManager Password NetServer 6 Click OK Kodak Health Imaging The Kodak Health Imaging security policy requires service users to use Connect Certificate Access Apps SecureLink software to access this product Please establish SecureLink connection with the product and enter the Session ID of the connection SecureLink Session ID Kodak SecureLink Client loj x Secure Server Server local IPAddress 143 38 199 122 Part 443 Save Server Remove Server MONITOR Session ID NABNLL 1 0 66 4 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 39 SERVICE MANUAL 7 Enter the Session ID from the SecureLink Client screen on your LAPTOP COMPUTER gt Note The Session ID is alwa
192. EYBOARD HARNESS is correctly seated on the RELAY BD RIBBON CABLE for the RS422 I F is correctly seated Check that 12 Volt CONNECTOR on DIGITAL or VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD is installed correctly Install a new KEYPAD Install new SERIAL BOARD The SPEAKER does not make one beep tone when the MIM energizes 1 Ifthe SPEAKER does not beep once or sounds more than one beep see Page Check that the SPEAKER is correctly connected to CPU BOARD 3 Check the POWER SUPPLY All outputs of the POWER SUPPLY are correct e CONNECTORS P2 are correctly seated on the CPU BOARD Re seat the SIMMs If necessary install a new SIMM in BANK 0 SLOT 1 5 Re seat the BIOS If necessary install a new BIOS The KEYPAD does not display the Acquisition screen 1 Use the LAPTOP COMPUTER to check that the CPU Setup and Configuration information is correct After you exit the ROM Setup Program the MIM automatically reboots and reloads the system Check that the settings of the SWITCH and JUMPERS are correct on the RS 422 SERIAL BOARD 3 Check that the configuration files are correct Install the System Software and configure the MIM 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 59 SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics for the OPTICAL INTERFACE OI BOARDS amp Important e Executing diagnostics on either the MIM OPTICAL INTERFACE or CPOI BOARDS interrupts communication stopping transmission of i
193. FT 15 designed to provide dry prints which perceptually match the Contrast 6 wet prints made using VER693C0 on an HQ with Dmax 3 0 for both prints The plots of this TFT Set see the chart below show that all 15 of the tables have the same mid tone brightness with varying degrees of an S shape which gives the strongest end points contrast slope to Table 12 and the strongest mid tone contrast to Table 15 Note that this TFT Set provides a narrower range of curves than the VER693CO 4000 3500 S000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 4 ed Se po poses pen oes p erc n e ce 5252 anc qs rere qe o e 20 4 BO 100 120 Input 2 0 8 18 2003 8 8820 Obtaining Optimum Images B3C5AX4 Allows moderate departures from the basic 693 0 curves Curves 2 5 8 11 and 14 roughly cover the span of 693 0 The remaining curves provide more mid tone brightness choices curves 1 4 7 10 and 13 the brightest and curves 3 6 9 12 and 15 the darkest In all there are 5 mid tone contrast choices for each of 3 mid tone brightness choices The plots on the chart show the two dimensional brightness contrast combinations provided by this TFT Set The numbering of the TFTS in the set is such that when a 3 horizontally x 5 vert
194. Full Response Specifies what the Memory Full response should be for the MOV BSY host Host Assume 4800 Lines Specifies whether the host assumes that the destination has Yes No 4800 lines on a page Report Alarms Flag that indicates if MIM should report to the On Off MODALITY alarm conditions associated with the PRINTER Host Assume 300 DPI Specifies whether the host assumes that the destination has Yes No 300 DPI Variable Correction Specifies whether the MIM will attempt to reduce the number Yes No of lines in the last image band to fit the film without minifying the image Store Key Active Determines if Store on the KEYPAD is active when the system uses auxiliary control Active Inactive Receive Message Timer Specifies the amount of time in seconds allowed to 1 999 receive an entire message Start Timer Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the MIM waits for 1 999 the Imaging Device to reply to a handshake character EOT Wait Timer Specifies the amount of time seconds that the MIM waits to 1 999 receive an End of Transmission EOT character from the Imaging Device Switch Mode Allows you to designate printing films using either the Console Keypad Host of the Imaging Device Host or the Auxiliary KEYPAD Switch Handling The process used to handle stored images when filming 15 Not Allowed switched between the host a
195. HORIZED AGENT Manager Product Safety Kodak GmbH Hedelfingerstr 54 56 70327 Stuttgart GERMANY 14 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Warnings and Cautions Setup Diagram This setup diagram applies only to the MIM 200 when installed in the EEC Caution Connections other than those in the Setup Diagram violate IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 requirements and therefore cannot be placed within a patient environment 1 83 meters from a patient bed or chair Building Power MIM 200 COM 1 and COM 2 Port Fillers Part Number 1F1539 ISOLATION UNINTERRUPTIBLE TRANSFORMER POWER SUPPLY 220 VAC Toroid Delta Electronics Corporation Model Model ISB 030W GES102N220032 Network Isolation Board Catalog No 1898030 Typical Placement is slot 2 Building Data Network input 2 Optional Input Used for LASER IMAGER J3 input 1 Connect to MIM 200 Network Port J1 Output 1 Connect to Building Network Port J2 E Output 2 Optional Output Used for LASER IMAGER J4 H180 0113DC 8E8820 NOV 2003 14 5 SERVICE MANUAL Non Compliancy with 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 Requirements Caution Connections described below violate IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 requirements and therefore cannot be placed within a patient environment 1 83 meters from a patient bed or chair In the following circumstances the MIM 200 does not comply wi
196. I The data in the CPCP Buffer Table does not match the hardware installed The MIM OI firmware version does not match the version displayed in Service Tracking Information Select item 8 in the Utilities Menu to execute CPOI MIM onboard diagnostics See Page Page 11 60 Check that the configuration of all interfaces is correct including Node ID Troubleshoot hardware on the VMEbus of the LASER PRINTER 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 65 SERVICE MANUAL Calling for Support Be prepared to provide the following information when calling for support to solve a service problem Model Number MIM 200 MIM 100 or 25 PS K Number For MIM 200 and MIM 100 Located on decal on right side of MIM For 25 PS Located on decal on left front of machine e Serial Number For MIM 200 and MIM 100 Located on decal on back of MIM For 25 PS Located on decal on bottom of machine 11 66 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Section 12 Illustrated Parts List Introduction This section includes illustrated parts lists of the hardware components for the following MIMs Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 200 MIM 200 1 GHz Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 200 MIM 200 1 2 GHz Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 200 MIM 200 2 4 GHz Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 100 MIM 100 1 2 GHz Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER 25 PS Th
197. ITOR KIT that includes MONITOR KEYBOARD and MOUSE The MONITOR KIT connects directly to PORTS on the MIM The LAPTOP COMPUTER can connect to the MIM Over a dial up serial line connection Over an Ethernet network The LAPTOP COMPUTER must contain an Ethernet interface for this connection Over a dial up telephone line using a MODEM 1 8 NOV 2003 8E8820 System Description When the LAPTOP COMPUTER is connected to a MIM the FE can use it to run the MIM Service Application Also via pcANYWHERE the FE can use Windows FEATURES such as Windows EXPLORER Windows EVENT VIEWER and Windows TASK MANAGER on the target MIM gt Note The MONITOR KIT can also be used for service access e The MIM Service Application can be run with the MONITOR KIT because the service software is stored on the MIM as well as on the LAPTOP COMPUTER The MONITOR KIT can be used to watch the boot process and access the BIOS on the MIM When a MONITOR KIT is used a LAPTOP COMPUTER with SecureLink 15 also required to unlock the Windows DESKTOP 8E8820 NOV 2003 1 9 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the MIMs The following figures provide examples of systems using MIMs Figure 1 3 MIMs and other Devices on the Network DICOM over Ethernet s FIBER OPTIC CABLE Device Digital DICOM Data ARCHIVE DEVICE Imaging Color or Device Grayscale 25 Video PI 200 8500
198. ITY See information on TFTs and ULUTS on the following pages 8 10 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images Setting Up Print Server for True Size Printing Cropping of Images When DICOM modality such as CR or DR uses requested image size to send an image to the printer that 15 beyond the range of the printer MIM can crop the image so that it fits on the film achieving true size In some cases a site may wish to print only some of the films from the modality using true size printing cropping and some films without cropping Caution With cropping the edges of the image file are removed If anatomical areas of interest are near an outer edge of the image they might be removed from the image when it is printed Do not use cropping for images with the areas of interest near the edges or corners Important To set up using both cropping and non cropping it is necessary to create 2 destinations at the SCU with the same IP address and port giving 2 unique AE Titles for the destinations Determine if a customer wants to print using both cropping and non cropping from a modality Setting Up the SCU for Cropping 1 Send an image from each SCU to record its IP Address 2 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt SCP Services 3 From the List of Connected SCUS select the correct SCU and click Modify 4 Click Other Printer Options and select Crop under Image Resizing
199. Image Columns 0 E 12 8205 aximum Image Rows Fisel Pitch pisels mm lt Back Finish Cancel Item Description Range Formatting Select Formatting to display the Formatting information indicated this table N A Parameters Aspect Ratio Mix on Mixed aspect ratio on the same page is allowed by the destination The MIM uses this Yes No Page parameter to validate the format Image Size Mix in _ Select if the destination allows mixed image size on standard format This indicates if Yes Std Fmt the image size can be changed on a page with a row column symmetric format The images will be scaled differently to print all the images at the same time The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format DICOM Annotation Select if the destination allows page annotation This indicates if the destination Yes No Box allows the DICOM Annotation Box to be used for selecting the band of text that will be placed on each film The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Requested Size Select if the destination should scale the image to fit the image cell area of the Yes No Scale destination The printer places a notice on the output indicating that the operation was done The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Requested Size Mix Select if the destination allows all images in a row to be the same size The MIM uses Yes No in Row this paramete
200. Includes SecureLink V_1 1 Software Part Number 8E9820 3 pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE installed on LAPTOP 78 9998 2937 3 COMPUTER and on MIM 4 SecureLink V 1 0 Client CD SES814 5 FLOPPY BIOS FLASH DISK 2 0 7F3185 2 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Setting Up the LAPTOP COMPUTER Setup Tasks To prepare your laptop computer for MIM service you must do the software installation and setup tasks listed in the following table on your LAPTOP COMPUTER Normally you will do these procedures during training or they will be part of the TCO or Field LAPTOP COMPUTER image You will not have to repeat them unless you change the operating system on your COMPUTER or new MIM related software is released Table 2 1 LAPTOP COMPUTER Setup Tasks Procedure Procedure Procedure For LAPTOP For LAPTOP For LAPTOP COMPUTER with COMPUTER with COMPUTER with Task Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT 1 Install Service LAPTOP Software Page 2 3 Page 2 3 Page 2 3 for MIM Based Products Install TCP IP Page 2 9 Page 2 15 Page 2 17 Configuring Direct Cable Connection for Page 2 9 Not applicable Not applicable LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 4 Install Dial Up Networking Page 2 10 Not applicable Page 2 17 5 Install Serial Cable to NT and Set Up Page 2 11 Not applicable Not applicable the SERIAL PORT 6 Install Communications cable be
201. Is the equipment a MIM 100 Yes NO a Remove the COVER b Connect the EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE TL 5651 to the equipment 1 TOOL RIBBON CABLE 5E2908 CONNECTOR to IDE 1 on CPU BOARD TOOL RIBBON CABLE 5E2908 CONNECTOR P3 to CD ROM DRIVE EXENDER POWER CONNECTOR TL 5652 to power on CD ROM DRIVE and to the INTERNAL CONNECTOR MOD J2 POWER CONNECTION c Continue with Step 2 Continue with Step 2 2 Energize the MIM and start the MIM Service Application 3 Save the MIM configuration to FLOPPY DISKETTE 4 If necessary set up the BIOS gt Note setting up the BIOS may be necessary for early MIMs that loaded software from the LAPTOP COMPUTER Because current version software is provided on CD ROM the BIOS must be set up to boot from CD ROM 5 Ifthe LAPTOP COMPUTER does not contain the latest version of the MIM Service Application load the latest version 6 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and connect to the MIM Service Application NOV 2003 8E8820 Upgrading MIM Software 7 Select Admin gt Software Licenses and note the software licenses that are enabled These will have to be re enabled after ghosting Software Licenses On DICOM Store Output On 5 5 Connection Authorization Site Code BES 4BE2 83074 33C7 51 Site Kep 8 Load CD ROM with the new application software into the CD ROM DRIVE of the MIM 9
202. LASER IMAGER To set up a PRINT SERVER you must have ALAPTOP COMPUTER with the correct MIM Service Application software See Section 2 The CABLES and HARDWARE installed on the system See Section 3 The system software upgraded If this installation is an upgrade the MIM has The current MIM Application software See Section 4 The necessary software licenses See Section 4 The LASER IMAGER that will be the destination for the MIM PRINT SERVER correctly set up See Section 5 This section includes these procedures for setting up a PRINT SERVER Checking Service Tracking Setting Up the Network Address of the PRINT SERVER Setting Up Network Profiles for a 25 PS in a Mobile Van Setting Up the Network Input to the PRINT SERVER Setting Up the KEYPAD Setting Up the Destination for Single PRINTER Setups Setting Up the Destination for Dual PRINTER Setups QOOQOE 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 1 SERVICE MANUAL Checking Service Tracking 1 Connect the Service LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM 5 Note You will need the IP Address of the MIM to connect For a new MIM locate the IP Address the pouch on the side of the MIM MIMs re ghosted with V_6 1 software will have these IP Addresses e 123 123 123 10 for MIM 100 MIM 200 and 25 PS 123 123 123 200 RAS IP for all MIMs 2 Start the MIM Service Application 3 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Service Tracking Information Service
203. LASER IMAGER destination V 5 0 Adds to MIMs the features of the 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM and the 9405 PRINT SERVER allowing a MIM to be a replacement for these in systems that connect to Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS This release allows connection to the 8700 8500 8610 8300 8200 and 8100 LASER IMAGERS as well as the 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER 160 LASER IMAGER and 969 HQ LASER IMAGER NOV 2003 8E8820 System Description Version Features of Software V 5 2 Adds the features of cropping CR and DR images from Kodak and other manufacturer s systems including FUJI CR to provide true size printing using the MIM Print Servers The MIM Print Servers have expanded Kodak DryView printer destinations including the 8300 8600 and 8610 for the 25 Print Server and 8600 for the MIM 200 Print Server A bar code reader option is supported on the modality servers MIM 100 and MIM 200 to improve workflow for patient demographics A network isolation board has been added to the MIM 200 for the European region 6 0 Adds Privacy Enable features to the MIMs for those customers desiring this feature Expected usage is in DICOM Store and DICOM Worklist management applications Also the privacy feature may be used for the reprint capability of DICOM print applications The privacy feature is optional and can be disabled Incorporates SecureLink authentication and encryption for service connections to the MIM Changes operating
204. LUS 8800 MULTI 3 14 3 15 INPUT MANAGER 969 HQ LASER IMAGER Fiber Optic CPOI 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS 3 16 3 18 Copper COPCIL 8100 8300 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGERS 8500 3 18 3 20 8700 LASER IMAGERS STANDARD MIM 200 1 2 GHz Ethernet 8200 and 160 LASER IMAGERS 3 12 Fiber Optic FOPCIL 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS PLUS 8800 MULTI 3 15 INPUT MANAGER 969 HQ LASER IMAGER Fiber Optic CPOI 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS 3 17 Copper COPCIL 8100 8300 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGERS 8500 and 3 19 8700 LASER IMAGERS STANDARD 25 PS Ethernet 8200 LASER IMAGER 3 21 Fiber Optic FOPCIL 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS PLUS Copper COPCIL 8100 LASER IMAGER 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Table 3 3 Other CABLES CABLE Diagram See Figure MODALITY SERVERS KEYPAD CABLES for Video Mode 3 22 MODALITY SERVERS Autofilming CABLES for Video Mode 3 23 MODALITY SERVERS KEYPAD CABLES for Digital Mode 3 24 MODALITY SERVERS Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode RS422 Serial Control 3 25 MODALITY SERVERS Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode RS232 Converted to RS422 Serial 3 26 Control Siemens Imaging Device FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Hirschmann CONNECTORS 3 27 Siemens Imaging Device FIBER OPTIC CABLE with Pritzel CONNECTORS 3 28 Terminating the Video Input for a MIM 200 with VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD 3
205. Laptop Software for MIM Based Products on the LAPTOP COMPUTER Folder Containing the Step Description SOFTWARE on CD Notes 1 Insert CD into CD ROM DRIVE 2 Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC LapBasic DAO V_ 3 00 files Data SOFTWARE V 2 0 Link Library DLL Files and MODEM Files 3 Install DATA ACCESS OBJECTS DAO Part of Laptop Basic See above FILES V 3 0 Software V 2 0 4 Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V AI 8 S sw 218 MODALITY Database Help Files 5 Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC Laptop30 DAO V 3 5 files SOFTWARE V 3 0 6 Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V 2 1 S sw 2 1 MODALITY Database Help Files 7 Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC Laptop35 SOFTWARE V 3 5 8 Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_ 3 0 S sw 3 0 MODALITY Database Help Files 9 Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V 3 1 S sw 3 1 10 Install LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC mim laptop basic 3 6 SOFTWARE V_ 3 6 11 Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V_ 3 2 mimservice3 2 12 Install SERVICE SOFTWARE V 3 2 1 mimservice3 2 1 13 Install KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE Key 104 V 1 0 4 14 Install KEYPAD FIRMWARE UPDATE Key 105 V 1 0 5 15 Install KEYPAD DIRMWARE UPDATE Key 107 V 1 0 7 16 Install MIM DIGITAL FIRMWARE V 22 Mim Dig 17 MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE Mim 100 V 6 0 18 MIM 100 APPLICATION SOFTWARE Mim 100 V 6 1 19 Install VIDEO 150 BOARD FIRMWARE V150 1 3 V 1 3 Installation Procedure 1 Insert the CD into the LAPTOP COMPUTER The contents of the CD displays automa
206. Lines Per Frame Total Lines Per Frame Vertical Back Porch H Wayne width H Pre Eg width H Post Eq width H nterlacing Interlaced Image Swap Fields Interlaced Field Counter fe lt Override B in H5yncs 5 75 lt Override Asunch Video Compensation Insert Serrating Pulses During Synec Pulses Posted Interval 0 Bost Pulles Dinna the Pe a Equa roune ise Auto Vertical Centering 0 shift Image Upl or Down 2 lines count for interlaced VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD Vertical Parameters E4 Image Lines Per Frame Total Lines Per Frame 560 Vertical Back Porch H 50 Wayne Width H o S erations Do PeEqWidh H 000 Pulses J PostEqwidth H n Pulses D Interlaced Field Counter 52 g Overidel Yeunc Semations Present Double Frequency E q Seration Interlaced Image Sivan Fields Asyunch Video Compensation Insert Serrating Pulses Insert Pulses Outside Vsunc Fre Eq Insertion 0 Fast Eq Insertion 0 Auto Vertical Centering Cancel VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 19 SERVICE MANUAL Auto Vertical Centering Adjusts the top to bottom centering of the image on the film 7 20 NOV 2003 8E8820 Vertic
207. M ISTUD MIMS 300 MIM 9500 Ico rn Cancel 3 At the Choose New Network Print Destination window select the correct SERVER PRINTER combination from the list and then click OK Logical SEP Title IP Address Database Marne Model 200 Memon Finish Cancel 4 At the General parameters window enter the Logical Name for the destination the IP Address the Memory value 5 Click Next 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 45 SERVICE MANUAL 127 24 UE 3n sr Important mimm gem Y ou must select media base for each media item selected in Media window 6 In the Media window select all media that the customer will use gt Note The numbers the Media Information window displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER might not match the numbers displayed on the screen 7 After entering the media parameters click Next 7 46 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER DICOM 30 Basic Grayscale Print 100 8 At the DICOM window check the following parameters Protocol DICOM 3 0 Service Class Basic Grayscale Print Port Number Enter as necessary by the SCP AE Title Enter as necessary by the SCP Timers Counters Accept the defaults a
208. MIMs that you expect to access with a dial up telephone connection The following procedure sets up one dial up modem connection Repeat this procedure for each MIM that has a MODEM 1 At the TASKBAR select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt Network and Dial Up Communications 2 Click Make New Connection The Network Connection Wizard starts 3 Click Next 4 Select Dial up to private network and click Next 5 Select Guest and click Next 6 Select the modem you have installed in your LAPTOP COMPUTER and click Next gt Note If there is only one dial up device in your LAPTOP COMUTER this step may not appear 7 Enter the telephone number of the target MIM or RAS Server 8 Select Only for myself and click Next 9 Enter a name for this connection 10 Click Finish An icon now appears in the Networking and Dial Up Connections window with the name you entered 11 Close the Networking and Dial up Connections window An icon with the name of the connection you entered in Step 9 will now appear in your Dial Up Networking folder You can connect to the target MIM by double clicking on the icon Repeat this procedure for each of the MIMs you expect to access through a MODEM You can create additional icons for MODEM connections later 12 When you are done creating dial up icons continue with Installing SecureLink Client Software Page 2 19 2 16 NOV 2003
209. MinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 1326 numBandsPerPage 2 Get band separation from Database for a Format 4 page which has 2 bands per page and 2 images per band 11 29 01 13 25 19 588 3 Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 4 returns 18 Separation between bands is 18 pixels 11 29 01 13 25 19 618 4 Destination cpp 2945 GetMinImageSeparation colsPerBand 2736 colsPerImage 1356 numImagesPerBand 2 11 29 01 13 25 19 648 3 Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 4 returns 24 Separation between images is 24 pixels 11 29 01 13 25 19 718 4 Destination cpp 2728 GetMinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 1326 numBandsPerPage 2 11 29 01 13 25 19 748 3 Destination cpp 2733 GetMinBandSeparation calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Separation GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Separation Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 4 returns 18 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 33 SERVICE MANUAL 11 29 01 13 25 19 778 4 Destination cpp 2945 GetMinImageSeparation colsPerBand 2736 colsPerImage 1356 numImagesPerBand 2 11 29 01 13 25 19 818 3 Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 4 r
210. NETWORK ISOLATION SERIAL INTERFACE BLANK VGA PORT E COPCIL IMAGE PORT O COPPER S Y CABLE 8100 8300 8600 8610 Sy LASER IMAGER or 8500 8700 LASER MIM 200 X205 2 4GHz PORT IMAGER STANDARD Extensions of 10 30 or 60 m COPPER CABLE H180_0111HCA H180 0111HC b are available gt Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 3 25 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 21 CABLES for 25 PS TO DIGITAL MODALITY TO VIDEO MODALITY RS 485 DATA 75 ohm CABLE 10 m or COAX CABLE 45 m 10 m or 45 m 2 5 8 9 5 c 3 0 t RS 485 90 x 8 2 45 ADAPTER E 5 9 8 o gt 2 1m 8 23825 5 ey O gt 3 8 2 58 Why P2 yo BS we Ce 5 NW 25 DIGITAL ADAPTER CABLE VIDEO VIDEO COLOR VIDEO COLOR INTERFACE ADAPTER NTERFACE ET C CABLE caste 8 m or 20 TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD INPUT 2 AUTO FILMING INPUT 2 COM 1 SERVICE and 10 AUTO FILMING INPUT 1 EXT MODEM TOUCHSCREEN or COM 2 S 11 PRINT KEYPAD not used INPUT 1 COM PORT gt m ADAPTER at Jol CABLE SLOT BOARD Q gt lt X CABLE 10 11 9 INTERNAL MODEM NETWORK ISOLATION TELCO RJ11 jo Qo SERIAL INTERFACE D E INPUT 1 DIGITAL or
211. OM Port Used only for Autofilming See Table 7 3 Aspect Ratio and Page Preallocation See Table 7 3 7 Click OK This will display the Direct Connect Input Configuration window 8 Advance to Setting Up the Digital Interface Image Parameters Table 7 3 Direct Connect Input Parameters Input Parameter Description Range Board INTERFACE BOARD on the PCI BUS DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD 1 or 2 Channel Number Number of the channel of the INTERFACE BOARD Channel 1 Logical Name Name for the BOARD receiving the input 1 5 alphanumeric characters Examples MRI 1 or CTRM 1 Database Name A view only field for Qualified MODALTIES Name of MODALITY was selected from list of Qualified MODALITIES For Unqualified MODALITIES a name must be entered 1 30 alphanumeric characters Modality ID Name Shortened version of MODALITY name This name is printed on the film when the Modality ID is selected for Common Text insertion 1 alphanumeric characters Fischer STU etc Primary Control Type What the customer uses to control the MIM TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD Autofilming Hitachi KCL M952 P831 Siemens DASM FSPOT SPCI 3M DASM FSPOT SPCI Toshiba YMS Primary Control Com Port Port for the KEYPAD or the SERIAL CONTROL CABLE connection KEYPAD COM 5 for MIM 100 For MIM 200 it is COM 5 7 9 or 11 Autofilming RS422 COM 4 for MIM 1
212. OPCIL BOARD to a local PRINTER Tools Parts e FOPCIL BOARD FIBER OPTIC CABLES 2 Procedure 1 Check that the MIM 15 de energized 2 Insert the FOPCIL BOARD into e Slot 6 on the back of the MIM 200 lt SLOT ON NEW gt The INTERFACE BOARD located at the top center of the 25 PS 3 Connect FIBER OPTIC CABLES as indicated in Figure 3 34 On INPUT MODULES for 969 LASER IMAGERS or 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGERS the control CABLES can be connected to either the COM 1 or COM 2 PORT e On the FIBER INTERFACE BOARD for the 8500 8700 LASER IMAGER PLUS the image CABLES can be connected to USER PORT 0 or 1 The control CABLES be connected to COM PORT 0 or 1 Figure 3 34 FIBER OPTIC CABLES FIBER OPTIC CABLES B IMAGE PORT FIBER OPTIC CABLES A COM PORT B Oor 1 Control FOPCIL INPUT MODULE BOARD or FIBER BOARD LASER IMAGER or 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER 3 40 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Installing a COPPER OUTPUT COPCIL BOARD This procedure installs a COPPER OUTPUT COPCIL BOARD in a MIM 200 or 25 PS and connects the COPCIL BOARD to a local LASER IMAGER Tools Parts COPCIL BOARD Y CABLE Procedure 1 De energize the MIM if necessary 2 Insert the COPCIL BOARD into Slot 6 in the MIM 200 lt SLOT ON NEW MIM gt The INTERFACE BOARD location at the top center of the 25 PS 3 Connect CABLES as indicated in Figure 3 35 Ifthe local PRIN
213. One test print from the PRINTER The MODALITY Parameter Worksheet with any changes documented Providing Service Feedback SCAN Feedback Refer to the Service Reporting Guide to find the proper feedback codes for the tasks you completed during the MIM installation Use the codes in Table 9 1 to complete the feedback Use the codes in to complete service feedback e Send the installation time using the XN code e Send the troubleshooting time using the RAM code 8E8820 NOV 2003 9 7 SERVICE MANUAL Service Codes Table 9 1 MIM Product Service Codes Group Service Product Code Code Notes MIM 200 TBD 1539 Serialized Mainframe MIM 100 2551 3433 Serialized Mainframe 29 3754 Serialized Mainframe NETWORK INTERFACE CARD 1547 Used for 160 LASER IMAGER VIDEO 150 INPUT PACKAGE 3467 NSA for MIM 100 VIDEO 150LC INPUT PACKAGE 4399 SA for MIM 100 NSA for MIM 200 VIDEO 60 INPUT PACKAGE 3743 SA for MIM 200 DIGITAL INPUT PACKAGE 3468 SA for MIM MIM OPTICAL INTERFACE 3469 SA for MIM 200 COPCIL INTERFACE 3469 SA for MIM 200 and 25 PS FOPCIL INTERFACE 3469 SA for MIM 200 and 25 PS COMMON PROTOCOL OPTICAL 3746 NSA for 1120 AND 2180 LASER PRINTERS INTERFACE NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD 1532 SA for MIM 200 in Western Europe NOV 2003 8E8820 Conversions Section 10 Conversions Converting Optical Interface to Fi
214. P COMPUTER you can View the MIM VIRTUAL KEYPADS on the MIM desktop Examine the MIM logs e Run on the MIM any of the diagnostic tools that are part of Windows 2000 Use Windows EXPLORER on the MIM to locate files on the MIM Run the MIM Service Application on MIM Buttons and Hot Keys for pcAnywhere 1 2 3 jc 25 1 UR My Computer Nw m onventinnal egpad Network Neighborhood P Active Jobs 0 Bir Open Associations 0 ae El Start HE winroute Remate Network Inte Button Function 1 Full Screen Not applicable for MIM functions If you enter full screen mode you can exit by pressing Alt Enter 2 Scaling Allows the server s TASKBAR to display but may result in poor resolution 3 File Transfer Used to transfer MIM files to the LAPTOP COMPUTER 4 C A D Starts the Ctrl Alt Delete function at the MIM Also must be selected before the pcAnywhere session is ended 5 Disconnect Used to disconnect and end a pcAnywhere remote control session 2 36 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Important Ifthe pcAnywhere screen 15 not set up correctly because of any of the following problems you might have to disconnect and recall the Host Server The pcAnywhere upper TASKBAR does not appear The screen display a
215. POI driver Complete CPOI Ver 1 2 Boot PROM Ver 1 0 UTILITIES MENU 1 Get Current Date amp Time 3 CPCP Buffer Address 4 CPCP Buffer Tables 6 Debug Utilities Trace 8000 7 Get OI Firmware Revisions 8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests 9 Set Current Date amp Time CPOI Status IDLE Spurious interrupts Total 2695692801 Current 0 Enter selection gt 1 Current PSOS Date amp Time gt 5 13 1999 9 41 42 Reset PSOS to RTC Date amp Time gt 5 13 1999 9 41 43 The CPOI is a Plug and Play device No configuration is necessary The MIM downloads all setup information to the CPOI The LAPTOP COMPUTER connects to CPOI at the 25 PIN SERVICE CONNECTOR ofthe DISTRIBUTION BOARD AY on the back of the LASER PRINTER Connection setup to the LAPTOP COMPUTER for a CP interface 15 a Null Serial Connection 9600 baud no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit and full duplex 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the CPOI Caution Before you return operation of the MIM to the customer de energize and energize the LASER PRINTER The soft boot process might result in incorrectly terminated operations in the LASER PRINTER Use the RESET on the front of the CPOI to soft boot the CPOI without de energizing the LASER PRINTER 2 Energize or reset the LASER PRINTER See the example screen below 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 61 SERVICE MANUAL Important If the screen data does not match the data i
216. PUTER and the COM 1 Service PORT of the MIM 6 Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM 7 Log on to your LAPTOP COMPUTER 8 From the TASKBAR select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt Direct Cable Connection 9 Set Connection to Guest 10 Select Connect 11 When a connection is made cancel the window that prompts you to share files A pop up window will show that the connection 15 established 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 25 SERVICE MANUAL 12 Authenticate the connection with SecureLink a From the task bar Start gt Programs gt Kodak gt SecureLink b Enter your SecureLink Password c Enter the IP Address of the target MIM To access the MIM connected by the serial cable enter the RAS address or IP Address of this MIM e For a pass through connection to another MIM on the same local area network enter the IP address of the target MIM d Make sure the Port value is 443 e Click Connect The connection is complete when the SecureLink connection symbol closes and changes from red to green You can then use the MIM Service Application e Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM 2 26 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a SERIAL CABLE fo
217. Provide feedback for your service time 8E8820 NOV 2003 9 1 SERVICE MANUAL Training the Operator and Key Operator General The FE installing the MIM must instruct the customer s operators key operator and if the Privacy Feature is used the customer s Security Administrator Use the attached Proficiency Checklist to check that all necessary topics are reviewed with the customer Objectives At the end of the first 4 Modules the Operator should be able to do the following Describe a MIM and some of its benefits and features Identify components of the MIM Energize the MIM start and shut down the software application and de energize the MIM Operate the KEYPAD Understand when to use the main screens of the KEYPAD Select a profile Change imaging options e Store and make images Do image transfer Make or edit a profile At the end of the first 6 Modules the Key Operator should be able to do all of the Operator tasks and the following e Adjust Tone Scaling Maintain the MIM Make a back up of the SYSTEM setup e Set the SYSTEM time e Troubleshoot simple problems and ask for service if necessary Clean the KEYPAD and FILTER 9 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Training Modules The training time 15 Operator 60 minutes Key Operator 90 minutes Completing the Installation Module Duration Key Basic Operator 1 Overview Overview of the User Guide Cha
218. Publication No 8 8820 03NOV03 SERVICE MANUAL for the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 Service Codes 3433 4223 1 2 GHz Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 Service Codes 1539 4224 1 2 GHz and the Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER Service Code 3754 c Restricted Information Kodak Service amp Support O Eastman Kodak Company 2003 PLEASE NOTE The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Eastman Kodak Company prior to publication No patent license is granted by this information Eastman Kodak Company reserves the right to change this information without notice and makes no watranty express or implied with respect to this information Kodak shall not be liable for any loss or damage including consequential or special damages resulting from any use of this information even if loss or damage is caused by Kodak s negligence or other fault af This equipment includes parts and assemblies sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge Use caution to prevent damage during all service procedures Table of Contents Description Page ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Sr 1 1 How to Use this Manual X 1 1 RPV i of MIM TIER sn oe es er ee CERES T dore en 1 3 Printers Used with MIMS 1 4 D ODO oe boi a hs Gas bs See ae ee ar 1
219. R PRINTER 4 addresses Maximum no of entries in the CPCP Buffer Table 16 addresses for the 1120 LASER PRINTER 22 addresses for the 2180 LASER PRINTER e All CP interfaces except the CPOI are assigned 2 addresses The CPOI is assigned 1 address The Network Interface is assigned 6 addresses 11 62 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting e n the ownr column of the Buffer Table below Node Id 00 2180 LASER PRINTER Node Id 01 CPVI Node Id 06 CPOI Address ABCD1234 indicates an unassigned Node e The TSC might request this data to resolve node conflicts on VMEbus Addr Buftbl BT Lock Valid Anchor BT Vers 00000000 0003F980 CD000000 4B454350 KECP 32324220 22 NodeAvl Node 0 Nodel Node2 Node3 Node4 Node5 Node6 Node7 EA000000 EA000000 ABCD1234 ABCD1234 ABCD1234 ABCD1234 EA000000 ABCD1234 owinowsn int owner ack sender Addr nd us nr dr bufaddr bytes seq mbx base iv ip type mxb base iv ip type 0003F99C 01 01 06 00 0003F280 000F 0005 00002600 00 00 0001 00002000 00 00 0001 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 63 SERVICE MANUAL CPOI Ver 1 2 Boot PROM Ver 1 0 UTILITIES MENU 1 Get Current Date amp Time 3 CPCP Buffer Address 4 CPCP Buffer Tables 6 Debug Utilities Trace 8000 7 Get OI Firmware Revisions 8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests 9 Set Current Date amp Time CPOI Statu
220. RD VIDEO ADAPTER INTERNAL MODEM SERIAL INTERFACE IMAGE PORT COM 2 not used DISPLAY KEYPAD 3m COPPER Y CABLE 8100 8300 8610 PHONE T LASER IMAGER or optional 8500 8700 LASER COM PORT IMAGER STANDARD MIM 200 1GHz Extensions of 10 30 or 60 m COPPER CABLE H180 0064ECA H180_0064EC b are available gt Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 23 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 19 MIM 200 1 2 GHz PRINT SERVER COPPER COPCIL OUTPUT CABLE Ej Ethernet CABLE To UPS COM 1 COM 2 H180_3030DCA H180_3030DC gt Note CUSTOMER NETWORK DISPLAY KEYPAD COM 10 11 ale 9595959090989 qim ind QU 3 BRACKET 422 020202020909020 080090009090990 3m COPPER Y CABLE IMAGE PORT o d 8100 8300 8610 NC LASER IMAGER or 8500 8700 LASER IMAGER STANDARD COM PORT Extensions of 10 30 or 60 COPPER CABLE are available For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 3 24 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 20 MIM 200 X205 2 4 GHz PRINT SERVER COPPER COPCIL OUTPUT CABLE COM 1 SERVICE and To UPS EXT MODEM CUSTOMER NETWORK E Q lt DISPLAY KEYPAD Ethernet CABLE COM 2 not used INTERNAL MODEM or
221. RS Figure 3 2 Installing the 25 PS on a Wall 64 6 cm 25 4 in 203 2 cm 80 in COMM CABLE to E 39 3 cm 15 5 in H180_0075HCA H180_0075HC 1 Drill pilot holes and install ANCHOR FASTENERS in the wall as shown in the figure 2 Fasten the 25 PS to the wall with No 5 SCREWS 4 3 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Installing the 25 PS on a Shelf 180 0106 180 0106 2 Side Brackets amp Important The side brackets should be removed to expose 4 rubber feet 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 5 SERVICE MANUAL Installing the UPS for the 25 PS For installation in a MOBILE VAN the UPS must be fastened to the floor of the VAN with the MOUNTING KIT sent with the 25 PS Use the instructions included with the UPS and this procedure If the 25 PS will be installed in a MOBILE VAN the UPS must be fastened to the floor of the VAN between the LASER IMAGER and the front wall of the VAN A UPS HOLDDOWN KIT is available for this purpose Figure 3 3 Installing the UPS for the 25 PS on a Mobile Van Floor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 8 cm 1 5 in Strap Ay end must be Van Wall oriented as shown IMAGER ERR Lag Screw Location 4 Midpoint of H180 0071BCA LASER IMAGER H180 0071BC Remove the 2 STRAP ASSEMBLIES from the UPS HOLDDOWN KIT Mark positions for 4 holes to be drilled on the floor of the VAN The front 2 holes must be 3 8 cm 1 5 in fro
222. S bone MAXXUS YMS SPECT WRKSTN2A Toshiba Limited experience i Philips Thoravision M 8 _ LM Picker Digital Reconstructed VER693CO 3 0 Radiography DRR Siemens Camera Server Set WRKSTN2A 3 2 8 Note that TFTs 1 8 are designed for densities to output linear in density of 3 2 1 8 respectively 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 17 SERVICE MANUAL MODALITY TFT Set Contrast Density Comments Siemens Camera Server SIEWS87B 3 2 8 A slight modification to WRKSTN2A to Others match Siemens Sienet WS test requirements in Europe Siemens Polytron TOP SIEPOLY Equivalent To PMSV3K interface Ultrasound typical PMSV3K 2 4 2 8 Ultrasound others PMSV3K 9 dependson 2 4 2 8 Acuson radiologist PMSVIK 9 24 Toshiba Ultrasound TFT Set Descriptions The following are the TFT set choices available for use with 969 8500 8700 8100 and 8200 LASER IMAGER and 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER applications AIRIS2A Designed to meet Hitachi requirements for a TFT set which when used for printing on Kodak DryView films can perceptually match films printed on a 969 HQ wet LASER IMAGER when TFT Set 693 0 with Contrast 6 and Dmax 3 0 is used in the HQ To accomplish this the AIRIS2A TFT Set is designed for overall similarity to the 693 0 TFT Set but provides slightly lower measured densities in the darker part of the density range Specifically in the AIRIS2A Set the Contrast 8 T
223. Section 7 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Introduction This section provides instructions for setting up the following devices to function as MODALITY SERVERS Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 MIM 100 Before doing the procedures in this section check that The LAPTOP COMPUTER has the current MIM Service Application software See Section 2 The system hardware and CABLES have been installed See Section 3 The software for the MIM 15 correct If this installation is an upgrade the MIM must have The correct application software for the MIM See Section 4 The necessary software licenses See Section 4 The following pages include instructions for Checking Service Tracking Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the Network Setting Up the Input for a DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for Autofilming Setting Up a Network Print Destination Setting Up a Network Store Destination Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS RIS Gateway Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the BAR CODE READER Option Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store Option O LJ L3 L1 L3 L3 L3 CI L3 O 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 1 SERVICE MANUAL Checking Service Tracking 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM gt Note You will need the IP Address of the MIM to connect For anew MIM locate the IP
224. TER is an 8500 8700 LASER IMAGER STANDARD you can connect the Y CABLE to either image PORT and to either COM PORT Figure 3 35 COPPER OUTPUT CABLES 37 PIN CONNECTOR 50 PIN CONNECTOR MZ Digital Image PORT Image Control RS422 COM 5 PORT COPCIL COPPER IMAGE and BOARD COM PORTS TORBEE M 9 PIN CONNECTOR 74 0500 5864 8 LASER IMAGER with 9410 62L 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 41 SERVICE MANUAL Network Isolation for MIM 200 667 MHz 1 MHz 1 2 GHz 2 4 MHz European DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD ISOLATION CABLE ETHERNET CABLE H180_0104GCA H180_0104GC Primary Ethernet Isolation Connections 1 Connect the ISOLATION CABLE ASSY to the NETWORK OUTPUT and to INPUT 1 J1 on the DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD 2 Connect the ETHERNET CABLE to the OUTPUT 1 J2 on the DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD and to the CUSTOMER NETWORK Secondary Ethernet Isolation Connections To isolate the connection for the direct connect network connection using a CROSSOVER NETWORK CABLE to a LASER IMAGER 1 Connect the second ISOLATION CABLE ASSY to the NETWORK OUTPUT PORT and to INPUT PORT 2 J3 on the DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD 2 Connect the CROSSOVER ETHERNET CABLE to OUTPUT 2 J4 on the DUAL NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD and to the INPUT NETWORK PORT of the LASER IMAGER Patient Environment Connection The MIM 200 can be installed within the patient environment in the European E
225. TFT Set 4000 3500 4 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 ERN ITUR EE Ss gt lt PS a FEE 20 40 Input ce ce 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 31 SERVICE MANUAL VER693C0 A popular general purpose TFT set of S shaped curves widely used for CT MR and certain other modalities Curve 6 of this set is designed to be linear in perceived brightness Contrast settings below 6 give increased contrast slope near the endpoints and decreased mid tone near 50 of digital input contrast Contrast settings above 6 give decreased contrast near the endpoints and increased mid tone contrast The following plots of this TFT Set show that all 15 of the tables have essentially the same mid tone brightness with varying degrees of an S shape contribution which gives the strongest end points contrast slope to Table and the strongest mid tone contrast slope to Table 15 4000 3500 44 3000 4 p pes 2500 2000 A 1500 1000 AF t 300 Tx bene HEC Em a o EES ES mo Eee Em ees 0
226. TOP COMPUTER Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT Continue with Installing TCP IP Advance to Installing TCP IP Installing TCP IP Windows NT Windows 98 on Page 2 9 Windows 2000 on Page 2 15 on Page 2 17 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 Installing TCP IP Windows 98 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 On the LAPTOP COMPUTER select Start gt Control Panel Open Network Check the network components installed list in the Configuration window If TCP IP is installed check that Client for Microsoft Networks is selected in the Primary Network Logon window Advance to the procedure Configuring Direct Cable Connection for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 on Page 2 9 If TCP IP is not installed advance to Step 4 Click Add At the Select Network Component Type window select Protocol Click Add At the Select Network Protocol window select Manufacturer Microsoft Network Protocol TCP IP Click OK At the Select Device window click OK At the restart prompt click Yes Continue with the next procedure Configuring Direct Cable Connection for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Right click My Computer Select Properties Select Device Man
227. TY SERVERS Autofilming CABLES for Digital Mode RS 232 Converted to RS 422 Serial Control Keypad Keypad Cable RS 485 Adapter Cable Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 for the MIM 200 only Imaging lt Device 2 MEI RS 485 Data Cable DB37 mE Digital Input Pkg RS 232 Serial Serial Control Cable Control Cable RS 422 DB15 Pd Tm MIM 100 or MIM 200 Com Port Adapter Cable RS 232 RS 422 for the MIM 200 only 180 0011 Conversion Kit 180 0011 Important The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200 Table 3 11 CABLES for Digital Autofilming RS 232 Converted RS 422 Catalog CABLE Description Length Number Notes RS 485 DATA CABLE DB37 10 m 32 8 ft 197 2330 Both ends are male F F gender changer included 45 147 6 ft 877 7021 The CONNECTORS not installed Both ends are male F F gender changer included RS 485 ADAPTER CABLE for the 1 m 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 MIM 200 RS 232 RS 422 Conversion Kit 121 2018 DB25 to DBI5 RS 232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE 1 8 m 6 ft Included with Conversion Kit SERIAL CONTROL CABLE 10 m 32 8 ft 8192742 Male end connects to the MIM Female end RS 422 DB15 45 m 147 6 ft 860 3599 connects to MODALITY KEYPAD CABLE 3 m 9 8 ft Included with the KEYPAD KEYPAD Extension CABLE Extends
228. This set provides a wider choice of brightnesses than curves 1 6 ofthe 1 1095 or U1 109B ULUT Set This set is widely used in applications including Ultrasound nuclear medicine and others where an S shaped response curve is not desired yat LS enc at DIL eer 24 oe z EL E E 1 act d z Vx E 12 GL E e E 214 E SI 27 E E we z we Ir E 600 pu rn 400 EE Ss we TT 200 2222 5 90 95 100 ETT For these curves overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 12 The brighter curves in this set are often preferred by radiologists who are working with modalities such as ultrasound or nuclear medicine Group 2 U693C0 Consists of S shaped variations about a linear in perceived brightness response For this ULUT set all curves intersect at the 50 point of maximum input meaning that all contrast settings will give the same mid tone brightness As the contrast setting 1s increased from 1 to 12 the mid tone contrast 1 e the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale 15 increased while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased This ULUT set is very suitable for CT MR and C Arm applications and is also sometimes used for nuclear medicine 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 41 SERVICE MANUAL Perceived Brightness 90 95 100 50 Digital Input X Group 3 U713C0
229. Tracking Information c x SiterHozpital Hame Mpls Mercy Hosp Product Inftarmatian Number 143 Serial Number 456 Model MIM25 Service Lade Power On Hours Service Phone Number NT Product ID 51873 335 as87844 09298 MIM Application Version 607 Keypad Interfaces Keupad Fw Version 01 5 Service Senal Board Firmware Driver Code Number Rew ID Version Version Deliver Interfaces COPCIL HS Interface 3465 29 905 00 Tm 5 00 gt Note The screen displayed on your system might be slightly different from this screen 4 Check that the information in the Service Tracking Information window is correct 5 Did you change information Yes Click OK No Click Cancel 6 Go to the next procedure to set up the Network Address 6 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 6 1 Input Parameters Service Tracking Information Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Input Parameter Description Range manufacturing This should match the number on the tag on the side of the MIM Site Hospital Name Where the MIM is located This appears as an annotation 1 14 alphanumeric characters if enabled within the SCU Connection Database K Number The K Number assigned to this product by 1 11 alphanumeric characters Serial Number The Serial Number assigned to this product by manufacturing This number should match the n
230. Unknown command received 0xb8 11 29 01 13 36 36 050 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 00 205 7 DICOM CK MainDisplayScreen cpp 88 CK MainDisplayScreen OnMenuSelect called 11 29 01 13 37 00 245 6 DICOM CK MenuScreen cpp 52 CKMenuScreen constructor called 11 29 01 13 37 00 285 6 DICOM CKMenuScreen cpp 1037 CKSMainMenu constructor called 11 29 01 13 37 03 129 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 03 169 6 DICOM CKScreen cpp 374 CKScreen OnDownButtonPressed called 11 29 01 13 37 03 340 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 1504 CK received the command Oxffffffcl from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 04 832 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x39 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 04 872 6 DICOM CKScreen cpp 327 CKScreen OnUpButtonPressed called 11 29 01 13 37 05 042 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 1504 CK received the command Oxffffffb9 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 06 364 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 06 404 6 DICOM CKScreen cpp 374 CKScreen OnDownButtonPressed called 11 29 01 13 37 06 574 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 1504 CK received the command Oxffffffcl from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 07 175 6 DICOM Con
231. VIDEO PHONE optional VGA PORT CUSTOMER INPUT 2 DIGITAL or VIDEO NETWORK En BLANK H180_0114ECA H180_0114EC b gt Note For information on CABLES to connect the optional EXTERNAL MODEM see Installing an EXTERNALMODEM on Page 3 38 3 26 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 22 MODALITY SERVERS KEYPAD CABLES for Video Mode Imaging Device Video Cable 75 ohm Coax Video Adapter Cable 180 0007 for the MIM 200 H180_0007BC Important The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200 Table 3 5 CABLES for Video Mode with KEYPAD Keypad Keypad Cable Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only Video Input Pkg MIM 100 or MIM 200 Catalog CABLE Description Length Number Notes VIDEO CABLE 75 ohm Coax 10 m 32 8 ft 8397747 45 150 ft 160 9791 The CONNECTORS not installed VIDEO ADAPTER CABLE for the 20 3 cm 8 in Included with MIM 200 only MIM 200 RGB VIDEO CABLE Used in place of 8 m 26 ft VIDEO CABLE and VIDEO 20 m 65 ft en d 2 m 6 6 ft Used with MIM 100 only installations Not shown in figure KEYPAD CABLE 3 m 9 8 ft Included with the KEYPAD KEYPAD Extension CABLE Extends 12 m 39 4 ft 8815144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels One end the KEYPAD CABLE toa length of 42 m 137 8 ft 848 3539 15 labeled Keyp
232. a ijj H180_0097HCA H180_0097HC 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 19 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 18 Ethernet ADAPTERS and CROSSOVER CABLES sep ETHERNET J70 S BASE T CO LJ 7 m 23 4 180 0032BCA 5 6 H180 0032BC 6C6068 CABLE TP crossover 2ft 1 5 eoor CONVERTER tF MIM 100 and MIM 200 1 2 GHz Field Replaceable Parts The MIM 100 and MIM 200 1 2 GHz enclosures with software V_6 1 and higher include some field replaceable parts The following table gives the part numbers for the items and Figure 12 19 Figure 12 20 show their location Table 11 1 Field Replaceable Parts MIM 100 and MIM 200 1 2 GHz Part Number Item 7E9757 POWER SUPPLY 100 7E9764 POWER SUPPLY 200 7E9759 MOTHERBOARD 7E9758 CPU 7E9763 CPU FAN 7E9761 RAM 7E9756 CD ROM DRIVE 7E9781 HARD DISK DRIVE 7E9760 FLOPPY DRIVE 7E9783 EXHAUST FAN MIM 200 12 20 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Part Number Item 7E9782 EXHAUST FAN MIM 100 1F8688 POWER SWITCH 7E9784 RUBBER FEET not shown Figure 12 19 Location of Field Serviceable Parts MIM 100 1 2 GHz POWER SWITCH HARD DISK DRIVE EXHAUST FAN MIM 100 1 2 H180_3034DCA H180_3034DC 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 21 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 20 Location of Field Serviceable Parts MIM 200 1 2 GHz 12 22 POWER SWITCH POWER SUPPLY HARD DISK DRIVE
233. ace cpp 333 SCU Assoc 10247 Down 8200 MIMPrintService cpp 1376 SCU Assoc 10247 8200 Received status for 8200 gt TonescaleResolver cpp 163 TonescaleResolve PLUT DicomTonescaleResolver MIMPrintService cpp 276 MIMPrintService destructing for 8200 TonescaleResolver cpp 486 TonescaleResolve PLUT TonescaleResolver Destructed TonescaleResolver cpp 486 TonescaleResolve PLUT TonescaleResolver Destructed m rm rm TonescaleResolver cpp 163 TonescaleResolve PLUT DicomTonescaleResolver MIMPrintService cpp 276 MIMPrintService destructing for 8200 TonescaleResolver cpp 473 TonescaleResolve PLUT TonescaleResolver Constructed TonescaleResolver cpp 148 TonescaleResolve PLUT DicomTonescaleResolver MIMPrintService cpp 208 MIMPrintService constructing for 8200 MIMDicomlnterface cpp 130 SCU Assoc 10248 Job Dest 8200 NetworkServicesFactory cpp 322 Pinging 100 100 100 40 with 12 bytes of data NetworkServicesFactory cpp 350 Reply 1 from 100 100 100 40 bytes 12 time 0 ms MIMDicomInterface cpp 98 SCU Starts connection to 8200 AE NER ANY IP 100 100 100 40 Port 1025 MyAE MIMBLACK 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 5 3058 00036611 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 5 3058 23693571 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 4 3056 23694083 11 30 01 16 19 14 516 4 3049 23693827 Constructed 11 30 01 16 19 14 526 5 3058 00036611 ImplicitVRLittleEndian was not accepted
234. ach demographic field Specifies the number of characters to remove from the front of the received data 0 to N Suffix Size A suffix filter size for each demographic field Specifies the number of characters to remove from the end of the received data N Discriminator Discriminators are characters that you can associate with each piece of patient information patient name patient ID etc to tell the BAR CODE READER which type of information you have scanned To use discriminators you must have a symbol s or a special character as part of the patient information You configure the MIM to read and understand the symbol s or special characters when scanned with the BAR CODE READER For example if you associate the character with patient names the customer can scan the BAR CODE LABEL with the patient name and the name automatically populates the Patient Name field Using discriminators eliminates the need for the customer to highlight the appropriate field before they scan the LABEL 1 or more characters from the ASCII character set Leading Zero Filter Patient ID Accession Number A leading zero filter switch from Patient ID and Accession Number Specifies whether or not to remove leading zeros from the data scanned On off Automatic Search Enable Automatic Search A switch for automatic search on the primary demographic field Enables the automatic search of the local patient list w
235. ad and the other end is labeled either 15 m 49 2 ft or 45 m 147 6 ft Rear Panel KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM 1 m 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 Odd numbered COMM PORT ADAPTER CABLE PORT CONNECTORS are for KEYPADS Even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections Table 3 6 Color Key for CONNECTORS in Figures 3 16 and 3 17 Symbol Label Notes None Video B Blue KEYPAD CABLES are blue G Green Autofilming CABLES are green R Red The RS 232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE supplied by Kodak has red labels Y Yellow W White The end of the RS 485 DATA CABLE that connects directly to the MIM has a white label 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 27 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 23 MODALITY SERVERS Autofilming CABLES for Video Mode Keypad Cable Video Adapter Cable Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 for the MIM 200 only Imaging x Device f MM 9 4 o 6 Video Input Pkg RS 232 Serial Serial Control Cable Control Cable RS 422 DB15 100 200 Com Port Adapter Cable RS 232 RS 422 for the MIM 200 only Conversion Kit H180 0008BCA H180 0008BC This view shows RS 232 converted to RS 422 Important The CABLES in both figures are for each installed channel of a MIM 200 A MIM 200 can have 2 input devices Keypad Cable Video Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 Co
236. ager gt Modem gt Serial Cable on COMI Select Properties for COM1 Select Modem Set maximum speed to 115200 and select OK Select Device Manager gt Ports gt COM1 Select Properties for COM1 Select Port Settings Set Bits second to 115200 Set Flow Control to Select OK twice to escape Shut down the LAPTOP COMPUTER Note You must select a full Shut down not Restart 14 Continue with the next procedure 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 9 SERVICE MANUAL Installing Dial Up Networking Windows 98 gt Note TCP IP must be installed in Dial Up Networking for communication between the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM 1 At the TASKBAR select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communications 2 Check the Communications folder for Windows 98 e If Dial Up Networking is not installed advance to Step 3 e f Dial Up Networking is installed advance to Installing Serial Cable to NT and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT Windows 98 on Page 2 11 3 If Control Panel is not open select Start gt Control Panel 4 Select Add Remove Programs 5 Select Windows Setup gt Communications 6 Check that Communications has a checkmark next to it 7 Click Details Important In the next step the field for Dial Up Networking must be checked 8 Check that the field for the Dial Up Networking is se
237. al Parameter Description Range Image Lines Per Frame Number of vertical image lines per frame in the active video 1 9999 Total Lines Per Frame Number of vertical lines including vertical synchronization and equalization 1 9999 periods Vertical Back Porch H Number of vertical lines per field that occur after the vertical sync pulse 1 999 and before the active video begins Vsync Width H Width of the vertical synchronization pulse measured in Hsync pulses H 1 99 Serrations For VIDEO 150 only Number of serration pulses that occur during the 0 99 vertical synchronization pulse period This number typically is 1 or 2 times the Vsync Width and is set by the Double Frequency Eq Serration option The software calculates the value Pre equalization Width H Width of the pre equalization period measured in Hsync pulses H 0 99 Pre Eq Width Pulses For VIDEO 150 only Number of serration pulses that occur during the pre 0 99 equalization pulse period This number typically is 1 or 2 times the Pre Equalization Width and is set by the Double Frequency Eq Serration option The software calculates the value Post equalization Width H Width of the post equalization period measured in Hsync pulses H 0 99 Post Eq Width Pulses For VIDEO 150 only Number of serration pulses that occur during the post 0 99 equalization pulse period This number typically is 1 or 2 times the Post Equalization Width and is set by the Double Fr
238. ame used to configure MIM 200 for the network SCU TFT Set Ver693c0 w87 SCU Contrast 1 SCU Smoothing 5 PRINTER AE Title DV_ 8200 as agreed upon by user of MODALITY PRINTER TCP IP Port 1025 LOCAL PANEL Language Code English Current Contrast 1 Current Density 2 600 Image Quality Site ID Get information from the user This is data that will appear on each sheet of film Modality Name of MODALITY Match Borders Option Enabled NOV 2003 8E8820 Kodak DryView 8300 8600 or 8610 LASER IMAGER To set up the DIGITAL INPUT MODULE that connects to the MIM enter the values for the following parameters at the LOCAL PANEL of the 8300 8600 8610 LASER IMAGER The parameter values in bold apply to operation in a MIM system Setting up a PRINTER Module ID Rename the input module per customer wishes Parameter 8300 Value 8600 and 8610 Value Operator Menu Density 16 16 Contrast 6 3 Sharp Smooth AUTO 0 1 Film Layout 1 1 Portrait 1 1 Portrait Installation Menu 1 Aspect Ratio 1 0 1 0 3 Serial Control Interface 1 Baud Rate 1200 1200 2 Number of Data Bits 8 8 3 Number of Stop Bits 1 1 4 Parity Even Even 5 Delimiter Comma Comma 6 Ignore Late Ack Nack On On 7 Protocol 3M or Keypad 3M 952 3M 952 6 Mark Install Date Date PRINTER is installed Date PRINTER is installed 7 Memory Management 16 127 8 Calibration Enable
239. andSeparation calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 GetMinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 2670 GetMinBandSeparation calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 GetMinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 2670 GetMinBandSeparation calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI 11 29 01 13 25 19 2373 Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 11 29 01 13 25 19 267 4 Destination cpp 2956 GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation 11 29 01 13 25 19 297 3 Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 11 29 01 13 25 19 3274 Destination cpp 2728 GetMinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 2670 numBandsPerPage 1 11 29 01 13 25 19 357 4 minimum setting 11 29 01 13 25 19 3873 Destination cpp 2745 between bands is 2 pixels 11 29 01 13 25 19 4174 Destination cpp 2956 11 29 01 13 25 19 458 3 Destination cpp 2962 between images is 2 pixels 11 29 01 13 25 19 558 4 Destination cpp 2728 Get
240. ant You must select a media base for each medium selected See Format Parameters on Page 6 27 7 Ifthe destination printer is a Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER click Next The Output Parameters window will display for some Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS 6 14 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER 8 Ifthe Output Parameters window displays check that the Output Parameters agree with the set up of the LASER IMAGER amp Important The application software automatically selects defaults for the destination parameters To select values other than the defaults you must use the Supported Items windows for the other groups of parameters 9 Click Finish to select the defaults for these destination parameters Supported Items Interpolation Format Types Page Formatting Image Processing M952 Usage gt Note When Finish is clicked the Installed Destinations window will display and the MIM will process the parameter information 10 When processing is completed click Close 11 Advance to Completing Configuration of the Destinations 8 8820 NOV 2003 6 15 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the Destination Dual PRINTER Setups This procedure applies to applications that include an 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER or 969 HQ LASER IMAGER that controls 2 destinations amp Important See the Tables and this procedure for detailed information on the Destination Parameters
241. ary 6 After completing the adjustment click OK in the Gain and Offset Parameters window 7 Click Set Parameters in the Video Board Setup window 8 To see the image and check the changes you have made click Acquire in the Video Board Setup window 9 If necessary repeat the adjustment procedure 10 When you are satisfied with the test image click OK in the Video Board Setup window 11 After completing video adjustment advance to Primary Control Type Procedure Autofilming Setting Up the MIM for Autofilming in next procedure KEYPAD Do in turn the procedures that apply to this site e Setting Up a Network Print Destination e Setting Up a Network Store Destination 7 38 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Notes on Adjusting Image Quality Optimum image quality can be achieved from the MIM by adjusting the video signal and parameters In a video environment the process begins with a good video signal This signal must then be adjusted the MIM Check that you have done the following Use the correct parameters to acquire the video signal for digitization Check that the image is centered correctly both vertically and horizontally e Set the gain and offset correctly to obtain the correct black and white values See Defining Black and White Values Using the Advanced Leveling Feature The pixel clock must be correctly timed with th
242. ation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2739 GetMinBandSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Destination cpp 2956 GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Destination cpp 2739 GetMinBandSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 1 Destination cpp 2956 GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Destination cpp 2739 GetMinBandSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Destination cpp 2956 GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Destination cpp 2739 GetMinBandSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 IMIMUIDGeneration cpp 128 Invalid K Number recorded 99 DeliveryJob cpp 3984 DeliveryJob Created 71 PhotonPrinter cpp 497 Pecan PrintingEvent is signaled PhotonPrinter cpp 512 Pecan deliveryJobReadySemaphore 15 signaled Ding is removing job 0 from the to be del
243. ays records in the Patient List for a configurable time 7 68 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER HIS RIS Gateway Configuration IP Address Title BROKER Port Humber 3320 Override Study Description with APD Default ost Sayed Reset Cancel 14 At HIS RIS Gateway Configuration enter the correct values Parameter Description Mitra GATEWAY IP address Site specific Site specific AE Title The Application Entity AE Title of the HIS RIS Gateway BROKER Port Number The DICOM communication port 3320 Override Study Description Determines whether the MIM will query the HIS RIS On off with RPD BROKER by the study description default or the requested procedure description The MIM will display the requested procedure description RPD in the study description field when this option is selected Scheduled Procedure Start Disabling causes the MIM not to request the scheduled On Off Time procedure start time on a query Support Study Description Disabling causes the MIM not to query the Broker for Study On Off Description 15 Press Set 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 69 SERVICE MANUAL Adding the Station Name at the KEYPAD 1 Using the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD press a Main Menu b Service c More Options d HIS RIS Configuration e Add Station Name 2 Using either the KEYPAD or the MINI KEYBOARD type the name of the station an
244. be just right That is it is preferable to any other TFT in any other TFT set TFT A table curve used in closed loop Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS that relates each digital input value to a corresponding target value of perceived brightness TFT Set A set of 15 TFTs that represent 15 different curve shapes each of which 15 associated with a corresponding user selectable contrast selection 1 15 Contrast A user selectable setting from 1 through 15 on the LASER IMAGER that initiates the associated TFT for the current print Density A user selectable setting that determines the maximum density Dmax used in printing ULUT The tables or curves that are used in Kodak DryView 8300 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGERS Selecting TFT Sets When selecting a TFT for a given MODALITY first try the contrast and density settings for the TFT set suggested in the following table The selections shown there are recommended for the majority of users Other selections are useful in certain situations depending on radiologist preference etc When determining with the customer which TFT set to select it is important to print using all of the available TFTs by using all 15 contrast settings or doing one contrast test film It is equally important to note the specific contrast setting 1 e the specific TFT and the TFT set that best satisfies the customer Similar or identical individual TFTs may occur in multiple TFT sets For example in 693 0 the
245. ber Optic Interface for MIM 200 amp Important This conversion is only supported on the MIM 200 on the 2 4 GHz and 1 GHz enclosures 1 From the MIM Service Application window select Configure Destination The Installed Destination Window displays 2 From the Installed Destination window highlight the KELP 2180 or KELP 1120 destination and select Delete gt Note The 2180 or 1120 must be removed as a destination from any referenced profiles before it can be deleted 3 Exit the MIM Service Application 4 De energize the MIM A Warning Dangerous Voltage 5 Disconnect the main power for the MIM 6 Remove the side COVER for the MIM 7 Disconnect the cable to the OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD 8 Remove the existing OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD 9 Install the FOPCIL BOARD into a Slot 7 in the MIM 200 1 GHz b Slot 7 in the MIM 200 2 4 GHz 10 Connect FIBER OPTIC CABLES as indicated in Figure 3 34 on Page 3 40 11 Replace the COVER for the MIM 12 Energize the MIM 13 Atthe MIM Service Application window select Configure Destination The Installed Destination window displays 14 Configure the MIM for the new LASER PRINTER by completing the following procedures Section 5 Setting up a Printer Section 6 Configuring a Print Server Setting up the Destination Section 8 Obtaining Optimum Images Section 9 Completing the Installation g
246. between panes in either direction 8 pcAnywhere File Manager x File Edit View Tools Help OR DALYEDLAG1 My Computer Mv Computer Computer an Computer an Hel Ha xH H Of Ba KS g _ Rem Ctr 413 Floppy amp Local Disk 2 413 Floppy 8 Local Disk E LOCALDISE Local Disk 11 2 E E Local Disk Local Disk 400 GB 2 0305060856 0 CD ROM Disc d 2l Transfer gt Local Disk D Local Disk 12 0 GB OAKHI NTPubswo Network Connection 54b E Local Disk E Local Disk 2 00 GB E Local Disk F Local Disk 1 00 GE Transfer e Compact Disc G CD ROM Disc AutaTransFer 8 8820 NOV 2003 11 51 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Locate the file to be transferred 5 Locate the destination folder in the other pane Create one if necessary 6 Click the Transfer icon to copy the file to the destination 11 52 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Using Windows TASK MANAGER from pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE Task Manager is a tool within Windows 2000 that allows the user to determine what tasks are running on the computer and what tasks are not responding It also can display CPU and memory usage either by application or for the whole system 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM 2 Start the pcAnywhere application and connect with the MIM The MIM desktop will display 3 Display the Task Manager Appli
247. c R G B External Composite Sync Polarity VIDEO 60 AND 150LC only Polarity of the Sync Pulse Negative Positive Sync Input source VIDEO 150 only Selection of Sync Input Source Composite Video External Composite Csync or separate External Hsync and External Vsync Composite Video default External Csync External H amp V Sync Composite Sync Channel VIDEO 150 only Input channel from which to derive the composite sync Normally the same channel as the video signal which will be selected automatically when you select Set 1 2 3 4 default 1 External Sync Channel VIDEO 150 only Input channel from which to derive the external Csync Hsync or Hsync Vsync Normally the same channel as the video signal which will be selected automatically when you select Set 1 2 3 4 default 1 Pos Ext H or C Sync VIDEO 150 only Set for positive going External Csync or External Hsync signals Yes No 7 24 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Parameter Description Range Pos Ext V Sync VIDEO 150 only Set for positive going External Vsync Yes No signals External Sync Level VIDEO 150 only Setting for or Csync or Vsync slicing 0 255 default 127 level A value of 127 shifts the sync to 0 VDC A value of 0 shifts the slicing level to 3 VDC A value of 255 shifts the slicing level to 3 VDC Selecting Auto H or C Sync or Auto V Sync automatical
248. c Capacitor Control Voltage Auto Control Voltage Fisel Clock Timing 11 Auto Pixel Clock H5wnc toClock Delay 37 Auto H5wnc to Clock Cancel 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 29 SERVICE MANUAL Table 7 12 Settings for Vsync Capacitor Setting H Line Time microseconds HSync Frequency KHz 0 0 14 29 69 100 1 14 49 32 26 3 68 99 2 32 25 55 56 18 30 99 3 55 57 64 00 and higher 0 17 99 7 30 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Using Auto Setup to Set up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD amp Important The MIM must be energized for at least 5 minutes before doing Auto Setup The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD requires about 5 minutes to stabilize Check that the operator can send a test pattern from the MODALITY e g a SMPTE or Grayscale pattern If a test pattern is not available choose the best clinical image with the following Grayscale with brightest and darkest values 0 to 255 A D Counts White text on black background or black text on white background Sharp transitions and vertical lines 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Input gt Direct Connect amp Important A MODALITY must be set up before you do Step 2 Check that the MODALITY you want to configure is highlighted the Direct Connect Input Configuration window 2 At the Direct Connect Input Configuration window click Acquis
249. c EE I 981 ___ a E Bn 2500 LI 2227272218 ES 2000 a ENSE HERR 55533 ES ERE 1500 1000 20 40 al Input SIEPOLY Equivalent to the PMSV3K TFT Set designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for Siemens Polytron 8700 installations 4000 1 7 SS SS ee Gl es as i i E pm Em Ep pum nn gm RE mg EE ec Seed Hund Eten ER ec n d tn cd n Hd en expenses gt e gt SCL EE etri ER Epsum ttal EGREGIE EN EDI Ss Eom Es CERERI ER DERE o 7 CE E eee 3000 a ELI e Fs rs xo Rear an IER EE Eam ESSE EE Rs anco ESSE Spa pee Es EB eR 25ng cS E L EEIEeEg Er e Pm Ree me fh be te ee I A ah
250. can 160 LASER IMAGER Laser Ethernet HOSTCOM Ethernet Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER Laser 952 COPCIL Copper Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER Laser DICOM Ethernet Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER Laser 952 COPCIL Copper Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER PLUS Laser Superset or 952 FOPCIL Fiber Optic Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER Laser or 952 COPCIL Copper STANDARD Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER Laser Superset or 952 COPCIL Copper Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER Laser Superset or 952 COPCIL Copper Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER PLUS Laser Superset or 952 FOPCIL Fiber Optic Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER Laser Superset or 952 Copper STANDARD COPCIL Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI INPUT Laser or 952 FOPCIL Fiber Optic MANAGER Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER Laser Superset or 952 FOPCIL Fiber Optic Kodak DryView 969 HQT LASER IMAGER Laser Superset or 952 Copper COPCIL NOV 2003 8E8820 Input Options MIMS use the following interfaces for input of images Video Input Digital Input Input from Network System Description A VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD is necessary A DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD which receives 8 bit Grayscale images is necessary An Ethernet 10 100baseT circuit in the MIM connects to an Ethernet lObaseT or 100baseT NETWORK The network connection is used for image input when the MIM is set up as a PRINT SERVER Images received from the network mu
251. cation Image Host System EIB Note 1 Set Pixel Width to 8 or 12 depending on LASER IMAGER capability Note 2 EIB Port setting Fiber connection always set to 0 Copper connection 8700 8500 LASER IMAGERS STANDARD only Port setting must be the same as the LASER IMAGER COM port used to connect to the MIM 1 if MIM connects to COM Port 0 of LASER IMAGER set EIB Port to 0 If MIM connects to COM port 1 of LASER IMAGER set EIB Port to 1 8E8820 NOV 2003 5 5 SERVICE MANUAL This page is intentionally blank 5 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Section 6 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Introduction This section provides instructions for setting up these MIMs to function as PRINT SERVERS Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER 25 PS The instructions set up the PRINT SERVERS to send images to these PRINTERS Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER PLUS Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER STANDARD Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER PLUS Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER STANDARD Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 969 HQT
252. cations window by either Right clicking the lower task bar and selecting Task Manager Clicking the C A D button on the pcANYWHERE upper task bar and then selecting the Task Manager button E3 Windows Task Manager File Options View Windows Applications Processes Performance Running 2 MIMA oute Hunning qu Running ay Exploring 4 4 Hunning End Task Switch To New Task Processes 3l CPU Usage 14 Usage 424584E 4 Ifthe Applications window does not appear click the Applications tab to display it gt Note The Task Manager Applications window lists all active applications If the MIM is running at least the following tasks should display Remote Network Interface system software MIMRoute the port routing application This application runs only on PRINT SERVERS 5 Click the Processes tab to display the Processes window which monitors computer and memory usage by application 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 53 SERVICE MANUAL File Optone View Help Windows NT Task Manager Idle Process 94 0 54 a 16 K System 5 0 00 11 220K 8 55 2 0 00 00 396 CSASS EXE 24 00 0 00 00 1720K WINLOGON EXE 35 00 0 00 00 928 SERVICES EXE 43 00 0 00 01 2990 K L5455 EXE 4b 00 0 00 00 2460 HDDBEABNT ESE 65 00 0 00 00 1036 K SPOOLSS EXE 2 00 0 00 00 1992 K AMHOS T S32 83 00 0 00
253. ccessing some MIM sites over the Internet If you require remote access to a site through the Kodak VPN contact the Technical Support Center TSC 2 30 NOV 2003 8E8820 Using the MIM Service Application Tools Hardware and Software Service Application Functions The MIM Service Application is the primary tool for installation and troubleshooting It provides 5 main functions which can be selected by tabs on the main screen See the following table Table 2 3 MIM Service Application Main Functions Function Selections Use To Connect Connect to MIM Links the MIM Service Application to the MIM to which your LAPTOP COMPUTER is connected Network Broadcasting Used to enable disable broadcast of MIM connection info on the network Connect Local will not work if disabled Disconnect Disconnect LAPTOP COMPUTER from MIM Exit Exit from Service Application Configure Service Tracking Information Check and if necessary correct service ID data for the MIM Network Set up the MIM to be a device on the network Input Set up inputs to MIM network digital or video Destination Set up the PRINTER storage device or network destination HIS RIS Gateway Set up the storage WORKSTATION parameters Disk Management Set high water mark normally 75 and low water mark 50 for MIM memory At 75 full MIM begins to delete ol
254. cel Description Range Density Space Density space allowed by destination Determines if the MIM can send images Yes No using density space code value 0 is white and code value 255 16 black In DICOM networks density space 15 indicated in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as monochrome 1 Luminance Space Luminance space allowed by destination Determines if the MIM can send Yes No images using luminance space code value 0 15 black and code value 255 15 white In DICOM luminance space is indicated in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as monochrome 2 Variable Border Indicates whether the destination allows the user to select a border density Yes No Density between black and clear The parameter has no meaning for store destinations Curve Shape Specifies whether the destination allows Curve Shape Tonescaling with Curve Yes No Tonescaling shape and contrast Determines if the MIM will send Curve Shape Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of PLUTs Has no meaning for store destinations Perception LUT Specifies whether the destination allows Perception LUT Tonescaling with TFT Yes No Tonescaling set and contrast setting Determines if the MIM will send Perception LUT Tonescaling parameters when the destination does not support negotiation of PLUTs Has no meaning for store destinations PLUT Service S
255. ck the Pixel Value window while you move the cursor across the image You might have to execute more than 1 acquire to evaluate the quality of the image To make a histogram do Step 2 again within the existing uncompressed image e You can right click the MOUSE to zoom on a specific area of the ROI 3 Check the properties for the test image Correct Gain and Offset Brightest white Pixel value of 253 2 counts Darkest Black Pixel Value of 2 2 counts Visible 5 and 95 grayscale values if you display the SMPTE pattern Centered horizontally and vertically Correct clock timing No visible pixel shift or line shift Straight undistorted horizontal and vertical lines Clear text Ask the operator to type more text if necessary 8 8820 NOV 2003 7 35 SERVICE MANUAL e Sharp transitions between maximum and minimum grayscale values 4 Use Table 7 14 as a troubleshooting guide after the quality check If the video gain and offset parameters are not at acceptable levels advance to VIDEO BOARD Procedure 60 and 150LC Using Advance Leveling to Define Black and White Values 150 Adjusting Gain and Offset Table 7 14 Troubleshooting Guide for the Acquired Image Malfunction Remedy Maximum grayscale counts not 253 2 counts Minimum grayscale counts not 2 2 counts In the Video Gain and Offset Parameters window Adjust the values for Coarse Gain and Coarse Of
256. conomic Community EEC if it is connected per Setup Diagram on Page 14 5 For additional information see Compliancy with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 Requirements on Page 14 4 and Non Compliancy with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 Requirements on Page 14 6 3 42 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Connecting the KEYPAD to the MODALITY A SWITCH on the MODALITY can be connected to a KEYPAD in place of a FOOTSWITCH as shown in the drawing below An optional CABLE 1s available for this connection This connection applies to MODALITY SERVERS only CABLE Catalog Number 1836253 CABLE Description Four meter IMAGE ACQUISITION CABLE The CABLE has a KEYPAD CONNECTOR on one end and a BNC coaxial PLUG on the other end It is designed to connect to a MODALITY that has SWITCH CONTACTS wired to a BNC coaxial JACK A BNC to RCA adapter is supplied with the CABLE for connecting toa MODALITY with an RCA type coaxial JACK amp Important This CABLE provides a reference voltage for isolated SWITCH CONTACTS at the MODALITY amp Important After installing this modification the MODALITY SERVER must be set up so that the MODALITY Store function can be done from the KEYPAD See Section 7 BNC CONNECTOR JACK on MODALITY FOOTSWITCH CONNECTOR CABLE Length 4 Meters BNC CONNECTOR KEYPAD PLUG on CABLE MODALITY 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 43 SERVICE MANUAL Preparing to Apply Power Setting Up the MIM Set
257. coordinates are displayed in Pixel Value by row and column 8 Enter the parameters in the Configuration Text Box Coordinates window a At Text Box Location select or Bottom b Type the values for the first text box in the Left Text Box Coordinates c Type the values for the second text box in the Right Text Box Coordinates 9 Click OK to close Configuration Text Box Coordinates 8 8820 NOV 2003 8 15 SERVICE MANUAL Transfer Function Table TFT Sets and User Lookup Tables ULUTS References This information is designed to help in the selection of the correct TFT set or ULUT during the process of image optimization MPC Maintenance Software Package TFT Help file for LASER IMAGERS KHI Documentation Database USLN331 US EKC IOL Product Info TFTSV3 4 T S Rev6 document e meta ULUTs document Definitions gt Note Do not confuse a TFT set with a TFT Image quality is significantly affected by the single specific TFT that was used in making a print Image quality is totally unaffected by the other TFTs the set The TFT set is simply a container and all of its contents may not be useful or correct for a given MODALITY or a given density setting In fact some TFT sets are quite diverse They offer a wide variety of looks within a single set of 15 TFTs Some TFTs in a given TFT set may be completely unacceptable to a customer for a specific MODALITY while one may
258. cpp 22 ss printPage started 1 ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Sto Test 3 DPatch dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Sto Test 3 DPatch ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Sto Test 3 DPatch1722 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags 11 45 SERVICE MANUAL 09 50 06 731 5 8191 000000000 09 50 07 212 5 8191 000000000 09 50 07 252 5 8191 000000000 09 50 07 282 6 8191 000000000 09 50 07 322 6 8191 000000000 09 50 07 362 6 8191 000000000 09 50 07 402 5 8191 000000000 09 50 07 442 5 8191 000000000 09 50 07 722 5 8191 000000000 09 50 07 762 5 8191 000000000 09 50 07 802 5 8191 000000000 09 50 07 843 6 8191 000000000 09 50 07 883 6 8191 000000000 09 50 07 923 6 8191 000000000 09 50 07 953 5 8191 000000000 09 50 07 993 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 033 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 073 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 113 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 153 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 193 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 223 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 263 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 303 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 343 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 383 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 413 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 453 6 8191 000000000 09 50 08 493 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 534 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 574 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 614 5 8191 000000000 09 50 08 644 6 8191 000000000
259. cting to a MIM from your LAPTOP COMPUTER with SecureLink is 1 Connect to the MIM with any of the connection methods listed in Connection Methods on Page 2 23 2 Start the SecureLink client application Start gt Programs gt Kodak gt SecureLink X Password Enter your SecureLink password 3 Enter your SecureLink Password Note You created this password when you requested your SecureLink digital certificate 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 23 SERVICE MANUAL x Connect Certificate Access Applications Kodak SecureLink Client E Secure Server IP Address of the target MIM Server IPAddress 149 99 198 124 Fort Save Server Remove Server Must be 443 Connection Session ID tko 1 0 b7 Before you connect Connector Symbol Red 4 Enter the IP Address of the target MIM Important If the Ethernet cable at the MIM is disconnected or if an IP Address conflict exists Windows 2000 disables the Ethernet port on the MIM SecureLink will then only connect using a serial cable and the RAS Pool IP Address 5 Verify that the Port value is 443 gt Note It is not necessary to enter a name in the Server field 6 Click Connect If the connection is successful The 2 parts of the connector symbol close and the color changes to green The Connect button changes to Disconnect 2 24 NOV 2003 8E8820
260. d PageBuilder cpp 1408 SetPrinterDensity 3 0 21 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3675 Row 1 Column 1 Image X Position 0 11 29 01 13 46 24 296 3 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3676 Row 1 Column 1 Image Y Position 251 11 29 01 13 46 24 326 3 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3677 Row 1 Column 1 Image Scale Factor 1 49198 11 29 01 13 46 24 356 3 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3678 Row 1 Column 1 Image Width 1116 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3679 Row 1 Column 1 Image Height 826 11 29 01 13 46 24 667 3 DICOM ImageBox cpp 2255 Accept a valid PLUT of size 256 11 29 01 13 46 24 727 3 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3675 Row 1 Column 1 Image X Position 0 11 29 01 13 46 24 757 3 FormatValidator cpp 3676 Row 1 Column 1 Image Y Position 251 11 29 01 13 46 24 787 3 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3677 Row 1 Column 1 Image Scale Factor 1 49198 11 29 01 13 46 24 807 3 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3678 Row 1 Column 1 Image Width 1116 11 29 01 13 46 24 847 3 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3679 Row 1 Column 1 Image Height 826 11 29 01 13 46 24 386 3 11 29 01 13 46 24 877 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 897 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 927 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 957 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 987 4 11 28 DryViewChainBuilder c
261. d Transparent are valid for color printing Any Blue Clear Reflective Paper Transparent Film 7 50 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 19 DICOM Parameters for Print Destinations ICOM 30 Basic Grayscale Print E mo Item Description Range Protocol Protocol used to communicate with the Destination DICOM 3 0 Service Class The service class provided by the Destination Print or Store Port Number The port number of the Destination that the MIM uses to make a socket 0 65535 connection for sending and receiving DICOM messages AE Title The Applications Entity AE Title specifies the Destination application that 1 16 alphanumeric the MIM must communicate with for successful DICOM communications characters Association Retry Specifies the number of retry attempts in establishing a DICOM association 1 999 Counter Response Message Specifies the time to wait for a response after a message is sent Meaningful 1 999 seconds only when the MIM is functions as a DICOM SCU 8 8820 NOV 2003 7 51 SERVICE MANUAL Table 7 20 Supported Items Parameters for Print Destinations Supported Items E4 Collatior err HER ETE EHE Print Quality Remote Image Deletion Common Text Tonescaling on Image Basis I Rotation Pivot Density lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel
262. d DPS Developed for the DMI market and the DICOM SPOOLER for CP Based PRINTERS application Supported connection to the 3600 DMI and 1200 DMI Added DICOM Basic Grayscale and Color Print SCP for receiving DICOM print jobs DICOM Basic Annotation Box SCP for receiving text Low Cost Color Grayscale VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD Output to CP Based PRINTERS via high speed fiber connection Introduced MIM 200 Developed for the LSI DMI and PACS Cemax ICON business applications Added Multiple direct connect inputs with or without DICOM input Ability to acquire a mix of color and monochrome images on a single page 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM MS emulation for 952 Autofilming Superset support Connection database to provide user with ability to set image processing preferences within the spooler source by source Ability to create separate image series within a study for delivery to AutoRad WORKSTATIONS DICOM Presentation PLUT support for interoperability with 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM V 4x Added the ability to operate as a DPS for the 8200 LASER IMAGER and features that can e Support standard multi up page formats used by the Kodak Directview CR 800 SYSTEM for DICOM delivery Rasterize page annotation tests using a clear sharp true size font onto a predefined location centered on the bottom of the page Use the MIM Service Application for configuration of an 8200 LASER IMAGER and a networked PRINT SERVER 8200
263. d then press Enter 3 Press Return 4 Press Polling Interval 5 Type in the interval in minutes at which the MIM will poll the Broker for Patient List updates and press Enter 6 Press Retention Period 7 Type in the length of time in hours that items will remain in the patient list before deleting and press Enter 8 Press Return 2 times 9 Press Acquisition Checking the HIS RIS Connection Important If the HIS RIS connection is not functioning an error message WORKLIST CONN TIMEOUT displays on the Study Info MIM KEYPAD screen See Troubleshooting the HIS RIS Gateway Connection 1 At the Main Menu screen on the KEYPAD press Acquisition and then Study Info 2 At the Study Info screen press Patient List 3 Check that the Hospital Administrator makes correct entries for today s date gt Note If patient information exists it appears in the Patient Info field Troubleshooting the HIS RIS Gateway Connection 1 Use the MIM Service Application to ping the IP Address of the HIS RIS GATEWAY 2 Check that the Station Name is entered correctly The Station Name is used by the MIM to query the HIS RIS GATEWAY for Patient Worklist Records 3 Check that the Hospital Administrator correctly enters the Patient Records at the HIS RIS GATEWAY for today s date Disabling the HIS RIS GATEWAY gt Note This procedure allows you to u
264. dest image files At 50 full MIM stops deleting Do not change these values without consulting TSC Save Configuration Save the current MIM configuration to FLOPPY Restore Configuration Restore the MIM to the last saved configuration Network Profiles Set up the network addresses for a mobile 25 PS SCP Services Display connected SCUs optimize image parameters Text Box Relocation Allows patient and exam information to be cut and placed back in a cropped image Logs Logging Levels Select level of detail in logs Activity History Display log of MIM activity between specified dates times Error History Display log of all errors between specified dates times Error Frequency Display list of all errors indicating numbers of each Clear Error Frequency Clear the Error Frequency Log Diagnostics System Print a test image or transfer the last stored image Digital Test DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD Video Test VIDEO 150 150LC or 60 INTERFACE BOARD Delivery Test OUTPUT BOARD FOPCIL or COPCIL Network Test connection to an address on network using Ping or Echo Admin Change Password Change password for entering MIM Service Application Update Software Update MIM software firmware Clear Job Queues All print queues and studies will be removed from the MIM Software Licenses Display list of licensed and unlicensed destinations Shutdown MIM Shut down the MIM View MODALITY Database Display list of all qualified MODALITIES View Destination Database
265. e ee EES poo gt es p p a ES E BS BS Es cnn Ed eee Es Er Ed eme es i S Ss ppvmp m ups 20 40 at 100 Input 7 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 25 SERVICE MANUAL SFH301A4 Composed of 15 non S curve curves designed specifically for the Siemens Fluorospot H system The plots on the chart below show a shape that is approximately linear in brightness with the different minimum t values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values SIECTS7 A set in which all 15 curves are very close to a single Siemens defined curve for CT The following plots of this TFT Set show a shape which 15 close to a linear in brightness shape and quite similar to the slightly S shaped middle TFTs of the 693 0 TFT Set But unlike the VER693CO Set this TFT Set is not designed to provide a significant range of variability to the user but rather a small range of variability to allow a single predefined table to be matched as closely as possible 8 26 4000 3500 S000 2500 2000 To e sd 4 oe
266. e NITRA ANSERVER 3 From the Device Manager window click Add 8E8820 NOV 2003 13 1 SERVICE MANUAL Device Manager Clinique Untversitaire St Luc DHCP DMS Dynamic Heathcare GAP 4 From the list of Device Types select PACS Device Manager 5 From the Vendors list select Mitra 6 From the Products list select Standard PACS Device 7 Click X to close the window 13 2 standard FACS BI iW NOV 2003 8E8820 Additional Information Device Manager 8 Enter the AE Title and Host Name for the MIM MWLPMC 9 Click Save middle button in upper right corner STANDARD DEVICE MIM Details 10 Check that the AE Title and Host name are correct 11 Enter the PORT Number for which the MIM MWLPMC is set up This is normally 5405 for MIM and 5401 for MWLPMC 12 Click the middle button Events 8E8820 NOV 2003 13 3 SERVICE MANUAL Event lypes INTERPRETATION_APPROVED INTERPRETATION CRESTED INTERPRETATION DELETED INTERPRETATION RECORDED INTERPRETATION TRANSCRIBED INTERPRETATION UPDATED MOVE STUDY HESULTS CREATED RESULTS DELETED RESULTS UPDATED STUDY COMPLETED SIUDYREAD PATIENT ADMITTED FATIENT ARRIVED PAIIENI CREATED PATIENT DELETED PATIENT DISCHARGED PATIEMT TRANSFERREI PATIENT UPDATED CREATED DELETED STUDY SCHEDULED STUDY UPDATED IVISIT CREATED 13 D
267. e enter the correct information See Table 7 15 Table 7 16 4 If you did not change information click Cancel 5 If you changed information click Set Important After changing the setup information you must click Set or the changes will be lost 6 After setting up for Autofilming advance to Setting Up a Network Print Destination 7 40 NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 7 15 Default Values for Autofilming Link Parameters Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Parameter Autofilming Link Hitachi KCL M952 P831 Siemens or 3M SPCI FSPOT DASM Toshiba Port ID Baud Rate 4800 9600 2400 4800 9600 Driver Type RS422 R2332 RS232 RS232 RS422 Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 2 1 Parity even none odd even even ACK Wait Timer Ack Required Memory Full Response Host Assume 4800 Lines Report Alarms Host Assume 300 DPI Variable Correction Yes Store Key Active active active active active active Receive Message Timer P Start Timer 2 EOT Wait Timer Switch Mode KEYPAD Switch Handling Not Allowed Automatic Film Type Selection DTR Connect Default Horiz Frames Default Vertical Frames Autoprint On On AutoFormat On On Interpolation Sharp Replication Re
268. e 14 x 17 in Del Fmt Delete all defined print formats Del Y Formats deleted Del Def Img Delete images in memory Del Y Images deleted Set Density xxx Set Maximum density value Set Y Density value set FMT ID Assign an ID to page format Fmt ID assigned Box ID Define an image box Box Image box defined Res Imgs Reserve memory for images Res Y Memory reserved STO Img Store an image in memory Sto Y Image stored Pr FMT Print a job Pri Job printed Del Def Img Delete images in memory Del Y Images deleted Del FMT Delete all defined formats Del Y Formats deleted Sta Job Ask job status Wait or Done Not finished or finished 09 49 51 028 5 8191 000000000 09 49 51 068 5 8191 000000000 09 49 51 108 5 8191 000000000 8E8820 NOV 2003 LaserImager cpp 1358 sheetsLeft 103 LaserImager cpp 1361 printerStatus Normal LaserImager cpp 1364 fpStatus Ready 11 41 SERVICE MANUAL 09 49 51 139 5 8191 000000000 09 49 51 179 5 8191 000000000 09 49 51 219 6 8191 000000000 11 re m rm rm 09 49 51 249 6 8191 000000000 09 49 51 289 6 8191 000000000 09 49 56 146 W 8191 000000000 09 49 56 196 6 8191 000695382 09 49 56 256 6 8191 000695382 09 49 56 286 6 8191 000695382 09 49 56 346 6 8191 000695382 09 49 56 386 6 8191 000695382 09 49 56 416 6 8191 000695382 09 49 56 456 6 8191 000695382 09 49 56
269. e LAPTOP COMPUTER 1 At the Direct Connect Input Configuration window select Acquisition Modify gt Note If you want to see the Digital Interface Parameters you can select Acquisition e View 2 When the MIM prompts Are you sure click OK E igital Interface Parameters 3 For Qualified MODALITIES the parameters are automatically set For Unqualified MODALITIES all parameters in the window must be set to the correct values See Table 7 4 for parameter descriptions 8 8820 NOV 2003 7 9 SERVICE MANUAL Table 7 4 Fields and Buttons for the Digital Interface Parameters Parameter Description Range Pixels per Line The default number of pixels per line that the MIM expects the Imaging Device to send 1 4361 This number will be used to determine format validation Lines per Image default number of lines per image that the MIM expects the Imaging Device to 1 5348 send This number will be used to determine format validation Parity Error detection used by adding an even or odd number of 1 s to the binary word None Odd or Even Line Timer The number of seconds that the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD waits to receive a 1 240 complete size or data packet from the Imaging Device Sync Mode If Auto Sync is selected the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD will continue to No Sync acquire the image when a failure occurs during image acquisition Auto Sync I
270. e Select if the destination allows grayscale images Yes No Minify Formerly Decimation Indicates that the destination can accept images Yes No with dimensions larger than the dimensions of the image cell where the image will be printed Select if the destination allows Minify Maximum Image DMAX Enter the maximum image DMAX value that is allowed by the 0 0 3 8 destination 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 57 SERVICE MANUAL Table 7 25 SCU Parameters for Print Destinations Curve Shape Tonescaling Perception LUT Tonescaling Supports Density Space f LUT Luminance Space OiT tudi content Extended Print Attributes Protecal PLUT Service lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Description Range Density Space Density space allowed by the destination Determines if the MIM can send Yes No images using density space code value 0 represents white and code value 255 represents black In DICOM density space 15 represented in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as monochrome 1 Luminance Space Luminance space allowed by the destination Determines if the MIM can send Yes No images using luminance space code value 0 represents black and code value 255 represents white In DICOM luminance space is represented in the photometric interpretation attribute of the Image SOP as
271. e application and connect to the MIM The MIM desktop will display 3 From the MIM taskbar select Start gt Programs gt Administrative Tools Common gt Event Viewer Event Viewer System Log on XMIBHSHALL Log View Options Help Note NT Event Viewer displays a table showing system process events e A red flag indicates a possible error condition A yellow flag is a warning of a possible problem A blue flag indicates the information relates to a normal operation 4 Double click on any line to display information relating to that line For example 8E8820 NOV 2003 Time 10 02 42 AM 10 02 42 10 02 20 10 02 13 10 01 57 10 01 57 10 01 57 10 01 57 10 01 57 10 01 54 10 01 54 10 01 54 10 01 54 10 01 53 10 01 53 10 01 53 10 01 52 10 01 52 10 01 53 10 00 58 Source LIPS serial aerial Serial serial serial fopcil fopcil copcll Category None Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Service Control EISD EentLag ag Eventl aa Hone Hone Hone Mone Mone Mone Co 11 55 SERVICE MANUAL Event Detail 11 56 NOV 2003 8E8820 Power On Problems The following paragraphs provide information for on problems that occur during the power on seq
272. e data signal pixels The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS have an Auto Setup feature that will accomplish this setup when the correct video signal is provided When the algorithm has completed check the image for the correct values for gain and offset For optimum quality in monochrome images the black value should be 2 2 and the white value should be 253 2 If the adjustment is for color images these values should be 1 1 0 0 or 1 for black and 254 1 0 254 or 255 for white Check these values in the red green and blue color plane for the correct values Advanced Leveling 15 a feature of the VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARDS It allows the user to choose a position for black and white values Normally the MIM uses the entire image to find a part that it calls black and white When a MODALITY provides a computer generated grayscale the black and white points can be selected from it This will provide a known black and white point for the MIM to use to adjust gain and offset After this algorithm runs you should check the images for the proper gain and offset values This feature can be especially useful for Ultrasound images and can be used for images from all MODALITIES See Using Advanced Leveling to Define Black and White Values Print a page of images to check that the timing is correct Check that transitions from black to white are sharp and clear e Print a curve series contrast series or color print matching series In versio
273. e for the password 12 Click Connect The LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the Connection Complete screen 13 Authenticate the connection with SecureLink a From the task bar Start gt Programs gt Kodak gt SecureLink b Enter your SecureLink Password c Enter the IP Address of the target MIM To access the MIM connected by the serial cable enter the RAS Address or IP Address of this MIM e Fora pass through connection to another MIM on the same local area network enter the IP Address of the target MIM d Make sure the Port value is 443 e Click Connect The connection is complete when the SecureLink connection symbol closes and changes from red to green You can then use the MIM Service Application e Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM e Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 27 SERVICE MANUAL Connecting to a MIM through a MODEM Connection Use this method to connect to a MIM over the dial up telephone network You will need access to a wall jack for an analog telephone line The MIM that you call must have an optional MODEM installed You can use this procedure To access the MIM that has a MODEM To establish a pass through connection to any other MIM on the same local area network as the MIM with the MODEM gt Note Before you can connect using th
274. e parts lists include all new BOARDS and CABLES necessary for use of V 6 1 and higher For parts information for the following MIM versions see the ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST 8B8186 Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 200 MIM 200 667 MHz Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGING MANAGER 100 MIM 100 433 MHz Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 12 1 MIM 200 1 GHz FRAME AY External Figure 12 2 MIM 200 2 4 GHz BOARDS Figure 12 3 MIM 200 1 GHz BOARDS Figure 12 4 25 PS FRAME AY External Figure 12 5 25 PS BOARDS and CABLES Figure 12 6 MODEM BOARD MIM 200 and 25 PS Figure 12 7 SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD MIM 200 Figure 12 8 DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD MIM 200 Figure 12 9 VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE BOARD and CABLES MIM 200 Figure 12 10 NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD MIM 200 Figure 12 11 Ethernet BOARDS and CABLES MIM 200 and 25 PS Figure 12 12 COPPER OUTPUT COPCIL BOARD and CABLES MIM 200 and 25 PS Figure 12 13 FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT FOPCIL BOARD and CABLES MIM 200 and 25 PS Figure 12 14 OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD and CABLES MIM 200 Figure 12 15 KEYPAD INTERFACE BOARD 25 PS Figure 12 16 Ethernet ADAPTERS and CROSSOVER CABLES 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 1 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 1 MIM 200 1 GHz 1 2 GHz and 2 4 GHz FRAME AY External H180_3032DCA H180_3032DC 1 4 8506 PC AUR ENCLOSURE AY 1 Includes HARD DRIVE CD ROM DRIVE CPU BOARD GHz and VGA BOARD For BOARDS added to P
275. eae Beeb be 4 15 Accessing the Security Administrator Console from a Remote COMPUTER 4 15 Enabling or Disabling the Privacy Feature 4 16 eet aie Wig P 5 1 Kodak DryView 8100 5 5 1 Kodak DryView 8200 5 5 2 Kodak DryView 8700 8500 and 969 LASER IMAGERS and Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI INPUT 5 4 Bus AO oa bond bine 334 ES oe weno ds OS has 6 1 Creating Network Profiles Using the MIM Service 6 6 Setting Up the KEYPAD for Correct Time 7 6 11 Completing Configuration ofthe 6 20 eer TIS eo Ge Se ee S ease EDS een 6 20 pee Upa MODALITY SERVER ioo oorr Iber daa 7 1 Setting Up the Input fora VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD 7 11 Using Auto Setup to Set up the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD 7 31 Cable Compensation Adjustment for VIDEO 60 150LC INTERFACE BOARDS 7 33 Checking Image I ooo 5 yee oo ad 9 Ok WE ON BE 7 35 Using Advanced Leveling to Define Black and White 7 36 Adjusting Gain Ce Lus eo oe nananana a que Y ee
276. ect Info select TCP IP pcAnywhere Remote Properties New Remote 5 E 3 X Connection Infa Settings Automated Tasks Security Options Protect Item Network host PC to control ar IP address 2r 0 0 1 C Use directory services Filter hare number of host PIS to control f Use dialing properties and phone number Dialing Properties Area Code Phone number County Code United States of America 1 Use manually entered prefix area code and phone number S _ Login information Automatically login to hast upon connection Login name PLMIMService Password O Domain Connection options Mumber of connection attempts 0 Seconds between retries 0 Cancel Help 4 On the Settings tab enter P Address 127 0 0 1 Login name PLMIMService Password NetServer 5 Click OK d pcAnywhere Manager E Me x File Edit wiew Tools Help mie Hosts Remotes Exit 1l p e x OJ nts and Settings Users4pplication Data Symantec pcAnywhere 4 e e Add Remote NETWORK Connect MIM CABLE DSL For Help press F1 New remote connection item 6 Change the name of the new remote connection item to Connect MIM 6 1 7 Close the pcAnywhere Manager window This completes Installation and setup of software on your LAPTOP COMPUTER 2 22 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Softwa
277. ection 2 5 Energize the MIM and access the BIOS Configuration Setup Utility Menu by pressing F2 when prompted on the MONITOR screen 6 Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items and install the settings from Table 4 6 for the Menu Items indicated Disregard all other Menu Items Table 4 6 Settings on the BIOS Setup Menu i Advanced I O Device Configuration Boot Boot Device Priority Select 1 ATAPI CD ROM Drive 2 Hard Drive 3 Removable Devices 4 Network Boot 5 UNDT 7 After entering new settings save and exit the BIOS setup 8 Reboot Then re ghost the MIM 4 8 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 100 Upgrading MIM Software For Software V_6 1 the capability exists to load software from a CD using the external CD ROM DRIVE KIT Tool For some MIMs the BIOS settings must be changed so that the MIM can boot from the CD ROM DRIVE Each MIM 100 with a serial number below 111345 contains 120 MHZ mother board and may not be upgraded to V 6 0 and above software Each MIM 100 with a serial number 111345 or above contains a 433 MHz motherboard and may be upgraded to V 6 0 and above software Additional memory and BIOS configuration may be required Each MIM 100 with a serial number 112779 or higher comes from Manufacuring with the correct BIOS configuration but may need additional memory Each MIM 100 with a serial number 113
278. ee the next paragraph for descriptions of its functions pcAnywhere 1s the secondary tool for troubleshooting but it includes some features that the MIM Service Application does not For procedures to start pcAnywhere and communicate with the MIM see Using pcAnywhere on Page 2 33 11 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting with the MIM Service Application Running a Test Print Using the MIM Service Application 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the MIM Service Application 2 Select Connect gt Connect to MIM 3 Select Diagnostics gt System system Diagnostics m select Diagnostic s En Print Testlmage Not YetRun M Cancel Transfer Last Stored image Not Yet Run i 4 Select the Print Test Image box only Then click Run Store and Print Test Image Patten Size j 5 Select the Pattern type from the 7 options to be printed and the Image Size 6 Click OK gt Note If a MIM has more than 1 destination the test print will be sent to the currently selected or default print destination 7 Check the quality of the print 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 3 SERVICE MANUAL Running a Test Print Using the DISPLAY KEYPAD 1 Select the Menu button on the KEYPAD 2 Using the Arrow keys advance from the Service menu to the Diagnostic menu to the Test Print
279. een 2 PCs Click Properties Set Maximum Port Speed to 115200 Click OK Click Close to close the Modems Properties window Continue with the next procedure 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 17 SERVICE MANUAL Creating a Dial Up Networking Icon for the SERIAL PORT Windows NT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 On the desktop open My Computer and then open Dial Up Networking Select New The Network Connection Wizard starts In the New Phone Book Entry window Enter the name Connect to MIM Products or some other name you select e Select Dial Up Networking Serial Cable Between 2 PCs Click Next At the Server window select Send my plain text password if that s the only way to connect Click Next At the Phone Number window click Next Click Finish Your entry now appears in the Networking and Dial Up Connections window with the name you entered Close the Networking and Dial up Connections window Make a desktop shortcut for connection you just created a Right click the MOUSE on the icon you just created b Click Create Shortcut c Click Yes to place the shortcut on the desktop Continue with the next procedure Creating Dial Up Networking Entries for MODEM Connections Windows NT You should create a dial up networking entry for each of the MIMs that you expect to access with a dial up telephone c
280. end is labeled Keypad and the other end 15 15 m 49 2 ft or 45 m 147 6 ft The KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not shown in the figure labeled Rear Panel KEYPAD and Autofilming COMM PORT ADAPTER CABLE 1 m 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 Odd numbered COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for KEYPADS and even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 29 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 24 MODALITY SERVERS KEYPAD CABLES for Digital Mode Keypad Keypad Cable Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only Imaging Device i n RS 485 Data Cable DB37 Digital Input Pkg MIM 100 or MIM 200 RS 485 Adapter Cable 180 0009 for the MIM 200 180 0009 Important The CABLES in the figure are for each installed channel of a MIM 200 Table 3 8 CABLES for Digital Mode with KEYPAD Catalog CABLE Description Length Number Notes RS 485 DATA CABLE DB37 10 m 32 8 ft 197 2330 Both ends are male F F gender changer included 45 m 147 6 ft 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed Both ends are male F F gender changer included RS 485 ADAPTER CABLE for the 1 m 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 MIM 200 KEYPAD CABLE 3 m 9 8 ft Included with the KEYPAD KEYPAD Extension CABLE Extends the 12 m 39 4 ft 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 1
281. equency Eq Serration option The software calculates the value Interlaced Image Option Must be enabled if the image is interlaced Yes No Swap Fields Option Allows the order of the 2 fields one for odd lines and one for even lines of Yes No an interlaced image to be interchanged Interlaced Field Counter Value is automatically calculated for the number of lines or HSyncs by the 0 225 in HSyncs software for interlaced Modalities only Override Indicates if the Interlaced Field Counter in HSyncs is overridden Yes No Vsync Serrations Present For VIDEO 150 only Indicates that serration pulses exist during the Vsync Yes No period Double H Frequency Eq For VIDEO 150 only If enabled the frequency of occurrence of serration Yes No Serration pulses during the vertical period is twice the rate of Hsync pulses If not enabled the frequencies are the same ASync Video Compensation Selections for inserting serrating pulses N A Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Figure 7 1 HF and LF Cable Compensation Parameters Portion of SMPTE Pattern BLACK LI H174_0064GC amp Important The High Frequency HF response occurs at the transition of BLACK and WHITE in the SMPTE The Low Frequency LF response begins at Pixel 4 Table 7 9 Windows Video Gain and Offset Parameters Parameter Description Range Coarse Offset Coarse video offset control One Coarse Offset step will provide a change VIDEO 150 45 2
282. equested Size Mix in Aow Trim Ranges Maximum Images Per Band 20 Id aximum Bands Page 20 Minimum Horizontal Separation 2 Pinimum Vertical Separation 2 Trim Width Enabled 2 Trim width Disabled jo Maximum Image Columns 0 E Pixel Pitch pixels mm 12 8205 Image Rows lt Back Finish Cancel Item Description Range Formatting Select Formatting to display the Formatting information indicated this table N A Parameters Aspect Ratio Mix on Mixed aspect ratio on the same page is allowed by the destination The MIM uses this Yes No Page parameter to validate the format Image Size Mix in Select if the destination allows mixed image size on a standard format This indicates Yes Std Fmt if the image size can be changed on a page with a row column symmetric format The images will be scaled differently to print all the images at the same time The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format DICOM Annotation Select if destination allows page annotation This indicates if the destination Yes No Box allows the DICOM Annotation Box for selecting the band of text that will be placed on each film The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Requested Size Select if the destination allows the user to request an image to fit the image cell Yes No Scale allowed by the destination The size of the
283. er cpp 1353 currentFilmSize 8 10 currentFilmType FTUnknown LaserImager cpp 1358 sheetsLeft 99 LaserImager cpp 1361 printerStatus Normal LaserImager cpp 1367 imsStatus IMS Normal availableMemory 16515072 bytes LaserImager cpp 1373 CLaserImager GetPrinterStatusHelper returns S SUCCESS LaserImager cpp 1200 PollPrinterStatusChangeHelper ends LaserImager cpp 672 CLaserImager PollPrinterStatusChange ends jz LaserImager cpp 1364 fpStatus j LaserImager cpp 1370 J y rop orm orm opm orm rm pm orm rm rm m rm LaserImager cpp 1356 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 31 SERVICE MANUAL Sample Log 8 PRINT SERVER to PRINTER 952 cmdset Job Transfer This log is for a MIM SCP communicating with a Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER during a job transfer using 952 cmdset The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the System General Subsystem set at level 6 MODALITY The 952 command set is used in communications with the 8100 8300 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGERS The following table MODALITY SERVER DICOM Network PRINT SERVER includes the typical sequence of commands in a job transfer PRINTER System General Autofilmer LASER IMAGER Command Response Function Comment RQS Ask status of PRINTER Can be sent anyt
284. ess Necessary only if an Ethernet OUTPUT BOARD is used 100 100 100 40 for 8200 LASER IMAGERS 100 100 100 30 for 160 LASER IMAGERS Memory Image Pixels 32 Node ID 0 to 6 Necessary only for 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS 5 Click Next 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 13 SERVICE MANUAL gt Note Check if Media Size iz Supported 35 3 35cm 11 14in 11 Rows with Common Columns Rows Test 4361 52273 5103 4361 247 az 3272 4361 4241 2048 3200 5 2286 274 lt any Blue Clear ReflectivelPaper Transparent iFilri B Blue ES Clear j LT j Ee lt Back Finish Cancel The numbers the Media information window displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER might not match the numbers displayed on the window above 6 Inthe Media window select all media that the customer will use Check with the customer on film sizes The table shows all film sizes allowed by LASER IMAGERS PRINTERS for Kodak Film Size IMAGERS PRINTERS 35 x 43 cm 8100 8200 8700 969HQT 160 LASER IMAGERS 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS 35 x 35 cm 8200 LASER IMAGER 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS 11 x 14 in 8200 8500 LASER IMAGERS 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS 8 x 10 in 8300 8600 969HQ LASER IMAGERS 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS Import
285. et of film with only 1 band and 1 image Destination cpp 2733 GetMinBandSeparation calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Band separation is the number of pixels between bands on film 1 Destination cpp 2956 GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation MIMDUI is the MIM Service Application Image separation is the number of pixels between images on film 1 Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 1 Destination cpp 2728 Destination cpp 2733 Destination cpp 2745 Destination cpp 2956 Destination cpp 2962 LLLA LLL Destination cpp 2728 1 Destination cpp 2733 Destination cpp 2745 Destination cpp 2956 Destination cpp 2962 LL LL LII LLLI Destination cpp 2728 1 Destination cpp 2733 Destination cpp 2745 Destination cpp 2956 Destination cpp 2962 LA LIB Destination cpp 2728 1 Destination cpp 2733 GetMinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 2670 GetMinBandSeparation calculated band separation of 0 overridden by MIMDUI GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 GetMinImageSeparation using MIMDUI separation GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 1 returns 2 GetMinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 2670 GetMinB
286. etImageData Start ImagePixelVersion cpp 683 ImagePixelVersion GetImageData Start ImagePixelVersion cpp 716 ImagePixelVersion GetImageData Stop MODALITY MODALITY SERVER 11 29 01 13 32 38 839 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 859 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 889 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 919 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 939 5 11 29 01 13 32 38 970 5 MIMPrintAcse cpp 836 SCP Assoc 4 gt NEW CONNECTION OPENED MIMPrintAcse cpp 840 SCP Assoc 4 SCU Modality AE Title MIMP MIMPrintAcse cpp 845 SCP Assoc 4 SCU Host IP Address 149 98 199 86 MIMPrintAcse cpp 846 SCP Assoc 4 SCU Implement Version Name MIMPrintAcse cpp 847 SCP Assoc 4 SCU Implement UID 1 2 840 113564 3 1 3 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1466 SCP Assoc 4 Destination AE Title MIM 11 29 01 13 32 39 000 5 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1504 SCP Assoc 4 Destination Name MIM 11 29 01 13 32 39 030 5 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1523 SCP Assoc 4 The Default Printer is 83 The default printer is an 8300 LASER IMAGER 11 29 01 13 32 39 050 5 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1538 SCP Assoc 4 No perfect Name match for MIM 11 29 01 13 32 39 080 5 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1603 SCP Assoc 4 No unique ShortName match for MIM 11 29 01 13 32 39 110 5 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1730 SCP Assoc 4 No unique Type match for Destination MIM 11 29 01 13 32 39 140 5 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1734 SCP Assoc 4 Using the Default Printer for Destination MIM 11 29 01 13 32 39 160 5 MIMPrintAcse cpp 1743 SCP Assoc 4 The Printer be
287. eted list GetPrinterStatusHelper starts ie m PhotonPrinter cpp 483 Laserlmager cpp 1207 Destination cpp 4391 Destination Class is Handling GetAllDirectDestinations LaserImager cpp 702 CLaserImager Open starts maxRetries 100retryWaitSeconds 7 Laserlmager cpp 740 Got LIT Open Mutex lit init is done Destination Class 1s Handling GetAllDirectDestinations LaserImager cpp 745 Destination cpp 439 1 LaserImager cpp 768 open successful LaserImager cpp 770 CLaserImager Open returns true 1 ss cpp 238 ss GetIMSStatus started Destination cpp 4391 Destination Class is Handling GetAllDirectDestinations 1 ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Sta IMS 1 Destination cpp 4391 Destination Class is Handling GetAllDirectDestinations dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Sta IMS ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Sta IMSOdc5 ecpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting 09 49 58 659 5 09 49 58 699 5 09 49 58 729 6 09 49 58 769 6 09 49 58 810 6 09 49 58 850 6 09 49 58 890 5 09 49 58 920 5 09 49 59 090 5 09 49 59 130 5 09 49 59 170 6 09 49 59 210 6 09 49 59 240 6 09 49 59 280 6 8191 000000000 8191 000000000 8191 000000000
288. eters s TCPIP EZ Fatal FOOO 405 01 31 2002 11 54 55 The Som 3C 30s Adapter BC Driver service Failed to start due to the EZ Fatal FOOO 405 01 31 2002 11 54 55 The 3Com Etherlink II Adapter Driver service failed to start due to the followir CiT nfo 6005 338 01 31 2002 11 52 53 The Event log service was started i nfo 6009 338 01 31 2002 11 52 53 Microsoft Windows NT A 4 0 1381 Service Pack Uniprocessor Free A Fatal Jb 34 01312002 11 54 52 Exceeded the allowable number af retries configurable via the registry an P 4 Ld ital 34 lines Log file size 4707 bytes Key to Columns in the Error Log e Severity Info Information only no error Fatal Error condition causes system to stop Warning Error condition but system continues to run Error Code Series of digits to the left of the is the error code Series of 3 digits to the right of the hyphen 15 the source code See the table below for categories of errors Date Time Date Time can be selected by user Time is in military 24 hour clock days Description Describes the error Table 11 1 Error Code Categories Error Codes Subsystem Types of Error 0 599 General Object or operation not found 600 699 Hardware Buffer too small Invalid firmware Memory test error 1000 1999 Service Diagnostic not found DAD message error 2000 2999 Source Command device not ready Error reading or writing image
289. eturns 24 At this point 2 different page formats are set up for print jobs 11 29 01 13 25 21 3203 DeliveryJob cpp 3984 DeliveryJob Created 5 11 29 01 13 25 21 430 4 11 29 01 13 25 21 460 4 11 29 01 13 25 21 490 6 11 29 01 13 25 21 581 6 PhotonPrinter cpp 497 83 PrintingEvent is signaled 11 29 01 13 25 21 611 6 PhotonPrinter cpp 512 83 deliveryJobReadySemaphore is signaled Destination cpp 4391 Destination Class is Handling GetAlIDirectDestinations LaserImager cpp 1207 GetPrinterStatusHelper starts LaserImager cpp 702 CLaserImager Open starts maxRetries 100retryWaitSeconds 7 11 29 01 13 25 21 641 6 11 29 01 13 25 21 671 6 11 29 01 13 25 21 701 6 11 29 01 13 25 21 731 6 LaserImager cpp 740 Got LIT Open Mutex LaserImager cpp 745 lit init 1s done LaserImager cpp 768 lit open successful New job is opened LaserImager cpp 770 CLaserImager Open returns true 11 29 01 13 25 21 761 5 m952 cpp 387 m952 GetIMSStatus called 11 29 01 13 25 21 781 6 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 01952 sendCommand RQS Request status of IMS in IMAGER 11 29 01 13 25 21 821 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket RQS 11 29 01 13 25 21 851 6 Destination cpp 4391 Destination Class is Handling GetAllDirectDestinations 11 29 01 13 25 21 961 6 Destination cpp 4391 Destination Class is Handling GetAllDirectDestinations 11 29
290. ew LASER IMAGERS 160 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView PACS LINK 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 21 SERVICE MANUAL 2180 LASER PRINTER Node ID must be unique and not conflict with any Node IDs assigned to any CP Interfaces installed in the PRINTER A value must be in this field for the MIM Service Application Item Description ngenge Memory Memory in mega pixels residing the Destination The 1 128 For 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS product uses this value to do format validation This obtain page store information from the value is site specific A value must be this field for the PRINTER S CES port For Kodak DryView MIM Service Application LASER IMAGERS obtain by setting General log level to 5 after LASER IMAGER 1s installed and checking Available Memory log output with system in Idle state Node ID The node assigned to CPOI BOARD in the 1120 or 1 6 Default is 6 6 22 NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 6 5 Media Information Parameters Check if Media Max Size is Supported Columns Rows 35x35cm gz 11 14in 3272 4361 usn foe faa 20 2286 2836 Back Rows with Common Test 5103 4127 1 4241 181811815 EERE BEI Tn Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Reflective Paper Transparent Filni Clear Xl any Blue Clear Blue i Finish Cancel
291. ew LASER IMAGER during an idle situation using 952 cmdset The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the System General Subsystem set at log level 6 MODALITY MODALITY SERVER PRINT SERVER PRINTER System General 11 29 01 13 17 27 148 6 LaserImager cpp 624 CLaserImager PollJobStatusChange starts Begin routine to poll PRINTER status 11 29 01 13 17 27 178 6 11 29 01 13 17 27 218 6 11 29 01 13 17 27 249 6 11 29 01 13 17 27 289 6 11 29 01 13 17 27 319 6 11 29 01 13 17 27 359 6 11 29 01 13 17 27 399 6 11 29 01 13 17 27 429 6 11 29 01 13 17 27 469 6 LaserImager cpp 770 CLaserImager Open returns true 11 29 01 13 17 27 509 5 11952 387 m952 GetIMSStatus called 11 29 01 13 17 27 5496 1952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand RQS Request status of the IMS in the IMAGER 11 29 01 13 17 27 5896 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ROS 11 29 01 13 17 27 799 5 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged receiving IMS status request 1 1 29 01 13 17 27 8296 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item STA 1 RDY to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 17 27 8595 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response STA 1 RDY IMS status is Ready 11 29 01 13 17 27 8995 m952 cpp 804 m952 GetAvailableMemory 11 29 01 13 17 27 9306 1952 sendCommand cpp 1080 m952 sendCommand INQ I
292. f No Sync is selected the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD will not continue to acquire the image when a failure occurs during image acquisition Pixel Depth The number of bits per pixel 8 4 After changing information select Set If the information is correct select Cancel 5 Use the following table to advance to the next procedure Primary Control Type Procedure Autofilming Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for Autofilming KEYPAD Do the procedures that apply to this site e Setting Up a Network Print Destination e Setting Up a Network Store Destination e Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS RIS Gateway e Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store Option 7 10 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Setting Up the Input for a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD Setting Up the Basic Input Parameters This procedure applies to all 3 VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS VIDEO 60 VIDEO 150LC and VIDEO 150 Will the primary control of the MIM be the KEYPAD or an Autofilming Link Will the MIM be connected to a Qualified or Unqualified MODALITY A Qualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has been checked the field with correct parameters The database in the Service Software for the MIM may also include this MODALITY in the Qualified list An Unqualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has not been checked in the field Consult TSC before attempting to
293. f the target MIM To access the MIM with the MODEM enter the IP Address of this MIM Fora pass through connection to another MIM on the same local area network enter the IP Address of the target MIM d Make sure the Port value is 443 e Click Connect If the connection is successful the connector symbol in the display closes and turns green You can then e Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM e Start pcAnywhere your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM 2 28 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Connecting to a MIM with a Network Connection Use this method to connect to a MIM over the customer s Ethernet network You will need access to a RJ 45 jack on the network 1 Assign an IP Address to your LAPTOP COMPUTER that is on the same subnet as the MIM you want to access 2 De energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER 3 Connect a NETWORK CABLE from the NETWORK PORT on the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the customer network 4 Energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER 5 Authenticate the connection with SecureLink a From the task bar Start gt Programs gt Kodak gt SecureLink b Enter your SecureLink Password c Enter the IP Address of the target MIM d Make sure the Port value is 443 gt Note It is not necessary to enter a name in the Server field e Click Connect If the connection is successful the connector sy
294. for Destination on the network The Service Application for separated by a period a Direct option the MIM requires the user to enter a value Duplicate IP For example 149 110 98 10 Addresses for installed destinations are acceptable if the DICOM AE Titles are unique for each destination Database Name The name of the Destination if it is being installed using a 1 13 alphanumeric characters known destination from the qualified destination database This is a view only field Model The model of the Destination The MIM uses this data to 1 12 alphanumeric characters optimize the page format validation for the particular Kodak Ektascan LASER PRINTERS Kodak Destination This is a view only field DryView LASER IMAGERS 160 LASER IMAGER Kodak PACS LINK 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM Memory Memory in megabytes residing in the Destination The 1 99 For the 2180 and 1120 LASER MIM uses this value to validate the format This value is PRINTERS obtain page store information site specific The Service Application requires a value in from the printer s CES port this field 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 49 SERVICE MANUAL Table 7 18 Media Information for Print Destinations E s gy ur z T Rows with a ee Check if Media Common Size i Supported Column Text PE NOH EE E pad c 35 43cm 4361 5223 5103 591111 35 35cm 4
295. for Remote Service Access To provide FEs with remote access an optional MODEM can be included in MIMs For MIMs manufactured with V_6 1 software an external MODEM 15 used An external MODEM 15 used on the MIM 100 when installed outside the U S or Canada An internal MODEM BOARD 15 used in the MIM 100 within the U S and Canada If 2 or more MIMS are connected on an Ethernet NETWORK a MODEM is necessary for only one of the MIMs To connect to a MIM without a MODEM the FE makes a call to the MIM with the MODEM The call can then be routed to any other MIM on the network User Control Operators use either a KEYPAD or a host control CONSOLE to acquire images select output destinations and print the images There is a separate KEYPAD or host control CONSOLE for each directly connected MODALITY MIMS can use 3 types of KEYPADS e TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD Used to control STUDY creation from a directly connected MODALITY This KEYPAD provides a number of features including patient demographic acquisition for STUDY delivery to WORKSTATIONS and ARCHIVES Only this KEYPAD can be used to send STUDIES to DICOM store destinations PRINT KEYPAD Used to control STUDY creation from a directly connected MODALITY for delivery to print only destinations such as LASER PRINTERS and LASER IMAGERS DISPLAY KEYPAD Used only for setup and STUDY management for a MIM operating as a PRINT SERVER for which there is only a DICOM interface for STUDY acquisition
296. formation is present Using the BAR CODE READER without HIS RIS amp Important e Before you scan the LABEL you must highlight the correct field on the Study Info screen When you scan the LABEL the information is placed in the field you have highlighted If the site is configured with discriminators the information will be placed in the field according to the site setup e Youcan only retrieve piece of information from each BAR CODE LABEL for example Patient Name or Patient ID 1 At any screen scan the BAR CODE LABEL 2 From the Study Info field you can view edit or delete the information as necessary 3 Complete the 5 required demographic fields 7 74 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store Option A MODALITY can be set up to store from the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD by connecting a cable from the KEYPAD to a switch on the MODALITY The MODALITY must have a switch available for this purpose See Connecting the KEYPAD to the MODALITY in Section 3 If the KEYPAD has been connected to the MODALITY do the following procedure 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Input gt Direct Connect Direct Connect Input Configuration Logical Control Type Control Input Board Lhannel Database Mame Part Lom Port See th
297. fset Adjusting by 1 count will change pixel value by approximately 3 4 Adjust the values for Fine Gain and Fine Offset Adjusting by 3 counts will change pixel value by approximately 1 If using color video adjust the values of each color separately Increasing the Gain will cause the white pixel counts to increase without affecting the black pixels Increasing the Offset will cause the white and black pixel counts to increase Pixel shift or line shift in the vertical lines or in the text of the image Check that the MONITOR of the MODALITY displays the correct test image Execute Auto Setup again Ask the operator to add more text to the image 1f you do not have sufficient text to evaluate The acquired image does not include all of the image information that the MODALITY monitor displays In the Video Vertical Parameters window adjust the values for the Images Lines Frame In the Video Horizontal Parameters window adjust the values for the Image Pixels Line Increasing these values will increase the area of the image that the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD requires Image is too high or too low on film In the Video Vertical Parameters window Adjust Vertical Back Porch for VIDEO 150 Adjust Vertical Shift for VIDEO 60 and 150LC Blurred text In the Video Vertical Parameters window swap fields Using Advanced Leveling to Define Black and White Values gt
298. ftware updates this number every hour This value is used for MIM reliability analysis 1 6 numeric digits Service Telephone Number Telephone number of the local Technical Support Center for U S only 0 20 alphanumeric characters NT Product ID Product ID for the license for the Windows NT operating system Must be unique for each MIM 4 alphanumeric fields field 1 5 characters field 2 3 characters field 3 7 characters field 4 5 characters MIM Application Version This is a view only field Shows the version level of the application software for the MIM For example 6 0 3 19 alphanumeric characters The number release level If included following the number Letter development level alpha or beta Last number sequence number for successive release levels Acquisition Interfaces Information for each interface is displayed for the MIM 200 Service Code This is a view only field Serial Number Check the DATA PLATE of the INPUT or OUTPUT BOARD ID Firmware and Driver Versions are view only fields Video or Digital 3433 3468 3469 or 3743 Enter the Serial Number to automatically update the other fields for Interface Type 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 3 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the Network The MIM Service Application allows you to check and set the MIM network parameters
299. grams the parameters N A Figure 7 2 VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD Monochrome 7 22 Gain and Offset Parameters Channel Coarse Offset Fine Offset Coarse Gain Fine Gain 130 LF Cable Compensation 120 HF Cable Compensation Auto Offset Auto Gain Manual Adjustment Tool Cancel NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Figure 7 3 VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD Gain and Offset Parameters x Figure 7 4 VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD RGB Color Gain and Offset Parameters 8 8820 NOV 2003 7 23 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 775 VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD Manual Adjustment ld anual Gain Offset AGB Channel Select Hed Settings Coarse Offset 128 Fine Offset 128 Coarse Gain 128 Fine Gain 128 LF Cable 128 2 Compensation 128 HF Cable 128 2 Compensation 128 m Pinel Plot Line Humber pem Plot Single Channel of RGE Set Acquire and Flot Cancel Table 7 10 Windows Video Sync Parameters Parameter Description Range Sync Input Source VIDEO 60 AND 150LC only Selection of Sync Input Source either Composite Video or External C Sync Composite video is always the same channel as the video signal Composite Video default or External Composite Csync RGB Sync Source VIDEO 60 AND 150LC only Channel selection for Syn
300. gt Accessories gt Communications gt Dial Up Networking 2 At the Dial Up Networking window double click Make New Connection 3 At the Make a New Connection window type Connect to MIM products or some other title you choose 4 At the Select a Device menu for click Serial Cable to Windows NT 5 Click Configure 6 Check that the settings are correct in each of the following tabs General Communication Port COMI Max Speed 115 200 baud Connection Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Options Display modem status 7 Click Connection Advanced 8 Check both Use Flow Control and Hardware RTS CTS 9 Click OK twice Next Important You must enter a telephone number before you can exit the Make New Connection window The Dial Up Networking Connect to window does not use this telephone number Use Tab to advance to the next field in the menu 10 Type 111 for the area code Type 111 1111 for the telephone number 11 Click Next e Finish 12 Make a shortcut for Connect to see the title assigned in Step 3 a Right click the MOUSE to select Connect to b Click Create Shortcut c Click Yes to place the shortcut on the desktop 13 Close the Dial Up Networking window 14 Continue with the next procedure 2 12 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Creating Dia
301. h Cancel validates the format Item Description Range Formatting Select Formatting to display the information in this table N A Parameters Aspect Ratio Mix on Select if the destination allows a mixed aspect ratio on the same page The MIM uses this Yes No Page parameter when it validates the format Image Size Mix in Select if the destination allows a mixed image size on a format This indicates if the Yes No Std Fmt image size can be changed on a page with a row column symmetric format The images will be scaled independently to print all of the images at the same time The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format DICOM Annotation Select if the destination allows page annotation This indicates if the destination allows Yes No Box the use of the DICOM Annotation Box for selecting the band of text that will be placed on each film The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format Requested Size Select if the destination allows the requested image to be scaled to fit the image Yes No Scale the destination The PRINTER will notify the output that the operation was completed The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format Requested Size Mix Select if all images in a row should have the same requested size The MIM uses this Yes No in Row parameter when it validates the format Trim Select if the destination allows Trim This allows the use
302. h of either 15 42 m 137 8 ft 848 3539 end is labeled Keypad and the other end is m 49 2 ft or 45 m 147 6 ft The KEYPAD Extension CABLE is not in the labeled Rear Panel figure FIBER OPTIC CABLE variable Not provided by Kodak Hirschmann CONNECTOR Not provided by Kodak Use for Fiber optics less than or equal to 30 m 98 4 ft in length Pritzel CONNECTOR Not provided by Kodak Use for Fiber optics greater than 30 m 98 4 ft in length KEYPAD and Autofilming COM PORT 1 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 Odd numbered ADAPTER CABLE COMM PORT CONNECTORS are for KEYPADS and even numbered CONNECTORS are for Autofilming connections 3 34 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 29 Terminating the Video Input for MIM 200 with VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD Uninstalled Video 60 Board Video In Video Out MODALITY H174 0065CC amp Important The diagrams indicate various states of the VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD depending on the set up of the MODALITY and MONITOR at the site A Uninstalled MIM 200 e B Installed MIM 200 with terminated video non passthrough for a MODALITY with a single video output The Terminate Video Input box for monochrome or boxes for RGB must be enabled before you select Set Parameters in the Video Board Setup menu A 75 Ohm TERMINATOR which is not shipped with the product must be i
303. h the policies and procedures of the owning Institution sername Password Change password after login 8E8820 NOV 2003 4 15 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Type in the username and password gt Note Initially the username is SA and the password is password 5 Click Logon The SA Console Welcome Screen appears You can use the menu buttons on the left side of the Welcome screen to move to the other screens within the SA Console SECURITY ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE Welcome to the Security Administrator Console You are lagged in as Security Administrator La HE Last successful login was Friday April 04 2003 1 43 00 PM Last unsuccessful lagin was Monday March 31 2003 10 52 00 AM Enabling or Disabling the Privacy Feature 1 Click Device 4 16 NOV 2003 8E8820 Upgrading MIM Software E Device Information Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Eastman Kodak E m x Elle Favorites Tools a OA 2 gt http 149 98 199 87 sc v Go Links EJ al SECURITY ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE Device Information Hostname localhost Serial Number Not Configured Installed Products PACS Link Medical Image Manager 6 0 E Local intranet 2 Click PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER V_ 6 1 SECURITY ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE Product Information PACS Link MIM Version 6 0 Privacy Enabled Disabled Privacy Warning N
304. he KEYPAD goes off line 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 11 SERVICE MANUAL 4 At the Direct Connect Input Configuration window select Add Video Qualified Video xxx or Unqualified Video xxx as necessary 5 If you selected Qualified Video xxx the Qualified Video xxx Modalities window displays Qualified Video 60 Modalities Diasonics SPA 1000 60Hz Diasonics Spectra Plus 60Hz Elecint EliteS print 50 60Hz Elecint Helis amp spen NM50 60Hz2 GE 3000 Senes 60Hz GE Adv windows wks Hz GE Advants 1024 DF GE CTi Doi BU BUH GE Eu Eum CT 50 60Hz GE Gene wks BU B UHz GE HiLite amp dvantage CT 50Hz GE HiLite Advantage 60Hz a Highlight the name of the correct MODALITY b Click OK to display the Direct Connect Input Parameters window Direct Connect nput Parameters Video SOULE Board 1 monochrome Ww Pe e Erie ETT GITE 6 Enter the correct input parameters Board Channel monochrome or Color RGB Select from the drop down menu 7 12 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Logical Name Select name of VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD for example vidl vid2 etc Database Name For Unqualified MODALITIES only enter name of MODALITY Modality ID Name Enter a short name for the MODALITY Primary Control Type KEYPAD or type of Autofilming connection See Table
305. he job and delete the session The MODALITY asks that the job be printed and the session be deleted 11 29 01 13 32 43 596 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 677 SCP Assoc 4 Printing Film Box FB N ACTION 11 29 01 13 32 43 806 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 375 SCP Assoc 4 Deleting Film Session FS N DELETE 11 29 01 13 32 43 957 2 MIMDicomDevice cpp 78 SCP Assoc 4 Down 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 21 SERVICE MANUAL Example Subsystem Logs The following pages include sample logs of communications that occur during the following operations MIM power on Logged activity from all subsystems KEYPAD to MODALITY SERVER Source Subsystem e MODALITY SERVER to PRINT SERVER Network Services Subsystem DISPLAY KEYPAD to PRINT SERVER KEYPAD Subsystem MIM Storage Storage Subsystem PRINT SERVER to PRINTER Delivery Subsystem PRINT SERVER to PRINTER 952 Command Set Idle State System General Subsystem PRINT SERVER to PRINTER 952 Command Set Job Transfer System General Subsystem PRINT SERVER to PRINTER Superset Idle State System General Subsystem PRINT SERVER to PRINTER Superset Job Transfer System General Subsystem MODALITY SERVER to PRINT SERVER to Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER Network and Delivery Subsystems Sample Log 1 MIM Power On This log shows the power on process of a MIM The log level for all subsystems is set at 2 as indicated in the first 6 lines of the log
306. he system includes one 2 For all MIMS except the 25 PS a Energize the MIM by pressing the POWER SWITCH on The power light will turn on b If the MIM has been set up check the KEYPAD for a Ready indication Start up to Ready can take up to 6 minutes 3 For the 25 PS Energize the 25 PS by pressing the POWER SWITCH on the POWER STRIP to the on position 3 44 NOV 2003 8E8820 Upgrading MIM Software Section 4 Upgrading MIM Software Introduction The procedures this section are primarily upgrade procedures These procedures upgrade the MIM to the latest software level Normally except for the procedure Saving and Restoring the Configuration it 15 not necessary to perform these procedures when you install a new system because new systems are delivered with the latest software and software licenses The procedures include Saving and Restoring the System Set Up Setting Up the BIOS Installing New MIM Application Software Ghosting Enabling Software Licenses Installing MIM DEVICE DRIVERS and FIRMWARE Qu saving and Restoring the System Set Up Saving and Restoring Using the MIM Service Application 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the MIM Service Application 2 From the MIM Service Application window select Connect Connect to MIM 3 Make sure the CONFIGURATION DISKETTE is loaded in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM 4 Select Configuration fro
307. hen any bar code data is received for the Primary Field Recommend OFF without HIS RIS and ON with HIS RIS Date Format Delimiter The delimiter for date of birth demographic field Allows variable length day month and year 5 Note The birthdate format is determined by the region of the selected language US mmddyy Europe ddmmyy Asia yymmdd None mmddyy backslash mm dd yy hyphen mm dd yy underscore mm dd yy period mm dd yy 6 Click Automatic Search to enable 7 To exit click OK OK Close 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 13 SERVICE MANUAL Using the BAR CODE READER with HIS RIS 1 At any screen scan the BAR CODE LABEL You receive 1 of the following messages record found on the local MIM database The patient is updated with all the study information The information is displayed after NAME above Study Info The record received from the HIS RIS cannot be edited No matching records were found The study information you scanned will be entered and all additional fields will be blank You must select Study Info to enter all missing information More than 1 record is found The user must select Study Info and then select Patient List to select the correct record 2 To check initial operation select Study Info and verify a Correct Information was placed in the Primary Field b Correct in
308. his set are often preferred by radiologists who are working with modalities such as Ultrasound or nuclear medicine 1000 eee me AA T HE a NT E E a Lux ES bee Qut lo o quunt Pa Set y Ret E T 810 1 Pf ae E EL ae et zar i 4 we ae ae a SU p ca n n m 600 400 22222 LE 22 22 200 ls ECT 17 0 bh 90 95 100 AN T WKSTNS3A Most of the curves in this set are designed to give a linear in density response while the remaining curves are designed to give an approximately linear in perceived brightness response This is assuming that in both cases the subsequent gamma table processing in the imager is of the linear in transmittance 1 3 type as is always the case in the 8300 LASER IMAGER Because of its linear in density curves this ULUT set can be used even on an 8300 LASER IMAGER with certain MODALITIES or workstations e g Toshiba nuclear medicine or some Siemens workstations that are designed to work with an IMAGER that has a linear in density characteristic Overall this ULUT set offers the choices shown below 1000 810 600 400 Perceived Brightness 200 0 5 10 20 30 rin m 80 90 95 100 gital Inpu The linear density in this ULUT Set are associated with contrast settings of 1 through 8 as shown below i jj jf ot ty 600 i sf Lll A ui 400 Perceived Brightness 200 0 0 5 10 20 30 40
309. htnesses The saggy curves are often used for printing Ultrasound and nuclear medicine images while the S shaped curves are widely used for printing CT and MR images The number order of the curves tables in this set is designed so that when a contrast test 15 requested that yields 2 films with 3 columns of 2 images on each film the first film shows the 6 images printed from upper left to lower right using the 6 saggy curves On the second film the left column of shows the images printed using the first group of 3 S curves and the right column shows the images printed using the second group of 3 S curves The U1 1095 ULUT Set is a nearly identical replacement for the previously described U1 109B TFT Set Whereas U1 109B had some tables that only reached 1020 instead of the full maximum scale value of 1023 all the tables of U1 1095 do reach the maximum scale value Therefore printed densities can reach the lowest possible Dmin For these curves overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting 1s increased from 1 to 6 These curves are often preferred over S shaped curves by radiologists who are working with modalities such as ultrasound or nuclear medicine Curves 7 9 and 11 of this set are a subset of the U713C0 ULUT Set A contrast setting of 7 gives the lowest mid tone contrast in this group of 3 while a contrast setting of 11 gives the highest mid tone contrast These 3 curves have a higher mid tone brightness than curves 8 10 and 12
310. ic equipment cleaner amp Important U S Federal law restricts this device to sale to by or on the order of a licensed health care practitioner 14 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Warnings and Cautions For the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 only Classifications UL Classified elie c UL Dus File Number E183646 Control Number 9R46 Medical Equipment UL2601 1 CAN CSA No 601 1 Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc with respect to Electric shock Fire Casualty and Medical Hazards only in Accordance with UL2601 1 CAN CSA C22 2 No 601 1 and IEC 601 1 Safety Regulatory EMC and CE Marking Compliance All safety regulatory EMC and CE marking information is located in the User s Guides Labels The following label is located either on the CD ROM drive or on the enclosure for the drive The label does not apply to the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 Class 1 Laser Laser de cat gorie 1 Laser Klasse 1 Laser di Classe 1 Klass 1 Laser 8E8820 NOV 2003 14 3 SERVICE MANUAL Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Safety Requirements Change gt Note Note Only MIM 100 1 2 GHz platforms are marketed EEC countries for patient environment Isolation transformer and UPS are not required Due to recent hardware changes there 1s new information about MIM 200 compliance with the Medical Device Directive MDD for product placement in the European Economic Community
311. ically contrast test film is printed the printed images are of decreasing brightness going from left to right and increasing mid tone contrast going from top to bottom on the film 3500 S000 2500 2000 1500 1000 s00 m 20 40 BO Input C3B5AX4 Allows moderate to strong departures from the basic VER693CO curves Curves 7 through 9 cover roughly the span of VER693CO0 and the remaining curves provide more choices of mid tone brightness Curves 1 through 3 the brightest and curves 13 through 15 the darkest In all there are 3 mid tone contrast choices for each of 5 mid tone brightness choices The plots on the chart show the two dimensional brightness contrast combinations provided by this TFT Set The numbering of the TFTS in the set is such that when a 3 horizontally x 5 vertically contrast test film is printed the printed images are of decreasing brightness going from top to bottom and decreasing mid tone contrast going from left to right on the film 3500 ais NU a ee SER SS m ng IRR m us adl E 2500 4 a 1 il aoe E
312. ice cpp 3497 PrintSCPService cpp 3526 PrintSCPService cpp 3566 PrintSCPService cpp 3576 11 30 01 16 21 22 930 5 4030 23709187 DICOM 11 30 01 16 21 23 251 5 4030 23709187 DICOM 11 30 01 16 21 23 251 5 4030 23709187 DICOM 11 30 01 16 21 23 251 5 4030 23709187 DICOM 11 30 01 16 21 23 251 5 4030 23709187 N SET LL LI LLLI LL DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 848 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 23 251 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3601 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 23 261 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3649 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 23 261 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3679 SCP Assoc 10255 MONOCHROME2 11 30 01 16 21 23 261 5 4030 23709187 11 30 01 16 21 23 301 5 4030 23709187 11 30 01 16 21 23 301 5 4030 23709187 11 30 01 16 21 23 301 5 4030 23709187 11 30 01 16 21 23 311 4 4030 23709187 LUT Ver693c0 w87 006 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1197 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1215 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1166 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1333 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 23 321 3 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1452 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 23 321 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1453 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 23 321 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1515 SCP Assoc 10255 Connecti
313. iguring the BIOS System options not set and Interrupts CMOS Battery Low e CMOS Settings Wrong 3 SIMM Failure in first 640 KB of base memory The boot process automatically None The system does not have any extended memory stops Install a new SIMM in BANK 0 SLOT 1 4 CPU BOARD The boot process automatically e Refresh Error Refresh malfunction stops Install a new CPU None Processor Exception Interrupt Error Timer Error Timer not Operational EDC Error FLOPPY DRIVE CONTROLLER 5 HARD DRIVE The boot process automatically e Pri Master HDD stops Repair the malfunction associated with the HARD DRIVE Error Pri Slave HDD Error Sec Master Error e Sec Slave Error 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 57 SERVICE MANUAL Beeps Malfunction and Cause Recommended Action Error Messages 6 VIDEO ADAPTER BOARD Either the system VIDEO ADAPTER is missing or the DISPLAY MEMORY had a malfunction associated with a read write command The boot process automatically None stops Repair the malfunction associated with the VIDEO ADAPTER BOARD 7 FLOPPY DRIVE e Incorrect Type e Seek failure occurred during POST Continue to boot from the HARD A or B Drive Error DRIVE Table 11 3 MIM 200 1 GHz Beep Codes during Power On Self Test display additional information short beeps code cannot
314. image should be scaled to match the available image cell area The printer places a notice on the output indicating that the operation was done The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Requested Size Mix Select if the destination allows all images of the same size in a row The MIM uses Yes No in Row this parameter to validate the format Trim Select if the destination allows Trim This allows the user to select a border around Yes No each image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices Aspect Ratio Mix in Mixed aspect ratio in the same row allowed by the destination The MIM uses this Yes No Row parameter to validate the format Image Size Mix in Select if the destination allows mixed image size in row This indicates if the image Yes No Row size can be changed in a row independent of the page format The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Requested Image Select if the destination can print images at a specific size The MIM uses this Yes No Size parameter to validate the format 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 65 SERVICE MANUAL Item Description Range Requested Size Mix Select if the destination allows the same size for all images on the page The MIM Yes No on Page uses this parameter to validate the format True Landscape Select if the destination allows a true landscape orientation Yes No Maximum Images Enter the maximum images per band allowed by the destination
315. ime STA I RDY PRINTER is ready ALI Set PRINTER to 952 protocol Will terminate print if sent before PAS Command passed EXP command INQ Check available memory ANQ 1024 1024 0 0 PRINTER reports memory size AQU I Acquire first image To be stored in image position 1 PAS Passed Image acquired AQU 2 Acquire second image To be stored in image position 2 FALSET AQU 2 Acquire failed Host must clear alarm reacquire ALM 68 Acquired timed out CLA Clear the alarm status PAS Command passed Host must wait for ARS command ARS All alarms reset DZ0 1200 6 1 0 0 0 D Define zones No of images mag Repeated for all zones on film interpolation contrast PAS Command passed STP 1 D Start the print cycle STC Print cycle successful EXP Start exposure EOE Image exposed PTC Print cycle completed CLR ALL Clear all images PAS Passed Images deleted 11 29 01 13 25 17 344 6 11 29 01 13 25 17 375 6 11 29 01 13 25 17 405 6 11 29 01 13 25 17 445 6 11 29 01 13 25 17 475 6 11 29 01 13 25 17 525 6 11 29 01 13 25 17 555 6 Patient cpp 1175 Entering Patient Patient worklist pIF The following lines obtain patient data to be delivered with the print job LLLA LL LL LLLI LLLI LI rea m rm rm rm rm Patient cpp 151 Entering Patient GetContainingStudy Patient cpp 1003 Entering Patient GetKey Patient cpp 1034 Entering Patient AddRef Patient cpp 460 Entering Patien
316. imization Other Printer Options Status Reporting Print Date Print Time Page Number Hospital Mame N E vent Reporting Send N Event Reports Always Apply Warning Status On Image Resizing Miniy Scale Crop Text Box Relocation None Always Apply Priority Sourcel DI Marmal 01000 Always Apply Negotiate Color Print Annotation Common T ext Elements Film and Page Options Modality ID rick Dry88 1 96 4 Annotation Override Always Apply Printer Parameters Border 3 38 Always Apply Film Base BLUE FILM Always Apply Film Size Always Apply Film Output Destination Always Apply 6 Change the parameters if necessary See Table 8 2 on Page 8 6 for recommended parameter values 7 Send an image from the SCU to the MIM and PRINTER and check quality of the image 8 Repeat this procedure from Step 1 for each SCU NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 8 1 Setting Defaults for the Image Processing Parameters Obtaining Optimum Images Parameter Selection Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS 160 1120 2180 LASER IMAGERS PRINTER Services Provided to SCU Select PLUT Select PLUT Tonescaling Method Select Perception LUT Select Curve Shape TFT ULUT file Select the TFT or ULUT file that applies to MODALITY Does not apply Does not ap
317. in the MIM may not match the parameters for the MODALITY or they may be incorrect The diagnostics for the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD include the following tests General Tests Memory Tests MODALITY Capture Tests Simulated Capture Tests 11 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Changing Level of a Log for Troubleshooting The range of detail level for all log subsystems is 0 7 The higher the level the more detail in the log for any subsystem The levels should be changed only for troubleshooting See the table below for the communication purposes of the logs and the optimum logging levels for troubleshooting Optimum Log Level Log Communication Purpose for V_6 0 and above Delivery PRINT SERVER to PRINTER communications 9 General Hardware HIS RIS communications to Kodak DryView LASER All 3 IMAGERS KEYPAD Auxiliary KEYPADS 5 Network Services DICOM input output 5 Service Service functions 5 Source Autofilming KEYPAD acquisition and print 3 commands Storage Disk space aging algorithm 6 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the MIM Service Application 2 Select Connect gt Connect to MIM 3 Select Logs 4 Select Logging Levels from the pull down menu Logging Levels Set All ta Subsystems Delivery Beneral Hardware Keypad Network Services Service S Ounce cn Bi cn B cn B oo QFE Fare Pape Pare Pa
318. ination allows Common text Tonescaling on Enables the user to change the curve shape in the middle of a page and select a curve shape Yes No Image Basis series from the KEYPAD Select if the destination allows Tonescaling on Image Basis Media Bin Selects a default media bin at the KEYPAD when the media size type is not selected by a Yes No Default DICOM input Select if the destination allows this feature Pivot Density Selects a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD Select if the destination allows pivot density Yes No Print Quality Selects the print quality to be used when printing the page from the KEYPAD Select if the Yes No destination allows different printing qualities Remote Image Sends images to the destination as soon as they are acquired from the imaging source image Yes No Deletion node Select if the destination allows remote image deletion Rotation Prevents the customer from selecting a landscape page for formats that are normally portrait Yes No and vice versa from the KEYPAD that the destination does not allow The MIM uses this to validate the format Select if the MIM allows page rotation 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 63 SERVICE MANUAL Table 7 29 Format Parameters for Store Destinations Formats Custom Formats Slide Format Bow Symmetric Formats Super Slide Format lup 15up 2up 16 up 4up 20 up 6 up 24 up Sup 30 up 3up 35 up 12up lt Back Fin
319. ination allows Pivot Density Print Quality Enables the selection of print quality to be used when printing the page from the Yes No KEYPAD Select if the destination allows different Printing Qualities Remote Image Allows images acquired from the imaging source image node to be sent to the destination Yes No Deletion Select if the destination allows Remote Image Deletion Rotation When enabled allows the user to select landscape for a page format that is normally Yes No portrait and vice versa Also used by the MIM when validating the format Select if the MIM allows page Rotation 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 25 SERVICE MANUAL Table 6 8 Interpolation Parameters Interpolation Item Description Range Interpolation Select Interpolation to display the features in this table N A Interpolation enables you to select an interpolation process from the KEYPAD or No Magnification from other inputs Bilinear Replication Cubic Spline Cubic Convolution 2 Cubic Convolution 3 6 26 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Table 6 9 Format Parameters Formats lt m m 4 xl Description Range Formats Select Formats to display the information indicated in this table N A Custom Formats Custom formats enable the user to select formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD Yes No or from other inputs The MIM u
320. ing the compensation number will increase the amount of compensation Increasing the number will decrease the amount of compensation 9 After changing compensation values click Set Acquire and Plot to view the results 10 Run Auto Setup again see page 7 31 and check for ghosting again 11 If necessary repeat this cable compensation adjustment to remove ghosting Figure 7 11 HF and LF Cable Compensation Parameters Portion of SMPTE Pattern BLACK LI Pixels H174 0064GC Over Compensation Perfect Compensation Under Compensation Important The High Frequency HF response occurs at the transition of black and white in the SMPTE The Low Frequency LF response begins at pixel 4 7 34 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Checking Image Quality 1 After Auto Setup and the cable compensation adjustment if performed select Acquire at the Video Board Setup window to display a test image Uncompressed Region Of Interest H 2 Select a Region of Interest ROI and display the uncompressed ROI image a Use the MOUSE to click and drag a rectangle around an ROI You must drag the MOUSE from the top left position of the ROI to the bottom right position of the ROI b Release the MOUSE click The uncompressed image displays amp Important e If this is color video check each of the Red Green and Blue pixels in the following steps To determine pixel values che
321. ing used for this session is 83 11 29 01 13 32 39 270 3 MIMPrintAcse cpp 710 SCP Assoc 4 Verification SOP negotiated 11 29 01 13 32 39 300 3 MIMPrintAcse cpp 694 SCP Assoc 4 Basic Grayscale Print Meta SOP negotiated 11 29 01 13 32 39 330 3 MIMPrintAcse cpp 706 SCP Assoc 4 Presentation LUT SOP negotiated 11 29 01 13 32 39 360 2 MIMDicomDevice cpp 59 SCP Assoc 4 Up for 83 from modality MIMP At this point negotiation between Mod Server and Print Server has been completed A film session to print to an 8300 from Print Server MIMP will now be created 11 29 01 13 32 39 711 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1670 SCP Assoc 4 Creating Film Session FS N CREATE Begin to set parameters for the film session 11 29 01 13 32 39 761 5 DICOM LL LII LLLI LLLI Is 1 i _ LL LL LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI PrintSCPService cpp 1689 SCP Assoc 4 FS default Contrast 0 from Connection DB 11 29 01 13 32 39 831 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1746 SCP Assoc 4 FS default Modality CT from DICOM 11 29 01 13 32 39 891 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1817 SCP Assoc 4 Setting Film Session FS N SET 11 29 01 13 32 39 921 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1826 SCP Assoc 4 FS Copies 1 11 29 01 13 32 39 961 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1888 SCP Assoc 4 FS Print Priority MED 11 29 01 13 32 39 991 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp
322. initialize the video screen to ADAPTER BOARD 1s correctly installed Beeps Malfunction and Cause Recommended Action Error Messages Repeated long beeps A memory error has occurred Check that all DIMMs are None correctly installed One long beep then 2 A video error has occurred and the BIOS Check that the VIDEO None 11 58 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the MIM 100 Table 11 4 MIM 100 Troubleshooting the Power On Sequence Malfunction Solution The LED does not illuminate when the MIM energizes 1 Check the AC Power The POWER CORD is correctly seated in an approved wall outlet Check the continuity of the POWER CORD The AC Power outlet is correct at the wall outlet Check the continuity of the FUSES in the AC POWER SWITCH 3 Check for 2 VDC at the LED CONNECTOR If correct then check all outputs of the POWER SUPPLY Install new LED The FAN does not operate when the MIM energizes 1 Check the POWER SUPPLY 12 V DC between P2 7 and P2 5 on the POWER SUPPLY 12 V DC at the FAN CONNECTOR Install a new FAN The KEYPAD does not display the logo for PACS LINK when the MIM energizes 1 Check the KEYPAD CABLE for Correct seating in PORT on the BULKHEAD of the MIM Continuity of the KEYBOARD CABLE Check for the DC voltages at the POWER SUPPLY 3 Check FUSES F2 and F4 on the RS422 SERIAL BOARD Check that the e K
323. is procedure you must complete the setup tasks in the table on Page 2 3 on your LAPTOP COMPUTER Normally you will set up these items during MIM training amp Important If the target MIM has an EXTERNAL MODEM the POWER SWITCH on the MIM must have been cycled OFF and then ON after the MODEM was INSTALLED If this has not been done the MIM will not respond to a call from your LAPTOP COMPUTER through the MODEM 1 De energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER 2 Connect a telephone cable from the MODEM PORT on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a telephone wall jack 3 Energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER 4 Atthe taskbar select e For Windows 98 Start Programs Accessories Communications Dial Up Networking e For Windows 2000 and Windows NT Start Programs Accessories Communications Networking and Dial up Connections 5 In the networking folder double click the icon for the MIM that you want to access gt Note To use this procedure you must have previously set up a connection icon in your networking folder for the MIM you wish to access through a MODEM 6 At the Connect to window type PLMIMService for the user name 7 Type NetServer for the password 8 Click Connect The LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the Connected to MIM message 9 Authenticate the connection with SecureLink a From the task bar select Start gt Programs gt Kodak gt SecureLink b Enter your SecureLink Password c Enter the IP Address o
324. is reqired for the MODEM The MODEM requires an AC power source of 100 to 240 volts 50 or 60 Hz Parts The EXTERNAL MODEM supplied with MIM products includeds the following items e MODEM POWER ADAPTER e SERIAL CABLE e TELEPHONE CORD INSTRUCTION BOOK Procedure 1 Check that the MIM is de energized Figure 3 32 CONFIGURATION SWITCHES O MODEM Bottom CONFIGURATION SWITCHES 2 Set the CONFIGURATION SWITCHES on the bottom of MODEM e SWITCHES 3 and 8 ON e All other SWITCHES OFF 3 38 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Figure 3 33 MODEM CABLES POWER SOURCE 100 240 vOLTS JACK for ANALOG 50 or 60 Hz Gr TELEPHONE LINE To COM1 CONNECTOR TELEPHONE CORD on MIM 200 or 25PS SERIAL CABLE SWITCH ADAPTER PHONE JACK 3 Connect the cables for the MODEM as shown in Figure 3 33 on Page 3 39 gt Note The TELEPHONE CORD connects to the LINE JACK on the MODEM Do not connect to the TELEPHONE JACK on the MODEM 4 Install the ferrite CLAMP on the SERIAL CABLE near the end with the 25 pin CONNECTOR 5 Energize the MODEM gt Note No MIM software coniguration is required to use the external MODEM Powering up the MIM with the MODEM installed activates remote service access 3 39 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Installing a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT FOPCIL BOARD This procedure installs a FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT FOPCIL BOARD in a MIM 200 or 25 PS and connects the F
325. ish Cancel Item Description Range Format Types Select Format Types to display the information indicated in this table N A Custom Formats Custom formats enables the selection of formats 101 and 102 from the KEYPAD or Yes No from other inputs The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Row Symmetric Allows the user to select formats that only have a line of symmetry in the vertical Yes No Formats direction from an Autofilming Link or through a DICOM network The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Slide Format Enables the selection of slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs The Yes No MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Super Slide Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs Yes No Format The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Allowable A list of formats that the destination allows This list can be customized to control Yes No Formats what the users see for a specific destination Each format lup 2up 4up etc has 1 setting 7 64 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 30 Page Formatting Parameters for Store Destinations Page Formatting Aspect Ratio in Aow Image Size Mix in Aow Requested Image Size Requested Size Mix on Page True Landscape Image Size Mix in Std DICOM Annotation Box Requested Size Scale R
326. isition can continue 11 29 01 13 25 37 994 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PTC to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 38 0245 1952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PTC Printing completed successfully 11 29 01 13 25 38 054 5 m952 printPage cpp 980 11952 printPage Job ID 0 11 29 01 13 25 38 0746 m952 sendCommand cpp 1080 952 sendCommand CLR ALL Clear all images from memory 11 29 01 13 25 38 1046 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket CLR ALL 11 29 01 13 25 38 325 5 ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged command 11 29 01 13 25 38 355 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 25 38 385 5 1 952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS Command executed properly 11 29 01 13 25 38 415 6 LaserImager cpp 778 CLaserImager Close starts thread 0x2013929351212 Begin to close job 11 29 01 13 25 38 445 6 11 29 01 13 25 38 465 6 11 29 01 13 25 38 495 6 11 29 01 13 25 38 525 6 11 29 01 13 25 38 555 6 11 29 01 13 25 38 585 6 dim cpp 1786 Dim Stop starts 11 29 01 13 25 38 615 6 1 SMessage cpp 80 SMessage close ccpacket cpp 845 M952 startPacketTask Quitting SMessage cpp 72 SMessage SMessage 1 SMessage cpp 80 SMessage close dim cp
327. ition Modify 3 At the Modify Parameters window select OK Board Setup VidealnputChanne ff O C 2 3 Contig Horizontal Parameters Sunc Parameters Gain amp Offset Parameters Vertical Parameters PrelClock Parameters Terminate Video Input Miscellaneous Auto Setup Channel 1 Ignore Lock Detect on Acquire I Hobart 5 Ignore Signal Detect on Acquire jv ehane aE Lossless File Compress on Transfer Constant Acquire Terminate Ext CSun Frame Average 1 1 Slop Image Display Gave Image Use previous region of interest to display image Image Compression erar None Normal Lossy C High Lossy Latus Scompion60 Setup Board 0 Board Prograrniming C Set Parameters Hesel Parameters Defauh Reset Board Last Saved 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 31 SERVICE MANUAL Important See Table 7 6 on Page 7 15 for descriptions of the fields and buttons in the Video Board Setup window 4 At the Video Board Setup window select Auto Setup 5 For the VIDEO 60 or 150 LC INTERFACE BOARD gt a Wait about 1 minute while the Video Board Setup window displays messages indicated below as well as other messages The messages might occur more than once during the process Also the Offset and Gain messages might interchange If Auto Setup does not finish see Help Files Autosetup Failures Au
328. itional information e Section 14 provides Warnings and Cautions 8E8820 NOV 2003 1 1 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 1 1 Installing and Setting Up a MIM Start installation See Install hardware section 3 and cabling Is this a new Install ar an upgrade Upgrade Lpgradethe See software Section 4 Mew Installation MOD SERVER PRINT SERVER or COMBO BOX See Configure the Configure the See Section 5 PRINTER MOD SERVER Section 7 See Configure the Section 6 PRINT SERVER See Optimize the Section B SCU images See Complete the Section 1 installation Installation done 1 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 System Description Overview of MIM Types MIMs operate as MODALITY SERVERS PRINT SERVERS or both See Table 1 1 Table 1 1 MIM Primary Functions Device MODALITY SERVER PRINT SERVER MIM 200 x X MIM 100 X 25 PS X MODALITY SERVERS capture images from digital or video MODALITIES They have the ability to add annotation to the images and develop STUDIES that include patient demographic data The STUDIES are converted to DICOM 3 0 and sent to WORKSTATIONS ARCHIVES and PRINTERS or PRINT SERVERS on the network See Figure 1 2 PRINT SERVERS receive DICOM 3 0 print class images from remote users on a DICOM Ethernet NETWORK convert these images to the protocol required by a local PRINTER and send the images to the PRINTER gt Note The
329. k LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 MIM 100 Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER 25 PS The procedures include g Saving the setup g Checking MIM basic functions g Training the customer Sending service feedback through SCAN Final Procedures 1 After setting up the SYSTEM save the setup on a DISKETTE and store it in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM 2 From the MIM Service Application make some test images select Diagnostics gt System 3 If necessary for this site use the KEYPAD or Autofilming Link to store some clinical images 4 Make some prints to the destination and check the image quality 5 For PRINT SERVERS print a grayscale test image 6 Set the MIM for Remote Service See Section 2 Tools 7 Have the TSC check that the MODEM operates correctly 8 Provide the TSC with the MODEM number 9 For a MIM 100 and MIM 200 with a TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD do the Customer Profile See the User Guide for the MIM Note For each interface for the MIM insert the User Guide for the interface in the site User Guide Each interface has a section e g KEYPAD Use the tab dividers in the binder for the User Guide 10 Enable or disable the Privacy feature according to the customer s request and verify operation of the Privacy functions 11 Train the customer 12 For an unqualified MODALITY only send the FILM MAILER Mod 1 with test films enclosed 13
330. k Profiles Using the MIM Service Application 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Network Profiles Create Network Profile Profile Name Mode IP Address 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 Ud 20 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 RAS Begin HE us hsc 2 RAS End IP D x dox dex 90 Cancel 2 Enter information in the fields of the Create Network Profiles window Profile Name Enter the name of the site Node ID Enter a name that will identify the 25 PS to TCP IP for example MIM25 For all Address entries See the local Network Administrator 6 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER E dit Network Profile Methodist 98 120 12 143 38 199 252 vnm ged cj 143 38 199 200 3 After entering the parameters click OK The Network Profile Management window will display a list of all Profile Names that have been selected for this 25 PS amp Important The correct Network Profile for each site must be selected at the KEYPAD before the 25 PS be used at that site See Creatin Network Profiles at the KEYPAD on Page 6 8 4 After creating the Network Profile advance to Setting Up the Network Input 8 8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Creating Network Profiles at the KEYPAD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 At the KEYPAD press Menu O
331. l Up Networking Icons for MODEM Connections Windows 98 You should create a dial up networking icon for each of the MIMs that you expect to access with a dial up telephone connection The following procedure sets up one dial up modem connection Repeat this procedure for each MIM that has a MODEM 1 At the TASKBAR select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt Dial Up Networking 2 In the Dial Up Networking window double click Make New Connection Make New Connection ee EA forthe computer you are dialing Select a device 9 ThinkPad Modem Contiqure 3 Enter a name for the MIM or RAS Server to which you want to connect 4 Click Configure and accept the default values for the MODEM configuration 5 Click Next New Connection the phone number tor the computer you want to call Area code Telephone number Country code United States of America 1 6 Enter the telephone number of the target MIM or RAS Server 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 13 SERVICE MANUAL 7 Click Next Make New Connection 8 Click Finish An icon with the name of the connection you entered in Step 3 will now appear in your Dial Up Networking folder You can connect to the target MIM by double clicking on the icon Repeat this procedure for each of the MIMs you expect to access through a MODEM You can add icons for additional MODEM con
332. lder destructed MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 800 DVPI UnCollated Printing Complete MIMDry ViewPrintInterface cpp 802 DVPI sendDocument end DICOM PhotonDeliveryJob cpp 120 complete job 11 DICOM DICOM DICOM DeliveryJob cpp 1254 send complete to routing RoutingClass cpp 10917 Entering JobComplete RoutingClass cpp 10966 JobComplete 11 FINISHED DICOM RoutingClass cpp 8309 ContextFinished DICOM RoutingClass cpp 696 Entering DeActivate DICOM RoutingClass cpp 10838 context State IDLE DICOM RoutingClass cpp 735 JobComplete IDLE RoutingAndDeliveryFactory cpp 1804 RemoveRouting DICOM RoutingClass cpp 10799 RoutingContext dtor DICOM DeliveryJob cpp 513 Queueing DONE DICOM Destination cpp 1325 Destination handling JobComplete MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 2125 DVPI release DeliveryJob cpp 396 DeliveryJob Destructing job 10 address 0x03467E70 DICOM DeliveryJob cpp 2104 Giving printer DONE DestinationState cpp 93 RCS NextState PRINTING JOB FIN 11 READY DestinationState cpp 466 NotifyPermanent DICOM DeliveryJob cpp 396 DeliveryJob Destructing job 11 address 0 033 00 11 29 SERVICE MANUAL Sample Log 7 PRINT SERVER to PRINTER 952 cmdset Idle State This log is fora MIM SCP communicating with a Kodak DryVi
333. le click Setup c Click Next 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 5 SERVICE MANUAL Select Components DAD can be installed with Jet andor OD BCD rect components Select the components that you d like to install Jet i5 lt Back Cancel d Select Jet 3 5 e Click Next Select Components Jet contains optional components for accessing additional data formats Select the optional formats that you d like to install Excel Paradox Base Lotus Text and HTML lt Back Cancel Important In Step f all boxes must be unchecked f Check that all boxes are unchecked g Click Next h Click OK 2 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software 6 Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V 2 1 a Double click S sw 2 1 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish amp Important Depending on what software is on the LAPTOP COMPUTER you might have to click Yes 1 or more times in Step 7 d 7 Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V 3 5 a Double click Laptop35 b Double click Setup c Click Next d Click Yes each time the screen asks if you want to overwrite an existing file e Click Finish 8 Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V_ 3 0 a Double click S sw 3 0 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 9 Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V 3 1 a Double click S sw 3 1 b Double click Setup
334. lected click OK 9 Click OK 10 Follow the directions the screen displays for restarting the LAPTOP COMPUTER 11 Continue with the next procedure 2 10 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Installing Serial Cable to NT and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT Windows 98 1 2 3 4 5 Open Modems in the Control Panel Window At the Modems Properties window under General click Add Select Other and click Next Check Don t Detect my Modem and click Next Click Have Disk Browse amp Important In the following step you might have to change the directory level from C Windows to the directory indicated 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 At the Open window select C ProgamFiles KHID Modem At the Open window Select mdhayes inf and click OK twice Select the 2 listing for manufacturer Generic Modem Drivers and Serial Cable to Windows NT Click Next Select Communications Port COM 1 for the 9 Pin SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP COMPUTER Click Next When the LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the message Your modem has been set up successfully click e Finish Close Close the Control Panel Continue with the next procedure 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 11 SERVICE MANUAL Creating a Dial Up Networking Icon for the SERIAL PORT Windows 98 1 At the TASKBAR select Start gt Programs
335. losed DeliveryJob cpp 513 Queueing DOCUMENT DeliveryJob cpp 2870 DeliveryJob state PJ REQ ACTIVATION 11 29 01 13 46 22 243 2 DICOM NetworkArbiter cpp 269 NetworkArbiter QueueA dd 83 is activating 11 29 01 13 46 22 263 3 11 29 01 13 46 22 293 5 DestinationState cpp 93 RCS NextState READY JOBREADY 3 PRINTING DestinationState cpp 466 NotifyPermanent 11 29 01 13 46 22 374 4 DICOM DeliveryJob cpp 2870 DeliveryJob state ACTIVATED STUDY 11 29 01 13 46 22 434 2 1 MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 2120 DVPI init 11 29 01 13 46 22 464 5 DICOM DeliveryJob cpp 2104 Giving printer DOCUMENT 11 29 01 13 46 22 494 2 11 29 01 13 46 22 524 3 11 29 01 13 46 22 574 4 11 29 01 13 46 22 594 3 11 29 01 13 46 22 624 3 11 29 01 13 46 22 664 4 11 29 01 13 46 22 694 5 11 29 01 13 46 22 714 5 11 29 01 13 46 22 744 5 11 29 01 13 46 22 774 5 11 29 01 13 46 22 804 4 11 29 01 13 46 23 876 3 11 29 01 13 46 23 906 3 11 29 01 13 46 23 936 3 11 29 01 13 46 23 966 2 11 29 01 13 46 23 996 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 026 2 retry 11 29 01 13 46 24 056 2 11 29 01 13 46 24 096 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 116 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 146 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 176 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 206 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 236 4 11 29 01 13 46 24 266 3 IMIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 640 DVPI sendDocument start IMIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 641 DVPI
336. lper starts LaserImager cpp 1207 GetPrinterStatusHelper starts LaserImager cpp 702 CLaserlmager Open starts maxRetries 100retryWaitSeconds 7 LaserImager cpp 740 Got LIT Open Mutex LaserImager cpp 745 lit init is done LaserImager cpp 768 lit open successful l rm rm opm orm rm m m rm LL LL LL LLLI LLLI LL LLLI LLLI LLLI LLLI 11 30 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Allocate LASER IMAGER 11 29 01 13 17 28 891 5 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged 11 29 01 13 17 28 931 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 17 28 961 5 11952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS Command from SCP executed properly 11 29 01 13 17 29 001 6 1952 sendCommand cpp 1080 952 sendCommand MSZ Show and set the media size 11 29 01 13 17 29 041 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket MSZ 11 29 01 13 17 29 332 5 ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged 11 29 01 13 17 29 372 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item PAS 0810 0810 0810 to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 17 29 402 5 1952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response PAS 0810 0810 0810 Command executed properly Media size is 8 x 10 inches 11 29 01 13 17 29 432 5 m952 cpp 485 m952 GetFPStatus called 11 29 01 13 17 29 462 6
337. ly calculates these values Low Voltage VIDEO 150 only When Auto or C Sync Auto Vsync 0 255 default 0 is selected for an external sync only the software determines the Low Voltage H V necessary to correctly amplify or attenuate the sync The range of 3 VDC to 3 VDC is associated with the 0 to 255 counts You cannot directly change this value High Voltage VIDEO 150 only VIDEO 150 only When Auto H or C Sync 0 255 default 0 or Auto Vsync is selected for an external sync only the software determines the High Voltage H V necessary to correctly amplify or attenuate the sync The range of 3 VDC to 3 VDC is associated with the 0 to 255 counts You cannot directly change this value Auto H or C Sync VIDEO 150 only Select this button to automatically determine N A the Hsync slicing level The software calculates the average of the maximum and minimum values between 3 0 and 3 0 volts for the Hsync slicing level Composite video applied to the External Hsync input will result in an erroneous slicing level Auto V Sync VIDEO 150 only Select this button to automatically determine N A the Vsync slicing level The software calculates the Hsync slicing level as for the Vsync slicing level Composite video applied to the External Hsync input will result in an erroneous slicing level 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 25 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 7 6 VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARD
338. m Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only 9 o 6 Video Input Pkg Adapter Cable Serial Control Cable N 0825 to DB15 RS 422 DB15 Gl MIM 100 or MIM 200 Com Port Adapter Cable for the MIM 200 only Imaging Device 952 H180 0021BCA H180 0021BC This view shows an RS 422 connection 3 28 NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 3 7 CABLES for Video Autofilming Installing the Hardware Catalog CABLE Description Length Number Notes VIDEO CABLE 75 ohm Coax 10 m 32 8 ft 839 7747 45 147 6 ft 1609791 The CONNECTORS are not installed VIDEO ADAPTER CABLE for 20 3 cm 8 in Included with the MIM 200 MIM 200 RGB VIDEO CABLE Used in place of 8 m 26 ft VIDEO CABLE and VIDEO ADAPTER 20 m 65 ft CABLE in RGB installations Not shown in 2 m 6 6 ft Use with MIM 100 only the figure RS 232 RS 422 Conversion Kit 1212018 DB25 to DBI5 RS 232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE 1 8 m 6 ft Included with Conversion Kit SERIAL CONTROL CABLE 10 m 32 8 ft 8192742 Male end connects to the MIM Female end RS 422 DB15 45 m 147 6 ft 860 3599 connects to MODALITY ADAPTER CABLE DB25 to DB15 1 52 m 5 ft 835 9689 RS 422 KEYPAD CABLE 3 m 9 8 ft Included with KEYPAD KEYPAD Extension CABLE Extends 12 m 39 4 ft 881 5144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels One KEYPAD CABLE to a length of either 42 m 137 8 ft 848 3539
339. m the front wall Drill pilot holes in the floor to a depth of 3 8 cm 1 5 in 4 LAG SCREWS 1 4 1 5 in will be used to attach the STRAP ASSEMBLIES to the floor Open the LATCH on each STRAP ASSEMBLY and remove slack from the adjustment STRAP Place the STRAP ASSEMBLIES with the metal ends pointing in the same direction before installing them See the figure Fasten the metal ends of the STRAP ASSEMBLIES to the floor with the 4 LAG SCREWS Use a large and a small FLAT WASHER with each LAG SCREW Place the UPS in the STRAPS Tighten and lock the STRAPS To install CABLES between the MIM and other components of the system For CABLES for MODALITY SERVERS see Table 3 1 For CABLES for PRINT SERVERS see Table 3 2 For diagrams relating to video termination RS 232 RS 422 conversion and other CABLE conversion see Table 3 3 To locate COM PORTS on all MIMS see Table 3 4 Table3 1 CABLES for MODALITY SERVERS MODALITY SERVER KEYPAD See Figure MIM 200 2 4 GHz 3 7 MIM 200 1 2 GHz 3 6 MIM 200 1 GHz 3 5 MIM 200 667 MHz 3 4 100 3 8 TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD 3 10 3 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Table 3 2 CABLES for PRINT SERVERS Installing the Hardware STANDARD PRINT SERVER Connection Type LASER IMAGER See Figure MIM 200 Ethernet 8200 and 160 LASER IMAGERS 3 11 3 13 Fiber Optic FOPCIL 8500 and 8700 LASER IMAGERS P
340. m the menu and To back up the configuration select Save Configuration To restore the configuration select Restore Configuration Save Configuration Parameters This feature will save all MIM configuration parameters to the configuration diskette Make sure the diskette is Inserted in the MIM floppy drive 5 Click OK 8E8820 NOV 2003 4 1 SERVICE MANUAL Saving and Restoring from a PRINT or DISPLAY KEYPAD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 At the KEYPAD main menu press Menu Press the Down Arrow key until gt points to the Service menu Press the Menu Press the Down Arrow key until gt points to the Configuration menu Press the Menu key Check that the CONFIGURATION DISKETTE 15 loaded in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM To save the configuration for the system Press the Down Arrow key until gt points to Backup Config Press the Menu key Press the Down Arrow key until gt points to Run Backup The following messages will display BACKUP STATUS IN PROGRESS Then BACKUP STATUS Operation completed To exit press the Menu key To restore the configuration for the system Press the Down Arrow key until gt points to Restore Config Press the Menu key Enter Password will display Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to enter the password SVC letter by letter Press the Menu key after entering each letter The Menu key acts like
341. mage Enter the number of maximum image rows that are allowed by the destination 0 5400 Rows Pixel Pitch Enter the number of pixels per millimeter for the destination 0 32 Minimum Enter the number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction The MIM 0 20 Horizontal uses this parameter when it validates the format Separation Minimum Vertical Enter the number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction The MIM 0 10 Separation uses this parameter when it validates the format Trim Width When Enter the number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y 0 5 Enabled direction when trim is on The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format Trim Width When Enter the number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y 0 5 Disabled direction when trim is not on The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format Image Pad Enter the number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y 0 10 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 29 SERVICE MANUAL Table 6 11 Image Processing Parameters Image Pracessing Color Color Grayscale Same Page Grayscale MinifyCrop aximum Image Dic 31 lt Back Finish Cancel Item Description Range Image Processing Select Image Processing to display the information indicated in this N A table Color Select if the destination allows colo
342. mages to the LASER PRINTER Transmission will resume when the diagnostic complete Execute the diagnostic for the MIM before executing the diagnostic for the CPOI The communication between the MIM and the CPOI must be correct before the diagnostic for the CPOI will successfully pass the test Before installing a replacement CPOI check that the following equipment operates correctly FIBER OPTIC CABLE between the MIM and the DISTRIBUTION BOARD Ay FIBER OPTIC PASSTHROUGH CONNECTOR at the DISTRIBUTION BOARD Ay Internal FIBER OPTIC CABLE between the DISTRIBUTION BOARD and the CPOI The diagnostics for the CPOI include the following tests Registers and interrupts Transmitters and receivers Memory 11 60 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the CPOI Important Enter selection gt CES PORT TEST PASSED DRAM INTEGRITY TEST PASSED DRAM REFRESH TEST PASSED ROM SUMCHECK TEST PASSED VICO68 RESET TEST PASSED NVSRAM BATTTERY TEST PASSED NVSRAM INTEGRITY TEST PASSED VICO69 INITIALIZATION PASSED CPNI Environment Ver 1 0 Current Date Time gt 5 13 1999 10 52 00 Valid Application in FLASH lt GO gt copied to RAM CPOI Application CkSum 003456D8 OK CPOI NVRAM OK SPURIOUS INTERRUPTS DETECTED Count 2695692801 CPOI Starting Date and Time gt 5 13 1999 9 41 34 Start CPOI command handler Complete Previous CPCP node 6 entry 1 MIM issue START Start C
343. mbination of 4 1 9999 Pixel Clock Frequency Pixel clock rate in MHz The software calculates value 1 000 999 999 Sync Width Width in microseconds of the horizontal synchronization pulses 0 000 99 999 Front Porch Width in microseconds of the front porch The software calculates the 0 000 99 999 value Back Porch Width in microseconds of the back porch 0 000 99 999 Blanking Total in microseconds of the widths for the back porch front porch The 0 000 99 999 software calculates this value Calculate For VIDEO 150 only Calculates the pixel clock frequency using the N A Horizontal Line Time and Total Pixels per Line with the option of holding constant the Display Time and or Image Pixels The software requires that values be entered for Horizontal Line Time and Total Pixels per Line Hold Determines which value you select for the constant during the setup Display Time Image Pixels Auto Horizontal Do not select Places the same number of black pixels on either side of N A Centering the image Uses the selection you make for Shift Image Pixels Shift Image Pixels L R The number of pixels that the image will move to the right or left when 9999 to 9999 you select Auto Centering Negative numbers move the image to the left positive numbers to the right 7 18 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 8 Windows Vertical Parameters Vertical Parameters E4 Image
344. mbol in the display closes and turns green You can then e Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM e Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 29 SERVICE MANUAL Connecting to a MIM with a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE Use this method to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM using a NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE 1 Assign an IP Address to your LAPTOP COMPUTER that is on the same subnet as the MIM you want to access 2 De energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER 3 Connect NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE from the NETWORK PORT on your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the NETWORK PORT on the MIM 4 Energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER 5 Authenticate the connection with SecureLink a From the task bar Start gt Programs gt Kodak gt SecureLink b Enter your SecureLink Password c Enter the IP Address of the target MIM d Make sure the Port value is 443 gt Note It is not necessary to enter a name in the Server field e Click Connect If the connection is successful the connector symbol in the display closes and turns green You can then e Start the MIM SERVICE APPLICATION on your laptop and use it to do maintenance functions on the target MIM e Start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and use it to take control of the target MIM Connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM with a VPN Connection VPN is a secure method of a
345. mp Important With Version 5 0 and higher the application software for the MIM automatically selects defaults for these destination parameters To select values other than the defaults click Next to proceed to the Supported Items window and to windows for the other groups of parameters 9 Click Finish to select the defaults for these destination parameters Supported Items nterpolation Format Types Page Formatting mage Processing e M952 Usage gt Note When Finish 15 clicked the Installed Destinations window will display and the MIM will process the parameter information 10 When processing is completed click Close amp Important You must repeat the destination setup procedure for each network print destination 11 To check that the network destinations are correctly set up 8 8820 NOV 2003 7 47 SERVICE MANUAL a Start the MIM Service Application and select Diagnostics gt Network b Execute a Ping and or DICOM Echo Enter the IP Address of the new destination for a Ping Enter the IP Address port number and AE title for a DICOM Echo c Click OK d Click Cancel from the Network Diagnostics window 12 After completing the network print destination setup use the table below to advance to the correct procedure Procedures to Complete Advance to Does the MODALITY SERVER have Store Setting Up a Network Store Destination on Page 7 60 Destina
346. mportant Do not use any features the Remote Network Interface menu bar except Logging Remote Network Interface File Diagnostic Keypad Loggimg Help Tests GetCurrentLoglevel SetLoglevel Stark 4ppConsoleLogger 4 Select Start AppConsoleLogger The log displays 11 16 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Logging Levels gt Note The defaults for Log Level are preset to the correct level for troubleshooting purposes as shown 5 At the Remote Network Interface menu bar select SetLogLevel 6 At the Console menu bar select View 8 8820 NOV 2003 11 17 SERVICE MANUAL Pere rrr Ey BN Cancel Max Entries Filter String Format Comment File Line ClasslD Object Log Level Date Time Se Mame On Clase End all tasks all Et Pause On Error 7 In the Format panel of the Settings window select the fields you wish to display in the log gt Note For troubleshooting the most useful fields are Comment Log Level Time and SRC Name With these fields selected a log line appears as indicated below 09 55 05 058 2 SCU Assoc 29022 Up XRAY 8200 Time Log Level SRC Name Comment 8 After filtering the fields click OK 9 When finished at the Remote Network Interface menu bar select Logging 10 Select Stop AppConsoleLogger 11 18 NOV 2003
347. n Arrow until the cursor is at the IP Address of the first SCU to be set up Press Menu to display the SCP Services screen gt Exit Menu Image Resizing Relocate Text Box N EVENT Reporting Warming Status PLUT Color Tonescaling Curve Shape TFT Contrast Interp Smoothing Image DMin Image DMax Polarity Border Convolution Group Modality Group Gama Table Modality CRT Profile Body Part Film Output Size Base Priority Page Annotation Delete AE Title Exit Menu 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 Use the Down Arrow or Up Arrow key to select parameters to be changed gt Note For the parameter values that apply to the MODALITY see Table 8 1 on page Page 8 5 and Table 8 2 on Page 8 6 Full descriptions of the parameters are available in the User Guide for the MIM 10 Use the Arrow and Menu keys to change parameter values when necessary gt Note If Always Apply is set to Y the system values will be used not the parameter input from the SCU 11 After setting the parameter values send an image from the SCU to the MIM and check quality of the image 12 Repeat steps Step 6 through Step 11 for each SCU on the list displayed in step Step 6 Using the KEYPAD to Create Optimum Images for the SCU For MOD SERVERS parameters for the images can be set up using the TOUCHSCREEN or PRINT KEYPAD Complete procedures are provided in the User Guide for the MIM Options fo
348. n Table User Lookup Table File A set of curves that can be selected according to MODALITY requirements See the descriptions of TFTS and ULUTS later in this section Contrast dry Used with a TFT ULUT set this number controls which TFT ULUT curve will be used ICC Profile CRT1 CRT6 Used with DMI 1200 and 3600 color PRINTERS only A CRT profile is selected to help the image data match that of the monitor of the MODALITY As the CRT number is increased the image darkens Does not apply to V_ 6 0 Image Dmin 0 00 3 98 Indicates the minimum density of the image area of the film Must be lower than Image Dmax Image Dmax 0 01 3 99 Indicates the maximum density of the image area of the film Must be higher than Image Dmin and cannot be higher than Border Density Curve Shape 0 0 69 This field allows for a coarse adjustment in matching the film to the MONITOR Curve shape 0 is linear Increasing the value in this field enhances density differences in the dark areas of the image Contrast wet 5 to 5 Used with Curve Shape to allow a fine adjustment in matching the film to the MONITOR 8 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images Parameter Descriptions Modality Type Selected to help provide an optimum image according to type of MODALITY CT MR etc Used only with 1120 and 2180 IMAGERS PRINTERS Body Part Adjusts the image depending on body part Used only by 120
349. n algorithm for the MODALITY e g MR for Magnetic Resonance The other fields can be any information that is meaningful to you and the site Once set up the information for the MODALITY will be used for HIS RIS and storage class destinations 5 Enter any additional information in other fields 6 At the Modality Info screen click OK 7 At the Configuration window click Close gt Note Check the Storage Destination connection by executing a ping If the ping does not work you will have to set up the destination or troubleshoot the problem 8 At the MIM Service Application window select Diagnostics gt Network 9 At the Network Diagnostics window press Run 10 At the Input IP Address window enter the IP Address of the storage device 11 Click OK 12 At the Network Diagnostics window press Cancel 13 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt HIS RIS Gateway Important e You must set up the HIS RIS Gateway at the KEYPAD for the MIM to successfully query the Patient Worklist See Section 13 for instructions for setting up a Mitra PACS Broker to send Event Notifications to the MIM When the KEYPAD on the MIM displays either Study Info or the Patient List screen the application software for the MIM queries the HIS RIS GATEWAY every 2 minutes and updates the new information on the Patient List screen The KEYPAD displ
350. n the Main Menu press the Down Arrow until gt points to Service Menu Press Menu On the Service Menu press the Down Arrow until gt points to Configuration Menu Press Menu On the Configuration Menu press the Down Arrow until gt points to Network Profiles Press Menu Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow keys to select Add to Profile Press Menu Select Add Profile On the Network Profiles menu e Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow keys to scroll through the alphabet and numbers to select the Profile Name for the site Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow keys to select a Node ID name that will identify the 25 PS to TCP IP for example MIM25 Enter all fields See the local Network Administrator for addresses After setting up the Network Profile advance to Setting Up the Network input amp Important The correct Network Profile for each site must be selected at the KEYPAD before the 25 PS can be used at that site Network profiles can be Selected Viewed Edited or Deleted at the Keypad NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Setting Up the Network Input 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Input gt Network Hetwork Input Configuration DICOM Logical Control Type Frotocol Fort Lom Configuration Parameters Caution Changing parameters in this menu will take the system off line 2 Click Add Hetwork Input Parameter
351. nabled can be selected at the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD The MODALITY type and body part information is useful when sending to storage destinations to enable hanging protocols and features of certain WORKSTATIONS MODALITY type is useful when sending DMI print destinations through the network to select image processing techniques 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 39 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for Autofilming amp Important For Autofilming an RS232 or RS422 CABLE must be connected between the MODALITY and the MIM Current MIMS use only RS422 For Autofilming connections that require RS232 install the CONVERTER KIT 8B8186 Catalog No 121 2018 to changes the RS232 signal to RS422 Check the MODALITY DATABASE for information on parameters 1 At the Direct Connect Input Configuration window click Autofilming Modify 2 At the prompt Are you sure click OK The Autofilming Parameters window displays H952 P831 Autoafilmng Parameters Serial Fort Fort coms Baud Rate Driver Type 65422 Data Bits E Stop Bits Parity Even Fratacal Ack Wait Timer Ack Memory Full Response Hast Assumes 4800 Lines M Host Assumes 300 DPI Report Alarms Variable Correction Ausia Keypad Store Key Active eraut Sel Temporary _ Reset Last Saved Cancel At the window for the type of Autofilming at the sit
352. nd the Auxiliary KEYPAD Automatic Film Type Flag that indicates if the SUPPLY MAGAZINE in the LASER On Off Selection PRINTER must be used to automatically select the film size and film base DTR Connect Specifies the amount of time in seconds the MIM must wait for On Off the Imaging Device to respond to a handshake character Default Horizontal The number of horizontal frames in page format that the MIM 1 9 Frames defaults to Default Vertical The number of vertical frames in page format that the MIM 1 9 Frames defaults to Autoprint Flag that indicates if the MIM should automatically print the Off page when the last image on the page is stored 7 42 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Item Description Range AutoFormat Flag that indicates if the MIM should automatically set up for a new page of the same format after it makes a print of a page On Off Interpolation Sharp Specifies the type of interpolation to use when the MODALITY selects Sharp interpolation Bilinear Cubic Spline Cubic Convolution 2 Cubic Convolution 3 No Magnification Replication Interpolation Smooth Specifies the type of interpolation to use when the MODALITY selects Smooth interpolation Bilinear Cubic Spline Cubic Convolution 2 Cubic Convolution 3 No Magnification Replication Emulate 3M Specifies whether the Toshiba or YMS Autofilming link will True False emulate the
353. ndCommand To ccpacket Fmt Id 99 DMax 309 Media BWGen E14X17 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Fmt Id 99 DMax 309 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags cepacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received 1 ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Fmt YOB12 ss_sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Fmt Y PrintJob cpp 147 CPrintJob SetJobInfo returns 0 PrintJob cpp 157 CPrintJob NewImageBox starts PrintJob cpp 176 CPrintJob NewImageBox returns 0 ImageBox cpp 20 CImageBox SetImagelInfo starts ImageBox cpp 35 kernelGroup linterp 5modalityGroup 6contrast 6trim Orotate 0 ImageBox cpp 47 columns 1024rows 1024bitsAllocated 8bitsStored 8highBit 7pixelRep ImageBox cpp 53 x0 0 y0 563 width 4096 height 4096 ss sendImageInfo cpp 211 ss sendImagelnfo started ss sendImageInfo cpp 292 RES Free form Format imageID 2 index 0 ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Res Imgs 2 1024 1024 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Res Imgs 2 1024 1024 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Res Imgs 2 1024 10241ac1 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Res YOB15 ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Ge
354. ndicated in the example screen Page 65 3 Check that the Date Time of the CPOI and the MIM match e Select item 1 from the Utilities Menu e At the DISPLAY KEYPAD of the MIM select Menu gt Service Menu gt Machine Setup gt Set Date Time CPOI Ver 1 2 Boot PROM Ver 1 0 UTILITIES MENU 1 Get Current Date amp Time 3 CPCP Buffer Address 4 CPCP Buffer Tables 6 Debug Utilities Trace 8000 7 Get OI Firmware Revisions 8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests 9 Set Current Date amp Time CPOI Status IDLE Spurious interrupts Total 2695692801 Current 0 Enter selection gt 3 CPCP Buffer Tables CPCP Anchor 0 0000 amp Important If the screen data does not match the data indicated the example Page 65 4 To determine the interface for which the CPOI is configured select item 3 The LAPTOP COMPUTER will display the CPCP Anchor gt Note e For Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER 1120 LASER PRINTER Anchor OXF0000 For Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER 2180 LASER PRINTER CPCP Anchor 0X00000 5 To determine if the interface SLOTS and addresses are correctly assigned select item 4 from the Utilities Menu Important See the example screen below The CPCP Buffer Table data depends on the model of LASER PRINTER In the ow column the address 00 is assigned to the LASER PRINTER 2180 LASER PRINTER 6 addresses 1120 LASE
355. nections later 9 When you are done creating dial up icons advance to Installing SecureLink Client Software on Page 2 19 2 14 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Installation and Setup Procedures for LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 Installing TCP IP Windows 2000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 On the LAPTOP COMPUTER select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network and Dial up Connections gt Local Area Connection Click Properties Scroll to Internet Protocol TCP IP Is Internet Protocol TCP IP checked No Yes Continue with Step 5 Advance to Installing Communications cable between two computers and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT for Windows 2000 on Page 2 15 Click Install Select Client Click Add Follow the instructions to install TCP IP Continue with the next procedure Installing Communications cable between two computers and Setting Up the SERIAL PORT for Windows 2000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 From the task bar Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Phone and Modem Options Select the Modem tab Click Add Check Don t Detect my modem I will select it from list Click Next From the list select Communications cable between two computers Click Next Select Selected ports Select COM1 Click Next
356. nly to the COPPER OUTPUT COPCIL BOARD KHz Acquire Timeout Time interval allowed to transfer the image from the MIM to the direct 1 90 seconds destination Default 60 6 24 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Table 6 7 Parameters for Supported Items Supported Items E4 Collation rH eC Print Quality Remote Image Deletion Common Text Tonescaling on Image Basis I Rotation Pivot Density lt Back Nets Finish Cancel Item Description Range Supported Select Supported Items to display the features in this table N A Items Collation Enables study mode operation at the KEYPAD and has the Destination print all of the Yes No films that are in the same study Select if the destination allows Collation Common Text Enables the user to enter text information including the macros for time date Yes No etc at the KEYPAD for printing at the bottom of each film This parameter will also be used by the MIM when doing format validation Select if the destination allows Common Text Tonescaling on Enables the changing of curve shape in the middle of a page and selecting a curve shape Yes No Image Basis series from the KEYPAD Select if the destination allows Tonescaling on Image Basis Pivot Density Enables the selection of a pivot density setting from the KEYPAD Select if the Yes No dest
357. nquire status of memory in IMAGER 11 29 01 13 17 27 960 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket INQ 11 29 01 13 17 28 2105 ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged receiving inquiry 11 29 01 13 17 28 2506 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item ANQ 504 504 0 0 to packet List ZItems 1 11 29 01 13 17 28 280 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response ANQ 504 504 0 0 IMAGER responded that available memory is 16 meg 504 blocks x 32K all contiguous with no holes or bad blocks 11 29 01 13 17 28 310 5 m952 cpp 48 m952 GetPrinterStatus called Printer 1 11 29 01 13 17 28 3506 16952 sendCommand cpp 1080 11952 sendCommand RQS Request status of the PRINTER 11 29 01 13 17 28 3806 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ROS 11 29 01 13 17 28 600 5 ecpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received IMAGER acknowledged 11 29 01 13 17 28 631 6 ccpacket cpp 799 M952 getPacketTask Adding item STA 1 RDY to packet List Items 1 11 29 01 13 17 28 671 5 m952 sendCommand cpp 1144 LIT Get Response STA 1 RDY IMAGER responded that status is Ready 11 29 01 13 17 28 741 6 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket ALI LaserImager cpp 660 CLaserlmager PollJobStatusChange ends LaserImager cpp 668 CLaserImager PollPrinterStatusChange starts LaserImager cpp 1174 PollPrinterStatusChangeHe
358. ns of software prior to V 3 2 only the curve series or the color print matching series could be run The curve series is used for the 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS Different contrast settings will produce a different looking image when printing the curve series 11 contrast settings can be used The user can select from 6 curve shape prints for each contrast setting The contrast series is used for all Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS and any IMAGERS connected to the 9410 ACQUISITION SYSTEM The correct TFT ULUT Transfer Function Table Universal Look Up Table should be selected before printing this contrast series The user can select from 16 images in the series The 160 LASER IMAGER requires the use of this contrast series to adjust image quality Setting the curve shape and the contrast settings depends on the MODALITY Some Autofilming links will send the values to use and some will use the default settings in the MIM The contrast setting could be sent with the DICOM information but defaults in the MIM are used in case these values are not sent In versions below V 3 2 only one default value was used by all Service Class Users SCUs Starting with 3 2 the default values for each SCU can be set at the MIM Starting with V 3 2 the SCU sends the MODALITY type body part and image tone adjustment information to the print and storage destinations The MODALITY type can be set up using the MIM Service Application and the body part if series is e
359. nstalled when the MIM is de energized B Energized B De energized C Installed MIM 200 with terminated video non passthrough for a MODALITY with multiple video outputs Ck Energized C De energized D Installed MIM 200 with non terminated video passthrough Same for both the energized and de energized states D Energized D De energized 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 35 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 3 30 Video Imaging Device with One Video Output to MONITOR Non terminated Passthrough IMAGING DEVICE MIM DEVICE VIDEO IN me VIDEO OUT IMAGING DEVICE MONITOR 2 H156 0114BC amp Important A MIM with a VIDEO 150 or 150LC INTERFACE BOARD must be energized 1f the MODALITY is in use active passthrough video and provides only one video output connection to the MONITOR 75 OHMS 3 36 NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Connecting a Telephone Line to an INTERNAL MODEM To install a telephone connection for a MIM that includes an INTERNAL MODEM connect to a telephone line as indicated in Figure 3 31 Figure 3 31 Connect MODEM BOARD to Telephone Line Telephone Drop Cable Line Jack TELCO Analog Line to PHONE Jack MIM Rear Jack Do not connect MODEM BOARD 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 37 SERVICE MANUAL Installing an EXTERNALMODEM An optional EXTERNAL MODEM can be connected to a MIM 200 or 25 PS for remote service access An analog dial up telephone line
360. o TFT by default FB Configuration Information FB Magnification Type CUBIC FB Smoothing Type 5 FB receives PLUT uid FB Illumination 2000 FB Reflected Ambient Light 10 IB Rows 512 IB Columns 548 IB Bits Allocated 8 Setting Image Box IB for Position 1 IB Bits Per Pixel stored 8 IB Pixel Aspect Ratio 1 1 IB Photometric Interpretation IB High Bit 7 IB Magnification Type CUBIC IB Smoothing Type 5 IB Polarity NORMAL from Dicom IB Configuration Information IB Set TFT Ver693c0 w87 IB Set Dry Contrast 6 IB Body Part DEFAULT from IB Image Tone Adjustment 0 from IB Color Profile DEFO from IB uses PLUT uid IB found an Image s PLUT IB Rows 512 setting Image Box IB for Position 2 IB Columns 548 11 49 SERVICE MANUAL 11 30 01 16 21 23 771 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3583 11 30 01 16 21 23 771 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3601 11 30 01 16 21 23 771 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3632 11 30 01 16 21 23 771 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3649 11 30 01 16 21 23 771 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3679 MONOCHROME2 11 30 01 16 21 23 782 5 11 30 01 16 21 23 782 5 11 30 01 16 21 23 782 5 11 30 01 16 21 23 792 3 11 30 01 16 21 23 792 5 11 30 01 16 21 23 792 5 Connection DB 11 30 01 16 21 23 792 4 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1333 LUT Ver693c0 w87 006 11 3
361. oControl VIDEO 150 only Pressed to automatically adjust PLL control N A Voltage voltage setting to ensure proper lock and minimum jitter AutoHSync to VIDEO 150 only Pressed to automatically adjust pixel clock N A Clock Hsync delay setting to minimize probability of horizontal line shift Figure 7 8 VIDEO 60 INTERFACE BOARD Pixel Clock Parameters VCO Diviso r YEO Frequency 171 4g Vsync Capacitor E Lock Detect Count 0 Gain Selling 5 Gain 60 MHz V Override Phase Frequency Detector Gain Gain 2 Setting Override Fine Phase Adjust Feedback will Lead Reference Feedback will Lag Reference Fisel Clock Timing Auto Pixel Clock 0 Delay 1 count 1 ns 2003 8 8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Figure 7 9 VIDEO 150LC INTERFACE BOARD Pixel Clock Parameters Post Scaler Divisor E Override 193 52 WCO Freg Fisel Clock Freg Yne Capacitor Lock Detect Count PLL Locked Phase Frequency Detector Gain Gain 32 2 Setting 5 Override Dynamic Phase Adjust Resolution Steps Clack Range 12 40MHz Setting Override Fisel Clock Delay Adjust Ds Delay Steps 0 15 Figure 7 10 VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD Pixel Clock Parameters VLL Divisor VL Freg 75 150 36 774 Vsyn
362. of pixels per millimeter for the destination 0 32 Minimum The number of columns that separate images in the horizontal direction The MIM uses 0 20 Horizontal this parameter to validate the format Separation Minimum Vertical The number of rows that separate image bands in the vertical direction The MIM uses 0 10 Separation this parameter to validate the format Trim Width Enabled The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction 0 5 when trim is on The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Trim Width The number of pixels reserved around the border of an image in the x and y direction 0 5 Disabled when trim is not on The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 24 Image Processing Parameters for Print Destinations Image Processing Item Description Range Image Processing Select Image Processing to display the information indicated in this N A table Color Select if the destination allows color images Yes No Color Grayscale Same Page Select if the destination allows the user to place color and grayscale Yes No images on the same page Edge Enhancement Allows the user to select edge enhancement parameters e g Yes No MODALITY type and image tone adjustment values from the KEYPAD Select if the destination allows edge enhancement Grayscal
363. of this ULUT set Curves 8 10 and 12 of this set are a subset of the U693C0 ULUT Set A contrast setting of 8 gives the lowest mid tone contrast in this group of 3 while a contrast setting of 12 gives the highest mid tone contrast These 3 curves have a lower mid tone brightness than curves 7 9 and 11 of this ULUT set 8 38 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images Because this ULUT set has such a variety of curve shapes with no simple relationship between contrast setting and either mid tone brightness or mid tone contrast this set may be primarily useful as a finder set to help a user decide on some other ULUT set as a final choice within which the curve shape varies in a more continuous intuitive way as the contrast setting is changed e g UPMSV3K 7693 0 or 0713 0 U693C0 Consists of S shaped variations about a linear in perceived brightness response For this ULUT set all curves intersect at the 50 point of maximum input meaning that all contrast settings will give the same mid tone brightness As the contrast setting 1s increased from 1 to 12 the mid tone contrast 1 e the contrast in the middle part of the grayscale 15 increased while the contrast in the very dark and very light parts of the grayscale is decreased This ULUT set is very suitable for CT MR and C Arm applications and is also sometimes useful for nuclear medicine applications 1000 800 Perceived Brightness n 5 10 20 30 40
364. ofilming Link Will the MIM be connected to a Qualified or Unqualified MODALITY A Qualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has been checked in the field with correct parameters The database in the Service Software for the MIM may also include this MODALITY in the Qualified list An Unqualified Input indicates that the MODALITY has not been checked in the field Consult TSC before attempting to set up an Unqualified Input Check that the operator can provide a clinical image to evaluate image quality after you finish setting up the Input The image must contain Grayscale including the brightest and darkest values 0 to 255 A D Counts White text on black background or black text on white background Sharp transitions and vertical lines amp Important e New MIMs set up with a test input Before adding new input delete this existing input from the Configuration menu Check the MODALITY DATABASE for information on parameters before continuing 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Input gt Direct Connect Direct Connect Input Configuration Auxiliary Bnard Logical Modality Control Type Control Input Type Channel Mame ID Mame Database Mame Com Com Part F DGTL Ge Advan GE Advants DE Msz Sal ALOMA Keypad COMS Configuration View Add Modify Delete Parameters Acquisition Autotilming Keypad
365. oftware automatically restarts the MIM Do not select Reconnect when the COMPUTER displays the Re establish Connection window Wait another 2 minutes for the KEYPAD to display the Acquisition window 4 Wait until the KEY PAD displays the Acquisition window Then use the KEYPAD to select Main Menu Service View System Information 5 At the KEYPAD check that the correct software version displays 6 Close any open windows on the LAPTOP COMPUTER 4 14 NOV 2003 8E8820 Upgrading MIM Software MIM Privacy Feature Introduction MIM software includes a Privacy feature that customers can use to prevent unauthorized users of a MIM from printing or storing patient data This feature allows customers to comply with the U S Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act HIPPA The Customer can elect to either enable or disable the privacy feature If the Privacy feature is enabled the customer can set up user accounts that will require each authorized MIM operator to login ata KEYPAD with a user name and password The Privacy feature is controlled from a Security Administrator Console SA Console The SA Console is a web page on the MIM that can be accessed using Internet Explorer or other web browser Each MIM unit has its own Security Administrator web page Usually the customer s Security Administrator will access the SA Console web page from a COMPUTER connected on the same local area network as
366. ollowing INTERFACE BOARDS The DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD The VIDEO INTERFACE BOARDS The OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD COPPER INTERFACE COPCIL BOARD and FIBER OPTIC INTERFACE FOPCIL BOARD 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and start the MIM Service Application 2 Select Connect gt Connect to MIM 3 Select Diagnostics Service Application Connection Connect Configure Logs Diagnostics Admin Window Help AES 2 x system Digital d Video d Connection1 Delivery Metwork Belay Connection Status Cannectinan ESEE 4 Select tests as follows e For tests of the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD select Digital For tests of a VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD select Video e For tests of an OUTPUT BOARD select Delivery The options are Optical COPCIL FOPCIL 5 Select as necessary from the options and click OK 6 Observe the following notes about DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD tests amp Important OPTO ISOLATOR test fails if the OPTO ISOLATOR BOARD is not installed The diagnostics for the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD include tests of the e Registers amp Interrupts FIFO amp RAM MODALITY INTERFACE OPTO ISOLATOR 7 Observe the following notes about VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD tests Important If MODALITY Capture Tests fail the VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD 1s not necessarily defective e The Input Video may not be present The parameters entered
367. on Information about the film is communicated between the MODALITY SCU and the PRINT SERVER SCP This includes number of copies priority type of medium film destination and status 11 29 01 13 32 39 711 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 761 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 831 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 891 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 921 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 961 5 11 29 01 13 32 39 991 5 11 29 01 13 32 40 021 5 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1670 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1689 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1746 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1817 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1826 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1888 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1982 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 2002 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 SCP Assoc 4 Creating Film Session FS N CREATE FS default Contrast 0 from Connection DB FS default Modality CT from Dicom Setting Film Session FS N SET FS Copies 1 FS Print Priority MED FS Using FilmBase from Connection DB FS Value received for FilmBase was BLUE FILM 4 foNCreate Create a film box The command to create a film box defines how the image will appear on film The information communicated includes film size type orientation format contrast density trim configuration information TFT ULUT etc 11 20 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29 01 11 29
368. on DB 11 30 01 16 21 23 351 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1616 SCP Assoc 10255 Connection DB 11 30 01 16 21 23 351 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1583 SCP Assoc 10255 Connection DB 11 30 01 16 21 23 361 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1063 SCP Assoc 10255 1 2 840 113564 3 5040 2001 11 30 14 22 30 3 11 30 01 16 21 23 361 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 1040 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 23 771 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3566 SCP Assoc 10255 11 30 01 16 21 23 771 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 848 SCP Assoc 10255 N SET 11 30 01 16 21 23 771 5 4030 23709187 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3576 SCP Assoc 10255 8E8820 NOV 2003 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 PrintSCPService cpp 3583 SCP Assoc 10255 DICOM PrintSCPService cpp 3632 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 SCP Assoc 10255 Troubleshooting FB get FilmSize from Dicom FB Using FilmType of 14INX17IN FB Film Orientation PORTRAIT FB Image Display Format FB Contrast 0 from Connection DB FB Set default contrast to 0 FB Unsupported Annotation Display FB Annotation Display Format FB Max Density 3 FB all DRY VIEW use Min Density FB Border Density BLACK FB Trim NO FB set t
369. on Type 3 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 35 SERVICE MANUAL 11 29 01 13 25 25 216 4 11 29 01 13 25 25 246 4 11 29 01 13 25 25 336 4 11 29 01 13 25 25 366 4 11 29 01 13 25 25 857 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 622 Aspect Ratio 13 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 623 Aspect Ratio V 15 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 708 Position of Image on Page x y 0 251 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 709 Scaled Size h w 826 1116 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 750 RenderImage End 11 29 01 13 25 25 877 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 364 Render End 11 29 0 13 25 25 907 6 11 29 0 13 25 25 937 6 11 29 01 13 25 25 967 6 11 29 01 13 25 25 997 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 017 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 047 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 077 4 11 29 01 13 25 26 107 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 137 6 11 29 01 13 25 26 167 5 11 29 01 13 25 26 187 5 11 29 01 13 25 26 2175 11 29 01 13 25 26 247 5 11 29 01 13 25 26 277 5 11 29 01 13 25 26 297 5 11 29 01 13 25 26 327 5 11 29 01 13 25 26 357 6 LaserImager cpp 324 CLaserlmager NewPrintJob starts Begin new print job LaserImager cpp 702 CLaserlmager Open starts maxRetries 100retryWaitSeconds 9 LaserImager cpp 740 Got LIT Open Mutex LaserImager cpp 745 lit init is done LaserImager cpp 768 lit open successful LaserImager cpp 770 CLaserlmager Open returns true PrintJob h 47 CPrintJob FinalConstruct this 0x20139293513153056
370. onnection The following procedure sets up one dial up modem connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 the desktop open My Computer and then open Dial Up Networking Select New The Network Connection Wizard starts In the New Phone Book Entry window Enter a name for this connection e Select the MODEM that is installed in your LAPTOP COMPUTER Click Next At the Server window select Send my plain text password if that s the only way to connect Click Next At the Phone Number window enter the telephone number for the target MIM and click Next Click Finish Your entry now appears in a pull down list of dial up connection entries Close the Networking and Dial up Connections window Repeat this procedure for each of the MIMs you expect to access through a MODEM You can create additional entries for MODEM connections later When you are done creating dial up entries continue with Installing SecureLink Client Software on Page 2 19 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Installing SecureLink Client Software For information about installing the SecureLink software see the SecureLink documentation on the Service Apps CD 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 19 SERVICE MANUAL Installing the MIM Service Application on your LAPTOP COMPUTER 1 Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER 2 Insert the CD ROM for the MIM Service Applica
371. ons MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1276 DVPI m pLaserImager NewPrintJob MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1312 DVPI Film Destination is not supported MAGAZINE is used MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1336 DVPI pDVPrintJob gt SetJobInfo MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1689 DVPI placeRenderedImage start MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1692 DVPI pDVPrintJob gt NewImageBox MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1728 DVPI Kernel Group is set to 2 MIMDryV iewPrintInterface cpp 1729 DVPI InterpolationNumber is set to 1 MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1734 DVPI Modality Group is set to 1 MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1735 DVPI Contrast is set to 6 MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1746 DVPI pDVImageBox SetImagelInfo MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1768 DVPI pDVImageBox gt PrintData pRiROMem MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1777 DVPI placeRenderedImage end MIMDryViewPrintInterface cpp 1365 DVPI printPageWithPageBuilder end DVPS JobID 0 has been LL LL rea Pe orm rm rm orm orm orm rm m rm LL dL LL Ll dll LLLI dI ma LL DICOM PageBuilder cpp 116 PageBuilder destructed 1 Dry ViewChainBuilder cpp 72 DryViewChainBuilder destructed TonescaleResolver cpp 486 TonescaleResolve PLUT TonescaleResolver Destructed TonescaleResolver cpp 328 TonescaleResolve PLUT PrinterTonescaleResolver Destructed ChainBuilder cpp 141 ChainBui
372. ork into more than 1 network period Gateway Address The IP Address of the Router used in a wide 4 fields 1 254 in which each field is separated by a period Transceiver Type The TRANSCEIVER type of the Ethernet circuit or NETWORK BOARD used for communication on the network This is a view only field UTP RJ45 is the only option for the MIM 200 Although the MIM 100 has various options RJ45 is recommended The following options are available only when using the NETWORK COMBO CARD 10base e UTP RJ45 Thickwire 10 base 5 Thinwire 10 base 2 RAS Server Begin IP Address Beginning IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool This IP Address must be lower than the End IP Address and located on the same subnet The Begin and End IP Addresses must in sequence 4 fields 1 254 in which each field is separated by a period RAS Server End IP Address End IP Address of the RAS Server static address pool This IP Address must be higher than the Begin IP Address and located on the same subnet The Begin and End IP Addresses must in sequence 4 fields 1 254 in which each field is separated by a period 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the Input for a DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD Setting Up the Basic Input Parameters Use this procedure to set up the DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD for the MIM 200 or MIM 100 Will the primary control of the MIM be the KEYPAD or an Aut
373. otice Display Do Not Display Use system default message Use custom message Custom Privacy Warning Notice Text 3 Click the Enabled or Disabled button 4 Click Save 5 Click Logout 8E8820 NOV 2003 4 17 SERVICE MANUAL 6 Restart the MIM for the change to take effect NOV 2003 8E8820 Section 5 Setting up a PRINTER Setting Up Parameters for the PRINTER To set up a local PRINTER for use with a PRINT SERVER see the SERVICE MANUAL for the PRINTER and the information in the following tables After setting the parameters for the PRINTER go to Section 6 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Setting up a PRINTER Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER To set up an 8100 LASER IMAGER that connects to a MIM use MPC to enter the values for the following parameters P6 DCR to STC Set to 8 or 12 depending on the pixel width from modalities Parameter Value Parameter Value System Configuration Image Quality Acquire Channel Digital User ID Enter ID per customer preference MODEM Initialization Accept default MODALITY Enter descriptive name for MODALITY Maximum Imageable 4096 Aspect Ratio 1 0 Columns Network Configuration Match Borders Option Usually enabled customer preference TCP IP Address Not applicable Force TFT to Film Dmin Usually disabled customer preference TC IP Net Mask Not applicable Pi
374. ouble click the 4 STUDY events from the Event Types Available to move them to Added Event Types e STUDY CREATED e STUDY DELETED e STUDY SCHEDULED e STUDY UPDATED 14 Close the window 13 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Additional Information MIM Details STANDARD PACS DEYI 15 From the STANDARD PACS DEVICE window click Save The BROKER 15 now configured to send N EVENTS REPORTS to the MIM MWLPMC amp Important To enter new data you can also change the settings by clicking Modify on the Device Manager window to see the STANDARD PACS DEVICE window 8 8820 NOV 2003 13 5 SERVICE MANUAL 13 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Warnings and Cautions Section 14 Warnings and Cautions Safety Instructions Read and understand all instructions in this section before using the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 e Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER Important The following safety information applies to all systems covered in this manual except where indicated A Warning This equipment is operated with hazardous voltage which can shock burn or cause death e Use only the power cord supplied with this equipment Remove wall plug before servicing equipment Never pull on cord to remove from outlet Grasp plug and pull to disconnect Do not operate equipment with a damaged power cord Do not use an extension cord
375. owing sequence of values 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 9 3 1 3 3 3 5 Group 5 GSDFLLOP All the contrast tables of this set are based on the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function parameterized with a D max of 3 5 and a D min of 0 2 For this ULUT Set the parameter which varies as the contrast setting 1s changed is the measured luminance of the lightbox in cd sq m As the contrast setting is changed from 1 through 12 the luminance is varied through the following sequence of values 2000 2210 2442 2699 2982 3295 3641 4024 4447 4914 5430 6000 cd sq m respectively Group 6 GSDFAAOP All the contrast tables of this set are based on the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function parameterized with a D max of 3 5 a D min of 0 2 and a lightbox luminance of 5500 cd sq m For this ULUT Set the parameter which varies as the contrast setting is changed is the ambient light fraction 1 the amount of reflected ambient light coming off the film expressed as a fraction of the lightbox luminance As the contrast setting is changed from 1 through 12 the ambient light fraction parameter goes through the following sequence of values 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 Groups 7 through 11 These include the UPMS3VK set 8 42 NOV 2003 8E8820 Completing the Installation Section 9 Completing the Installation Introduction This section includes procedures for installing a Koda
376. p 1288 Dim DeleteDataConnection starts LaserImager cpp 791 CLaserImager Close ends 11 29 01 13 25 38 645 6 11 29 01 13 25 38 665 4 I 11 29 01 13 25 38 725 2 lI 11 29 01 13 25 38 785 5 lI 11 29 01 13 25 38 815 6 hi 11 29 01 13 25 38 865 4 Log Continues Sample Log 9 PRINT SERVER to PRINTER Superset cmdset Idle State This log is fora MIM PRINT SERVER SCP communicating with a Kodak DryView LASER IMAGER during an idle situation using Superset cmdset The logs have been filtered to include only the log for the System General Subsystem set at level 6 PrintJob cpp 218 CPrintJob PrintPage returns 0 PrintJob h 55 CPrintJob FinalRelease this 0x20139293513153056 NetworkArbiter cpp 350 NetworkArbiter QueueRemove no print jobs pending on idle printers PhotonPrinter cpp 483 Ding is removing job 4 from the to be deleted list Destination cpp 4391 Destination Class is Handling GetAllIDirectDestinations PhotonPrinter cpp 503 83 ReadyEvent is signaled 11 38 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting DICOM Network MODALITY MODALITY SERVER PRINT SERVER PRINTER System General 09 44 48 123 6 8191 000000000 LaserImager cpp 624 CLaserImager PollJobStatusChange starts 09 44 48 153 6 8191 000000000 09 44 48 183 6 8191 000000000 Begin routine to poll PRINTER 09 44 48 213 6 8191 000000000 09 44 48 243 6 8191 000000000 09
377. p 233 LIT Send Command Del Def Img 3 2 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Del Def Img 3 2 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Del Def Img 3 215b5 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Del YOBOO ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Del Y ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Del Fmt 99 Box All dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Del Fmt 99 Box All ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Del Fmt 99 Box All1813 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Del YOBOO ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Del Y ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Del Fmt 99 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Del Fmt 99 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Del Fmt 99106c ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Del YOBOO ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Del Y LaserImager cpp 683 CLaserImager AddJobID starts LaserImager cpp 695 CLaserImager AddJobID ends LaserImager cpp 778 CLaserlmager Close
378. pad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor CKMenuScreen cpp 77 CK MenuScreen destructor called Sample Log 5 MIM Storage This log indicates the storage space available on the MIM and any storage algorithms that are being implemented It has been filtered to include only the Storage Subsystem at log level 5 11 29 01 13 42 10 692 6 DatabasePersistence cpp 2892 Storage Recovery Available Disk Space 100 11 29 01 13 42 40 725 6 DatabasePersistence cpp 2892 Storage Recovery Available Disk Space 100 11 29 01 13 43 10 808 6 DatabasePersistence cpp 2892 Storage Recovery Available Disk Space 100 11 29 01 13 43 40 8116 1 End of Log Sample Log 6 PRINT SERVER to PRINTER This log is for delivery from an SCP to a destination It has been filtered to include only the log for the Delivery Subsystem set at level 5 This subsystem does not show all communication between the MIM and the PRINTER but only internal processing such as image rendering in the MIM DatabasePersistence cpp 2892 Storage Recovery Available Disk Space 100 MODALITY MODALITY SERVER SERVER PRINTER 11 29 01 13 46 18 959 2 11 29 01 13 46 18 989 3 11 29 01 13 46 19 129 3 11 29 01 13 46 19 189 5 DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM RoutingAndDeliveryFactory cpp 744 Entering CreateOneShotRouting RoutingClass cpp 10789 RoutingConte
379. pe Storage Default Last Saved Reset Cancel 5 To change a Logging Level for any subsystem a Click the Increment or Decrement button next to the name and level number of the subsystem b Click Set Important e See the table above for recommended log levels for each subsystem Changing Log Levels only impacts active history after the time of the change 6 After completing troubleshooting reset the log level by selecting Default and clicking Reset 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 7 SERVICE MANUAL Retrieving the Activity History Log 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM and launch the MIM Service Application 2 Select Connect gt Connect to MIM 3 Select Logs 4 Set the Logging Level as instructed in the preceding procedure 5 From the Logs pull down menu select Activity History Get Activity History Yew From 2 m oF Yew Through Subsystern All gt Note The date time of the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM should match to enable correct time selections 6 Enter View From and View Through dates and times for the log to be retrieved according to the time set at the MIM gt Note The right 2 boxes in the View fields specify time in hours and minutes using the military system of 1 to 24 hours For example 23 and 41 corresponds to 11 41 PM 7 Use the Filter drop down menus to selec
380. pecifies whether the destination allows Presentation Lookup Tables PLUTs Yes No PLUTS are used to standardize tonescaling information for the same image from any type of PRINTER Information in PLUT includes curve shape contrast pivot density TFT set DMIN DMAX and border DMAX Parameter has no meaning for store destinations Extended Print These attributes MODALITY type body part and image tone adjustment Yes No Attributes be used by some destinations to enhance image quality The parameter attributes are automatically sent to the store destination 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 67 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS RIS GATEWAY Setting Up an HIS RIS Gateway for a MIM with TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD Important Each input channel must be set up To set up the MODALITY information the first time do all remaining steps If the MODALITY information has previously been set up advance to Step 3 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Input gt Direct Connect 2 At the Configuration window select Modality Info gt Modify 3 At the prompt Are you sure click OK The LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the Modality Info 4 At the line select the Down Arrow and highlight a MODALITY from the list gt Note The Type parameter enables preferences and tonescaling on some WORKSTATIONS sets up a
381. plication Interpolation Smooth Cubic Spline Cubic Spline Emulate 3M Extended Page Formats Notes For all Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS and 969 8800 160 LASER IMAGER and 1120 and 2180 LASER PRINTERS select Siemens for the Primary Control type select 3M parameters for the Primary Control Type For the Allowed by the MIM 100 only other models must have RS232 changed to RS422 See the Important at the top of Page 182 Applies to 3M Siemens only 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 41 SERVICE MANUAL Table 7 16 Autofilming Parameter Definitions and Range Item Description Range Port Id SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT MIM 100 COM 4 MIM 200 COM 4 6 8 OR 10 Baud Rate Baud Rate of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 Driver Type Driver protocol of the SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT MIM 100 RS422 MIM 200 RS422 Data Bits Number of bits for serial communications 7 8 Stop Bits Number of stop bits for serial communications 1 2 Parity Setting of parity for SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT None Even Odd ACK Wait Timer Acknowledgment wait timer The time in seconds that the MIM 1 999 will wait after it sends a message until the Imaging Device acknowledges that it received the message Ack Required Determines whether or not an acknowledgment is required Yes No from the host Memory
382. plies the appropriate method where Minify reducing the raw physical image to a new smaller physical size maintaining the aspect ratio of the original image removing pixel data An image might be minified if the image size is larger than the media in the laser imager Scale reducing Requested Image Size to a smaller size that can be successfully printed An image might be scaled if the requested image size cannot be magnified to the full size requested The full image is printed but the size of the image is reduced to allow it to print on the media that 15 closest to the requested size Minify Scale is the default Crop Select Crop when using Requested Image Size to remove the image s perimeter to allow the image to fit on the media and print the same scale as the anatomical area of interest Cropping Removing image data from the outer edges of the image so that it fits on the printable film area maintaining aspect ratio Cropping allows true size printing for larger images True size printing provides a common scale between images captured on analog systems that use medical x ray film exposed by phosphor screens in cassettes and printed digital images The anatomical area of interest is printed at the same size that it 15 captured on the analog system Caution With cropping the edges of the image file are removed If anatomical areas of interest are near an outer image edge they might be removed from the image when i
383. ply to 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER ICC Profile Does not apply Does not apply color compensation Contrast dry Type a number from to 15 except for 8600 and 8610 Does not apply LASER IMAGER see note Image Dmin Type 0 0 Type 0 0 Image Dmax Type a number from 1 7 to 3 2 for all except type 3 5 for 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER Type a number from 1 7 to 3 2 for 160 1120 2180 IMAGERS Modality Type Does not apply Select correct type Body Part Does not apply Does not apply to 160 1120 2180 IMAGERS Modality Group Type number from 1 to 11 Applies only to 8600 and 8610 Does not apply LASER IMAGER See note Curve Shape Does not apply Type a number from 0 to 69 30 is recommended Contrast wet Does not apply Type a number from 5 to 5 Recommend 0 for DMI Interpolation Type Select Cubic Applies only to 8600 and 8610 LASER Select Bilinear Cubic or IMAGER Replicate Convolution Group Type a number from 0 to 11 Applies only to 8600 and 8610 Does not apply LASER IMAGER Gamma Table Type 0 for Linear in Density Type 1 for Linear in Does not apply Xmittance Applies only to 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER Smoothing Type Type a number from 0 to 15 for all 1 is recommended for 8600 and 8610 LASER IMAGER Type a number from to 15 Image Polarity Select Normal or Reverse Select Normal or Reverse SCU Selecting Always Apply
384. popular perceived linear TFT 6 1s essentially the same as TFT 9 of PMSV3K and 15 also similar to TFT 8 of C3B5AX4 Where more than one TFT set contains a TFT that is satisfactory to the customer deciding which set to install should be based on the set that gives the customer more usable choices on a contrast test 8 16 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images MODALITY Set Contrast Density Comments AutoRad Workstation VER693C0 3 0 Limited experience typical others C3B5AX4 10 30 Workstation with AutoRad BOARD limited experience 2 3 0 Most CR s Kodak CR800 Agfa VIPs Kodak CR400 MagType cubic smoothing 5 local PRINTER set for 12 bit CT typical 693 0 6 or higher Head and body CT others 6 or higher Head and body SIECT87B 2 8 For Siemens Europe Contrast setting has little effect 28 E Psoe 6 350 DSA others VER713C0 002226801 29 DF5000 DSA C3B5AX4 ATS Dig Fluoro SFH301A4 2 9 Siemens Fluorospot H developed for HQ 1 15 o UI CREIB or Analogic SD100 MR pie CSS MR others VER693C0 Picker MR VER713C0 Lunar Arthroscan SIEMRS7B For Siemens Europe Contrast setting has little effect PMSVAK 9 39 Philips Gyroscan 30 Nuclear Medicine typical VER713CO0 X c 22 7 Nuclear Medicine others PMSV3K YM
385. pp 154 PhotometricInterpretation 1 1 DryViewChainBuilder cpp 155 Polarity 0 ChainBuilder cpp 453 Input Bit Depth 8 ChainBuilder cpp 461 WindowWidth 256 ChainBuilder cpp 462 WindowLevel 128 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting 11 29 01 13 46 25 508 3 11 29 01 13 46 25 538 3 11 29 01 13 46 25 568 3 11 29 01 13 46 25 598 3 11 29 01 13 46 25 628 3 11 29 01 13 46 26 850 2 11 29 01 13 46 26 880 3 11 29 01 13 46 26 910 3 11 29 01 13 46 26 940 3 11 29 01 13 46 26 970 3 11 29 01 13 46 27 000 3 11 29 01 13 46 27 040 3 11 29 01 13 46 27 441 3 11 29 01 13 46 34 912 2 11 29 01 13 46 36 103 2 sent to the printer 11 29 01 13 46 36 133 4 11 29 01 13 46 36 163 4 11 29 01 13 46 36 203 4 11 29 01 13 46 36 233 4 11 29 01 13 46 36 263 4 11 29 01 13 46 36 294 2 11 29 01 13 46 36 324 2 11 29 01 13 46 36 354 3 11 29 01 13 46 36 404 4 11 29 01 13 46 36 434 5 11 29 01 13 46 36 464 2 11 29 01 13 46 36 494 3 11 29 01 13 46 36 524 5 11 29 01 13 46 36 554 3 11 29 01 13 46 36 584 2 11 29 01 13 46 36 614 2 11 29 01 13 46 36 644 3 11 29 01 13 46 36 674 5 11 29 01 13 46 36 704 5 11 29 01 13 46 36 784 2 11 29 01 13 46 36 824 3 11 29 01 13 46 36 864 5 11 29 01 13 46 36 904 3 11 29 01 13 46 36 934 5 11 29 01 13 46 36 995 3 End of log 8E8820 NOV 2003 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3707 Getting image annotation box information Row 1 Column 1 DICOM FormatValidator cpp 3828 Checking for image annotati
386. ppears to be out of sync The desktop icons do not appear For best results check that the screen resolution for both the Host Server and Remote Server match 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 37 SERVICE MANUAL Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM A MONITOR KIT Part No 96 000 5311 4 is necessary for setting up the BIOS in a MIM The MONITOR KIT can also be used to connect with the MIM Service Application stored in the MIM to do service functions Before you can log on to the MIM with the MONITOR KIT you must establish a SecureLink connection to the MIM from your LAPTOP COMPUTER This is a security measure to prevent unauthorized access to the MIM using the MONITOR KIT MIM 200 667 MHz MIM 200 1 GHz MIM 200 12 GHz mnl 260 09090 9 0959590 090959090 09595909090 0080000090000 09690 09090959090 OOO co go O Co WOO KEYPAD MOUSE ADAPTER MONITOR PACS LINK 25 MIM 100 1 2 GHz MONITOR CABLE fo MOUSE MOUSE and KEYPAD ios MIM 100 433 MHz MONITOR 80 3024ECA H180 3024EC MONITOR VIEW COVER REMOVED 2 38 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software 1 Connect the MONITOR KIT to the MIM a Remove the COVER on the MIM if necessary b Connect the CABLES from the MONITOR KEYBOARD and MOUSE to the MIM gt Note To connect the CABLE of the MONITOR to the MIM 200 667 MHz use ADAPT
387. pter Layout Appendices e What is the MIM Introducing the MIM Benefits and Features Components SYSTEM Setup COMPUTER KEYPAD FOOTSWITCH or MINI KEYPAD BULKHEAD POWER SWITCH and CORD Power On LED FAN 5 minutes Operator Key Operator 2 Basic Operations Turning on the MIM Shutting Down the MIM Using the KEYPAD Privacy Feature UserName and Password functions protected by the Privacy Feature Selecting and Entering Information Overview of the Main Screens Setting SYSTEM Preferences 20 minutes Operator Key Operator 3 Working with Images Choosing a Profile Adjusting Imaging Options Storing Images Deleting Images and Pages Printing the Page Managing Image Transfer 25 minutes Operator Key Operator 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Module Duration Key Basic Operator 4 Creating and Managing Profiles Understanding Profiles Planning Profiles Viewing Profiles Creating Profiles Editing Profiles Renaming Profiles Deleting Profiles 10 minutes Operator Key Operator 5 Tone Scaling Overview Tone Scaling Options e Selecting Tone Scaling Options e Adjusting Tone Scaling Options 15 minutes Key Operator 6 Maintaining the MIM Backing Up the SYSTEM Setup e Setting the SYSTEM Time Troubleshooting Viewing SYSTEM Information Viewing Error Logs
388. r Figures 3 27 and 3 28 The CABLES are for each installed channel of a MIM 200 Important For Figures 3 27 and 3 28 The RS 232 RS 422 CONVERTER 2E4415 contains 2 DIP SWITCHES To locate the DIP SWITCHES remove the COVER from the side of the CONVERTER that has the hole for access e For the Hirschmann CONNECTORS the 2 DIP SWITCHES must be set to the ON position This provides power to the Hirschmann CONNECTOR For some versions of the Pritzel CONNECTOR the 2 DIP SWITCHES might have to be reset 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 33 SERVICE MANUAL Table 3 12 Siemens Imaging Device CABLES for Digital Autofilming Catalog CABLE Description Length Number Notes RS 485 DATA CABLE DB37 10 m 32 8 ft 197 2330 Both ends are male F F gender changer included 45 m 147 6 ft 877 7021 The CONNECTORS are not installed Both ends are male F F gender changer included RS 485 ADAPTER CABLE for the 1 m 3 2 ft Included with the MIM 200 MIM 200 RS 232 RS 422 Conversion Kit 121 2018 DB25 to DBI5 RS 232 SERIAL CONTROL CABLE 1 8 m 6 ft Included with Conversion Kit SERIAL CONTROL CABLE 10 m 32 8 ft 819 2742 Male end connects to the MIM Female end RS 422 DB15 45 m 147 6 ft 8603599 connects to MODALITY KEYPAD CABLE 3 m 9 8 ft Included with the KEYPAD KEYPAD Extension CABLE Extends the 12 m 39 4 ft 8815144 Both ends of the CABLE have blue labels One KEYPAD CABLE to a lengt
389. r LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 or Windows NT This procedure enables a Remote Access Service RAS connection to a MIM over a serial line This is the normal mode of connection to the MIM You can use this procedure To access the MIM that you physically connected with the serial cable To establish a pass through connection to any other MIM on the same local area network as the first MIM Note Before you can connect using this procedure you must have completed the setup tasks listed in Setup Tasks on Page 2 3 on your LAPTOP COMPUTER Normally you will set up these items during MIM training 1 De energize your LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM 2 Is there an external MODEM connected to this MIM Yes No Continue with Step 3 Advance to Step 5 3 De energize the MODEM 4 Disconnect the MODEM cable from the MIM SERIAL PORT 5 Connect the SERIAL CABLE TL 5224 between the SERIAL PORT of the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the COM 1 Service PORT of the MIM 6 Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER and the MIM 7 Log on to your LAPTOP COMPUTER 8 From the desktop on the LAPTOP COMPUTER click the shortcut to Connect to MIM Products gt Note This shortcut was created when you LAPTOP COMPUTER was set up for a direct serial port connection 9 At the Connect to window type Service for the user name 10 Click Accept in the Network Protocol Connection Result screen 11 Type Servic
390. r images Yes No Color Grayscale Same Page Select if the destination allows the user to place color and grayscale Yes No images on the same page Grayscale Select if the destination allows grayscale images Yes No Minify Crop Formerly Decimation Indicates if the destination can recognize images Yes No with actual dimensions that exceed the dimensions of the printable film area Select if the destination allows Minify Crop Maximum Image DMAX Enter the maximum image DMAX value that is allowed by the 0 0 3 8 destination 6 30 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Table 6 12 M952 Usage Parameters M952 Usage Item Description Range M952 Select M952 to display the information indicated in this table N A Minimum Horizontal Vertical Enter the minimum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is 0 64 Magnification allowed by the destination This parameter does not apply to store destinations Maximum Horizontal Vertical Enter the maximum Horizontal and Vertical Magnification value that is 0 64 Magnification allowed by the destination This parameter does not apply to store destinations Minimum DMAX for M952 Enter the minimum DMAX value that is allowed by the destination when 1 5 2 0 Command Devices mapping to click counts 8 8820 NOV 2003 6 31 SERVICE MANUAL This page is intentionally blank 6 32 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER
391. r parameter values are provided in Table 8 4 Fora TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD Display the Keypad Svcs menu After making a selection adjust within the Imaging Options menu Fora PRINT KEYPAD Display the Machine Setup menu After making a selection adjust within the Imaging Options menu Table 8 4 SCU Parameters for Images Set by KEYPAD For Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS For other Kodak LASER IMAGERS PRINTERS Parameter TOUCHSCREEN KP PRINT KP TOUCHSCREEN KP PRINT KP TFT ULUT See Note below See Note below Curve Shape Enter a number from 0 to Enter a number from 0 to 6 9 6 9 Contrast Enter a number from 1 to Enter a number from Enter a number from 5 to Enter a number from 5 to 15 11015 5 5 Dmax Enter a number from 0 01 Enter a number from Enter a number from 0 01 Enter a number from 0 01 to 3 99 0 01 to 3 99 to 3 99 to 3 99 Dmin Enter a number from 0 00 Enter a number from Enter a number from 0 00 Enter a number from 0 to to 3 98 0 to 3 98 to 3 98 3 98 Interpolation Select Curve Replicate Select Curve Select Curve Replicate Select Curve Replicate Bilinear or None Replicate Bilinear Bilinear None Bilinear None None Border Select Black or Clear Select Black or Clear Select Black or Clear Select Black or Clear Border Dmax Enter 3 99 3 99 Polarity Select Normal or Select Normal or Reverse Reverse Note Selection varies by MODAL
392. r to select a border around each Yes No image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices Aspect Ratio Mix in Select if the destination allows Mixed aspect ratio in the same row The MIM uses this Yes No Row parameter when it validates the format Image Size Mix in Select if the destination allows a mixed image size in row This indicates if the image Yes No Row size can be changed in a row independent of the page format The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format Requested Image Select if the destination allows the user to request an image size This indicates if the Yes No Size destination can print images at a specific size The MIM uses this parameter when it NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER direction The MIM uses this parameter when it validates the format Item Description Range Requested Size Mix Select if all images on the page should have the same requested size The MIM uses this Yes No on Page parameter when it validates the format Supports True Select if the destination allows a true landscape orientation Yes No Landscape Maximum Enter the maximum images per band allowed by the destination 1 32 Per Band Maximum Bands Enter the maximum bands per page that 1s allowed by the destination 1 32 Per Page Maximum Image Enter the number of maximum image columns that are allowed by the destination 0 5000 Columns Maximum I
393. r to validate the format Trim Select if the destination allows Trim This allows the user to select a border to around Yes No each image from the KEYPAD or from other input devices Aspect Ratio Mix in Select if the destination allows mixed aspect ratio in the same row The MIM uses this Yes No Row parameter to validate the format Image Size Mix in Select if the destination allows mixed image sizes in row Allows the image size to be Yes No Row changed separately of the page format The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Requested Image Select if the destination allows the user to select an image size The MIM uses this Yes No Size parameter to validate the format Requested Size Mix Select if the destination allows all images the page to have the same requested size Yes No on Page The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format True Landscape Select if the destination allows a true landscape orientation Yes No 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 55 SERVICE MANUAL Item Description Range Maximum Images Enter the maximum images per band allowed by the destination 1 32 Maximum Bands Enter the maximum bands per page allowed by the destination 1 32 Per Page Maximum Image Enter the number of maximum image columns allowed by the destination 0 5000 Columns Maximum Image Enter the number of maximum image rows allowed by the destination 0 5400 Rows Pixel Pitch Enter the number
394. re Connecting Your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM There are several methods of connecting your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM Connection Methods Method Page number Connecting to MIM using a SERIAL CABLE for LAPTOP Page 2 25 COMPUTERS with Windows 98 Connecting to MIM using a SERIAL CABLE for LAPTOP Page 2 27 COMPUTERS with Windows 2000 or Windows NT Connecting to a MIM using a MODEM connection Page 2 28 Connecting to a MIM with a network connection Page 2 29 Connecting to a MIM with aNETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE Page 2 30 VPN Virtual Private Network Internet connection Page 2 30 Note Before you can connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM by any of the above methods you must complete the LAPTOP COMPUTER setup tasks listed on Page 2 3 amp Important For all of these connection methods you must know the IP Address of the MIM you wish to access The IP Address of the MIM is recorded in A pouch on the side of the MIM The View Service Information screen of the KEYPAD Select Service Menu gt Configuration Menu Network Setup gt IP Address For V 6 0 and above the IP Address for a newly ghosted MIM 100 MIM 200 or PS 25 is 123 123 123 10 The default RAS Pool IP Address is 123 123 123 200 Starting and Using SecureLink As a part of each of the MIM connection methods you must use SecureLink to authenticate the connection The general procedure for conne
395. s Protocol DICOM 3 0 Logical Name DICOM DICOM Port Num 1024 Primary Control Type Keypad Conventional Port Cancel Important Except to select the DICOM Port Number or Com Port do not change information in the Network Input Parameters window See Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Network Input Parameter Settings Primary Control Primary Control DICOM Port Number Type Com Port Configurable from 1 65535 Generally set to 1024 5040 Use default Keypad Conventional Port 5 7 9 or 11 3 In the pull down menu for Com Port the following are the standard port assignments For MIM 200 2 4 GHz select COM11 For all other MIM 200 select COMO For 25 PS select COMS 8E8820 NOV 2003 6 9 SERVICE MANUAL gt Note Com Port assignments may need to change for Combo boxes See Table 6 4 on Page 3 8 for the functions and locations of COM ports for all MIMs 4 Click OK IT etwork Input Configuration ri DICOM 3 0 1024 DICOM COM 5 Click Close 6 10 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Setting Up the KEYPAD for Date Format and Operating Language 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Input gt Keypads gt Modify Parameters System E xX Operating Language Date Format American European C Japanese Cancel
396. s IDLE Spurious interrupts Total 2695692801 Current 0 Enter selection gt 7 CPOI Test Get OI Revisions 4 29 1999 10 53 48 CPOI SEND BOOTCODE REVISION requests CPOI Boot Code Rev 1 0 4 MIMOI Boot Code Rev 1 0 4 CPOI SEND APPCODE REVISION requests CPOI App Code Rev 1 0 4 MIMOI App Code Rev 1 0 4 amp Important The Debug Utilities are password protected and for use in program debugging only To execute item 6 Debug Utilities you must call the TSC for the password and instructions 6 To determine the MIM IO firmware version select item 7 The version must match the version displayed in Checking Service Tracking on Page 6 2 11 64 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting UTILITIES MENU 1 Get Current Date amp Time 3 CPCP Buffer Address 4 CPCP Buffer Tables 6 Debug Utilities Trace 8000 7 Get OI Firmware Revisions 9 Set Current Date amp Time CPOI Status IDLE Enter selection gt 8 CPOI Ver 1 2 Boot PROM Ver 1 0 8 Run All CPOI Diagnostic Tests Spurious interrupts Total 2695692801 Current 0 Tests run 23 CPOI Diagnostic Run All Tests 4 29 1999 10 53 CPOI RUN DIAGNOSTIC request CPOI Diag Result command X10001 All tests passed 4 29 1999 10 54 11 7 To execute the CPOI and MIM OI onboard diagnostics select item 8 Caution Before returning operation of the MIM to the customer de energize and energize the L
397. s are On 8 Select Cancel to exit the screen Note After the correct software licenses are enabled the MIM 15 ready to be set up 8E8820 NOV 2003 4 13 SERVICE MANUAL Installing MIM DEVICE DRIVERS and FIRMWARE Important Use this procedure to install software from the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM to upgrade MIM DEVICE DRIVERS or install new FIRMWARE in any of the following MIM components VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD e KEYPAD gt Note The software which will be transferred in the following procedure was loaded onto the LAPTOP COMPUTER when it was set up See Installing the LAPTOP COMPUTER Software for MIM Products in Section 2 1 Connect LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM through Dial Up Networking See Section 2 MIM Service Application to the MIM See Section 2 2 At the MIM Service Application window select Admin gt Update Software 3 Select the correct version and then select OK amp Important The MIM displays the File Transfer Progress window Do not abort the procedure which takes 5 to 10 minutes to complete Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the File Transfer Progress completion During this time the File Transfer Progress window might indicate 1 to 2 minutes of no activity e After 5 to 10 minutes the COMPUTER displays the message MIM Software has been successfully updated The MIM system will be restarted At this time the s
398. s the fine phase adjust feedback LEAD LAG Default LEAD Dynamic Phase Adjust Resolution VIDEO 150LC only Specifies the number of steps available for the pixel clock phase delay adjustment The value is calculated unless overridden 0 1 3 Default 0 Dynamic Phase VIDEO 150LC only Allows for override of the dynamic phase On Off Off relative to the data phase for the PLL Each step represents a phase shift of about 1 nanosecond For RGB 3 separate channels may be adjusted Adjust Res adjust resolution value Override Pixel Clock Timing VIDEO 60 only Specifies the pixel clock phase adjustment 0 255 Default 0 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 27 SERVICE MANUAL Parameter Description Range Pixel clock Delay VIDEO 150LC only Specifies the pixel clock phase adjustment 0 15 Default 0 Adjust relative to the data phase for the PLL Each step represents a phase shift delay of about pi 8 RADIANS For RGB 3 separate channels may be adjusted Control Voltage VIDEO 150 only VCO tuning voltage setting Used to provide 0 63 Default 32 minimum jitter and fast lock up times HSync to Clock VIDEO 150 only Pixel clock to horizontal sync pulse clock 0 255 Default 0 Delay delay Used to prevent line shift artifacts which may occur because of race conditions Auto Pixel Clock When pressed automatically adjusts pixel clock phase setting to N A maximize pixel to pixel contrast Aut
399. sary 10 100baseT A CSMA CD Ethernet LAN using Twisted Pair Wire with a baseband of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps The IEEE standard for 24 gauge UTP for Ethernet American National Standards Institute Adaptive Speed Leveling ASL keeps the MODEM on line operating at the highest possible speed and constantly checking data integrity AUI Attachment Unit Interface A 15 pin CONNECTOR usually with a transceiver used with Ethernet connection CP Command SSS CFOL thernet passive COAXIAL CABLE that sends digital signals for a network in which the interconnections contain active elements A LAN standard that uses a BUS topology with CSMA CD access control A LAN that can bridge operating systems and ignore inherent differences in data and file structures to promote reliable interconnections HIS RIS Hospital Information System Radiology Information System A central point or concentrator in a star topology where connections meet Network communications flow hrough the HUB nternet Internet Protocol 00000 c Area Network A combination of COMPUTER hardware and software that connects several COMPUTERS and peripherals to provide communication and access to shared data bps Qualified Input The MODALITY has been field tested with correct parameters The database in Service Software for he MIM might also include this MODALITY in the Qualified list RJ 11 274 WIRE MODULAR CONNECTORS
400. se Study Info or Patient List screen on the KEYPAD to stop querying the HIS RIS Gateway every 2 minutes 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt HIS RIS Gateway 2 Press Reset The IP Address 15 cleared 7 70 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for the BAR CODE READER Option Setting up the BAR CODE READER The BAR CODE READER supports the bar code standard 39 used by most HIS RIS systems and full ASCII decode The BAR CODE READER can be configured to work with or without a HIS RIS system to reduce or eliminate the user entry of patient demographics at the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD or KEYBOARD 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Input gt Direct Connect Direct Connect Input Configuration Logical Control Type Control Input Board Lhannel Database Mame Com Part Lom Port D igital COM Video Bd 1 Ch 1 vidbl Acuson 128 xXP 3 4 10 60Hz Keypad LLM5 Configuration Add Modify Delete Parameters Acquisition Autafilming Keypad Modality Info gt Note Changing parameters in the following procedure will take the system off line 2 To display the Parameters Touchscreen Keypad window click e Keypad Modify OK 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 71 SERVICE MANUAL Parameters
401. ses this parameter to validate the format Row Symmetric Enables the user to enter formats that only have 1 line of symmetry in the vertical Yes No Formats direction from an Autofilming Link or through a DICOM network The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Slide Format Enables the user to select the slide format from the KEYPAD or from other Yes No inputs The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Super Slide Enables the selection of super slide format from the KEYPAD or from other inputs Yes No Format The MIM uses this parameter to validate the format Allowable A list of formats that the destination allows This list can be customized to control Yes No Formats what destination the user sees Each format 2up 4up etc has a setting 8 8820 NOV 2003 6 27 SERVICE MANUAL Table 6 10 Page Formatting Parameters Page Formatting Aspect Ratio Mis in Row Image Size Mix in Row Requested Image Size IW Requested Size Mix on Page True Landscape Image Size Mix in Std DICOM Annotation Box Requested Size Scale Requested Size Mix in Aow Trim Ranges aximum Images Per Band 20 hd aximum Bands Page 20 Maximum Image Columns 0 Maximum Image Rows 0 Pixel Pitch pixels mm 12 8205 Minimum Horizontal Separations Mininoun Vertical Separation Trim Width Enabled Tnm Width Disabled 0 lt Back Finis
402. set up an Unqualified Input e Check that the operator can provide a clinical image to evaluate image quality after you finish setting up the Input The image must contain Grayscale including the brightest and darkest values 0 to 255 A D Counts White text on black background or black text on white background Sharp transitions and vertical lines amp Important e The MIM comes from the factory set up with a test Input Before adding a new Input you should delete this existing Input from the Direct Connect Input Configuration menu See Tables 7 6 through 7 11 for descriptions of the parameters that you will enter in this procedure Consult the MODALITY DATABASE for parameter information before proceeding 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Input gt Direct Connect Direct Connect Input Configuration E4 Auniliar Board Logical Modality Control Type Control Input Type Channel Mame 10 Mame Database Mame Com Port Port Video Bd 1 Ch 1 vidbl GET GE Adv Windows Wks 50260 Hz MS352 F831 COM4 Keypad LOMs Configuration View Modify Delete Parameters Acquisition Autaofilring Keypad Modality Info 2 At the Direct Connect Input Configuration window highlight the test Input and click Delete 3 At the message Executing this command will delete the input from the system Are you sure select Yes T
403. sing the Display Keypad before the 25 Print Server can be safely powered down Installing the 25 PS on an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER If the 25 PS will be used with an 8100 or 8200 LASER IMAGER it should be installed on the back of the LASER IMAGER If it will be used with an 8500 or 8700 LASER IMAGER it will normally be installed on a wall See Installing the 25 PS ona Wall Instructions for installing an 8100 LASER IMAGER in a MOBILE are included the MOBILE STRAP KIT 96 0000 4045 9 This KIT is used to fasten the LASER IMAGER to the wall of the MOBILE VAN Before attaching the LASER IMAGER install the 25 PS on the BACK PANEL of the LASER IMAGER and install the UPS on the floor of the VAN as instructed in this procedure Figure 3 1 Installing a 25 PS 8100 LASER IMAGER SCREW Holes 25 PS 1 Install the 25 PS on the 8100 LASER IMAGER using 5 mm SCREWS The CONNECTORS of the 25 PS must be adjacent to the CONNECTORS of the LASER IMAGER Note Installation on the 8200 LASER IMAGER is similar except the 25 PS is installed below the FILTER on the BACK PANEL 2 Tighten the SCREWS 8E8820 NOV 2003 3 3 SERVICE MANUAL Installing the 25 PS on a Wall Installation of the 25 PS on a wall is an option for any site ANCHOR FASTENERS and SCREWS 4 each for installation on DRYWALL are included with the 25 PS If the 25 PS will be installed on another type of wall the customer must supply FASTENE
404. st conform to DICOM 3 0 print class protocol Input Data Formats Allowed Point to Point Grayscale Video Point to Point Color Video Point to Point Grayscale Digital KEYPAD Study Management Requests Autofilming KCL Siemens 952 831 Hitachi Toshiba YMS DICOM Print Request Grayscale or Color DICOM Part 10 File Patient Demographics KEYPAD KEYBOARD HIS RIS Broker DICOM MODALITY Worklist Management SCU TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD 3M Output Options Network Output Local PRINTER Output Fiber Optic Output Copper Output Ethernet Output 8 8820 NOV 2003 A NETWORK INTERFACE PORT on the MIM provides the connection for an Ethernet IObaseT or 100baseT NETWORK A MIM can be set up to send images to as many as 25 print or store destinations on the network The following options are available for output to a local PRINTER Only one output BOARD can be included in a MIM A FIBER OPTIC OUTPUT BOARD FOPCIL is used to drive LASER IMAGERS from Kodak with fiber optic inputs The FOPCIL provides a digital output interface to match the digital input interface in LASER IMAGERS from Kodak Both image and COM outputs are fiber optic 2180 and 1120 LASER PRINTERS require a single FIBER OPTIC CABLE and are driven by an OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD A COPPER OUTPUT BOARD COPCIL is used to drive LASER IMAGERS from Kodak with copper image and COM inputs The COPCIL provides a digital output interface to match the digital input interface in
405. strokes between a DISPLAY KEYPAD and a MIM SCP It has been filtered to include only the log for the Keypad Subsystem All other logs are set to 0 level MODALITY MODALITY SERVER PRINT SERVER KEYPAD KEYPAD 11 29 01 13 37 24 901 6 11 29 01 13 37 24 941 6 11 29 01 13 37 25 111 6 DICO DICOM DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor CKScreen cpp 374 CKScreen OnDownButtonPressed called ConventionalKeypad cpp 1504 CK received the command Oxffffffcl from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 36 29 371 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 36 29 401 6 DICOM CKScreen cpp 374 CKScreen OnDownButtonPressed called 11 29 01 13 36 29 551 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 1504 CK received the command Oxffffffcl from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 36 32 135 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 36 32 185 6 DICOM CK MenuScreen cpp 52 CKMenuScreen constructor called 11 29 01 13 36 32 215 6 DICOM CK MenuScreen cpp 2727 CKSDisplayJobs constructor called 11 29 01 13 36 32 355 6 DICOM CK MenuScreen cpp 3399 CKSDisplayActiveJobs constructor called 11 29 01 13 36 32 385 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0xb8 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 36 32 425 4 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 468
406. t Note A 30 day warranty ONLY is included with the new FIBER OPTIC BOARD and the MIM 8E8820 NOV 2003 10 1 SERVICE MANUAL This page is intentionally blank 10 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Section 11 Troubleshooting Introduction This section provides instructions for troubleshooting the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 MIM 100 Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER 25 PS Troubleshooting includes Identification and location of field replaceable parts inside the MIM 100 and MIM 200 1 2 GHz enclosure Procedures for using the MIM Service Application to run diagnostics Instructions for using the Activity History Log Error History Log and Console Log Samples of logs Procedures for using pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE to run diagnostics Information on Power On Self Test beep codes power on problems OOOOUOO U Instructions for troubleshooting the Common Protocol Optical Interface Replacing the MIM HARD DRIVE CD ROM DRIVE or FLOPPY DRIVE er 4 ESD Possible damage from electrostatic discharge The parts inside the MIM are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge Use proper grounding equipment during all service procedures 1 Loosen the screw securing the MIM COVER and it as shown H180_3042AC 2 Ifremoving the HARD DRIVE only remove the 4 SCREWS securing HARD DRIVE to the DRIVE BAY If remo
407. t GetCommaDelimitedPatientName Patient cpp 920 Entering Patient GetSetFields Patient cpp 1003 Entering Patient GetKey Patient cpp 960 Entering Patient SetStudyKey 11 29 01 13 25 17 675 6 DICOM Patient cpp 1050 Entering Patient ReleaseRef DeliveryJob cpp 313 DeliveryJob Created 4 11 29 01 13 25 17 495 6 11 29 01 13 25 17 705 3 11 32 NOV 2003 8E8820 11 29 01 13 25 17 755 4 11 29 01 13 25 17 785 4 mimimum setting 11 29 01 13 25 17 8153 11 29 01 13 25 17 845 4 11 29 01 13 25 17 865 3 11 29 01 13 25 18 656 4 numBandsPerPage 1 11 29 01 13 25 18 686 4 minimum setting 11 29 01 13 25 18 716 3 11 29 01 13 25 18 747 4 11 29 01 13 25 18 777 3 11 29 01 13 25 18 807 4 numBandsPerPage 1 11 29 01 13 25 18 837 4 minimum setting 11 29 01 13 25 18 867 3 11 29 01 13 25 18 897 4 11 29 01 13 25 18 917 3 11 29 01 13 25 19 017 4 numBandsPerPage 1 11 29 01 13 25 19 047 4 minimum setting 11 29 01 13 25 19 077 3 11 29 01 13 25 19 107 4 11 29 01 13 25 19 137 3 11 29 01 13 25 19 177 4 numBandsPerPage 1 11 29 01 13 25 19 207 4 minimum setting re rm rm Troubleshooting Destination cpp 2728 GetMinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 2670 numBandsPerPage 1 Get band separation data from Database for a Format 1 page Band separation is the number of pixels between bands on film Format 1 is a she
408. t Response Res Y ss sendImagelInfo cpp 297 BOX Free form Format boxID 2 ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Box Id 2 Fmt 99 Loc 132 666 Size 4096 4096 mea LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LI LL dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Box Id 2 Fmt 99 Loc 132 666 Size 4096 4096 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Box Id 2 Fmt 99 Loc 132 666 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags cepacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Box YOB14 ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Box Y 1 ss sendImagelInfo cpp 302 STO Free form Format ss sendImageInfo cpp 303 LIT Send Command Sto Img 2 Depth 8 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Sto Img 2 Depth 8 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Sto Img 2 Depth 817d4 ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags cepacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ImageBox cpp 283 CImageBox SetImagelInfo returns 0x 20139293510 ImageBox cpp 311 CImageBox PrintData starts 1 ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Sto Y Size 1024 10241 AD3 ss sendImageData cpp 161 LIT Get Response Sto Y Size 1024 1024 ImageBox cpp 394 lit sendImageData time 0 88649 seconds PrintJob cpp 186 CPrintJob PrintPage starts ss printPage
409. t is the newer ULUT Set U1 1095 described below This ULUT Set has a diversity of curve shapes designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of imaging MODALITIES Its 12 curves consist of 6 saggy curves that span a wide range of mid tone brightnesses and 3 S shaped curves at each of 2 mid tone brightnesses The saggy curves are often used for printing Ultrasound and nuclear medicine images while the S shaped curves are widely used for printing CT and MR images 600 m em Se awe T Eu Len E ec i an a 4 jr 200 MEUM A aa e e Vett bae ai n 0 5 10 2l gn 95 100 Sb lagu w Perceived Brightness The number order of the curves tables in this set is designed so that when a contrast test is requested that yields 2 films with 3 columns of 2 images on each film the first film shows the 6 images printed from upper left to lower right using the 6 saggy curves On the second film the left column shows the images printed using the first group of 3 S curves and the right column shows the images printed using the second group of 3 S curves For these curves overall image brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 to 6 These curves are often preferred over S shaped curves by radiologists who are working with MODALITIES such as Ultrasound or nuclear medicine 8E8820 NOV 2003 8 37 SERVICE MANUAL eal Laeti 10 20 30 40 50 60 fo 80 10 95 10
410. t is printed Do not use cropping for images with areas of interest near the edges or corners Text Box Relocation Allows patient and exam information to be cut and placed back in a cropped image Caution When Top or Bottom is selected the corners are cut and placed back into the cropped image If anatomical areas of interest are near the image corners image data might be skewed or obscured if the corner areas are moved If anatomical areas of interest are near an image corner select None before you print Patient and exam information in any area but the top or bottom corners is not supported Depending on the location the information might be cropped from the image 8 8 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images Using the DISPLAY KEYPAD to Set Up Image Parameters for the SCP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Send an image from each SCU to record its IP Address with the MIM Press Menu on the DISPLAY KEYPAD to display the Main Menu Press Down Arrow until the cursor is at Service Menu Press Menu to display the Service Menu gt Exit Menu Machine Setup Menu Configuration Menu Diagnostics Menu SCP Services Press Down Arrow until the cursor is at SCP Services Press Menu The screen displays the IP Address and description of each SCU that is connected to the MIM gt Exit Menu 149 98 202 203 MIM 10 211 23 129 Arrhus DCP 129 176 155 74 Mayo DCP Press Dow
411. t the Input and the Subsystem log you want to retrieve 8 Click OK 9 Select the mode of retrieval To view the log on the MONITOR of the LAPTOP COMPUTER click View Log To store the log on the HARD DRIVE of the LAPTOP COMPUTER click Save As 11 8 NOV 2003 8E8820 Troubleshooting Interpreting the Activity History Log The retrieved Activity History Log includes data from all subsystems that were operating during the time selected for retrieval except for subsystems that were filtered out The log will display this data at the selected level of detail Following is a sample section of an Activity History Log Activity History Log Previous o3 14 01 05 14 01 09 14 01 o3 14 01 o3 14 01 O3 14 01 o3 14 01 o3 14 01 O3 14 01 09 14 01 oO3 14 01 o3 14 01 O3 14 01 o3 14 01 o3 14 01 O3 14 01 O3 14 01 o3 14 01 03 14 01 O3 14 01 o3 14 01 05 14 01 O3 14 01 03 14 01 03 14 01 Date Time 224 224 734 224 224 7 34 zb stag ue saga BELT D zug zu 140 740 740 40 740 740 740 40 241 241 42 242 243 921 2 1031 00000001 921 2 1031 00000001 asl 2 1031 00000001 asl 2 1031 00000001 asl 2 1031 00000001 asl 2 1031 00000001 151 O0100 00486709 151 2 O0100 00486709 151 2 O0100 00486709 144 2 Anonymous 969 2 0102 00489781 969 2 0102 00489781 05s OL02 00489781 103 2 0102 00489781 103 2 0102 0048978
412. talling pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE pcAnywhere software and installation instructions are provided on CD ROM 1 Insert the CD into your LAPTOP COMPUTER 2 Follow the installation instructions included in the package When installed pcAnywhere will appear in the Windows programs list as Symantec pcAnywhere 3 Continue with the next procedure Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere A pcAnywhere remote connection item is a file of the information needed to make a pcAnywhere connection from your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a target MIM The remote connection item appears as an icon in the pcAnywhere Manager window on your LAPTOP COMPUTER 1 From the task bar Select Start gt Programs gt Symantec pcAnywhere 27 pcAnywhere Manager E _ B x File Edit view Tools Help Hosts Remotes Exit 2 Remote NETWORK CABLE DSL Remote Control and File Transfer For Help press F1 2 2 Click Add Remote pcAnywhere Remote Properties New Remote E E x Connection Info Settings Automated Tasks Security Options Protect Item 01 d Please select a device for this connection Item To customize the device click Details Device list Lucent Win Moder Details L CoM LI COM2 CI COM3 LI COM4 O SFs CI NetBlos Launch in File Transfer made 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 21 SERVICE MANUAL 3 On the Conn
413. tart 11 30 01 13 09 39 048 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 352 DiskArbiter Run done checking queue 11 30 01 13 09 39 048 5 2056 01210904 Scorpion60ImgCapDev cpp 1491 Scorpion60ImageCaptureDevice Grayscale Store Complete Image storage is complete 11 30 01 13 09 39 058 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 302 DiskArbiter Run checking queue 11 30 01 13 09 53 539 5 2056 01210904 vid1 Scorpion60ImgCapDev cpp 1340 Scorpion60ImageCaptureDevice Grayscale Store Start 11 30 01 13 09 53 549 5 2056 01210904 ImgCapDev cpp 221 ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Complete 11 30 01 13 09 53 549 5 2056 01210904 vid1 ImgCapDev cpp 206 ImageCaptureDevice Change Operating Mode Start Start image transfer process again 11 30 01 13 09 53 700 5 2056 01210904 vid1 ImgCapDev cpp 2453 Image submittal started 11 30 01 13 09 53 700 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 701 DiskArbiter Writing image to queue 11 30 01 13 09 53 740 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 302 DiskArbiter Run checking queue 11 30 01 13 09 53 740 5 2056 01210904 ImgCapDev cpp 2525 Image submittal finished 11 30 01 13 09 53 740 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 352 DiskArbiter Run done checking queue 11 30 01 13 09 53 750 5 2051 01211160 DiskArbiter cpp 306 DiskArbiter Run popping data from queue 11 30 01 13 09 53 750 5 2056 01210904 ImgCapDev cpp
414. tatus started ss sendCommand cpp 233 LIT Send Command Sta FP 1 dim cpp 2065 SendCommand To ccpacket Sta FP 1 ccpacket cpp 595 SuperSet putPacket Sending packet Sta FP 10eel ccpacket cpp 89 Packet clearAck Clearing Ack Nack flags ccpacket cpp 57 Packet signalAck Ack received ccpacket cpp 402 Warn SuperSet getPacket End of packet Sta Y Ready LTIADB ss sendCommand cpp 270 LIT Get Response Sta Y Ready LT LaserImager cpp 778 CLaserImager Close starts thread 0x201392935 1200 dim cpp 1786 Dim Stop starts SMessage cpp 80 in SMessage close SMessage cpp 72 in SMessage SMessage SMessage cpp 80 in SMessage close dim cpp 1288 Dim DeleteDataConnection starts LaserImager cpp 791 CLaserImager Close ends currentFilmSize E14X17 currentFilmType BLUE sheetsLeft 103 printerStatus PR Normal fpStatus FP Ready imsStatus IMS Normal availableMemory 33548288 bytes CLaserImager GetPrinterStatusHelper returns 5 SUCCESS LaserImager cpp 1353 LaserImager cpp 1356 LaserImager cpp 1358 LaserImager cpp 1361 LaserImager cpp 1367 Ja LaserImager cpp 1364 Laserlmager cpp 1370 Laserlmager cpp 1373 Destination cpp 2739 GetMinBandSeparation using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 Destination cpp 2956 GetMinImageSeparation
415. terface 8 mb 2 2 MODALITY SERVERS only See Figures 12 aes BOARD ae 150LC interface 10 and 12 11 The BOARDS can be used in any combination installed in slots 4 mmm La 5 3E2429 BOARD Ethernet 10 100baseT Secondary PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 13 3E2429 replaces 3H8075 _ SP6E7386 BOARD COPCIL PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 14 SP74040182136 BOARD FOPCIL PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 15 2 4017 BOARD optical interface CPOI PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 16 Lc INN BOARD ann channel video 60 interface 12 4 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Figure 12 3 MIM 200 1 GHz BOARDS H180_0098HCA H180_0098HC BOARD video adapter Covered by plate Used in all MIM 200s Not stocked Used in MIM 200s manufactured with software earlier than 6 0 See Figure 12 8 e SP6E5193 BOARD network isolation See Figure 12 12 Required in EEC countries in 5E2762 BOARD 5422 serial interface 8 channel Used all MIM 200s See Figure 12 9 4 5 2119 BOARD digital interface 8 mb 2 2 MODALITY SERVERS only See Figures 12 SP4E9916 BOARD BOARD video 150LC interface 0 4 150LC interface 10 and 12 11 The BOARDS can be used in NN 524 BOARD I channel video 60 interface ind ee installed in slots 4 and 5 5 3E2429 BOARD Ethernet 10 100baseT Secondary PRINT SERVERS only See Figure 12 13 3E2429 replaces 3H8
416. th IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 Ifthe MIM 200 connects to an imager by an RS 422 copper cable the MIM 200 and the imager do not comply with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 and are not approved for the patient contact environment e Ifthe MIM 200 receives images from an image source that does not comply with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 the MIM 200 and all connected imagers are not approved for the patient contact environment Any device the chain that is not approved for patient contact invalidates approval for each device Any setup other than that shown in the Setup Diagram on page 14 5 does not comply with IEC 60601 1 1 EN 60601 1 1 For any of the scenarios described above the following MDD statement applies 1 83 6 ft 2 5m 8 ft English EUROPEAN MARKET ONLY This device is not medical equipment according to EN 60601 1 and must therefore not enter the Patient Environment as defined in EN 60601 1 1 The following requirements have to be met 1 Distance from device to Patient Contact Equipment see illustration Horizontal 1 83 metres Vertical 2 5 metres above the floor under the patient 2 Contact of patient and device simultaneously by caregiver not allowed 3 NO direct electrical connection between device and Patient Contact Environment is allowed AUTHORISED AGENT Manager Product Safety Kodak GmbH Hedelfingerstr 54 56 70327 Stuttgart GERMANY 14 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Warnings and Cautions
417. that are necessary to set up the MIM as a device on the network amp Important The Remote Access Service RAS provides IP addresses for clients enabling access to other MIMs on the network See the Network Administrator for RAS IP Addresses 2 IP Addresses per site are necessary on the same subnet as the MIM 1 for the MIM and 1 for the client 1 At the MIM Service Application window select Configure gt Network Network Configuration Node Name SCU Tie MIM IP Address 23 123 123 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address Transceiver UTP ias Begin Address 143 38 140 200 End IP Address 143 38 140 201 Cancel 2 Determine from the customer the information to enter in the MIM Network Configuration window 3 See Table 7 2 for descriptions of the parameters in the MIM Network Configuration window Node Name Identifies the MIM on the Local Area Network LAN The Node Name is also the AE Title for a MODALITY SERVER See Network Administrator P Address See Network Administrator Subnet mask See Network Administrator Gateway Address See Network Administrator RAS Server Begin and End IP Addresses See Network Administrator The 2 addresses must be sequential and the End IP Address must be higher than the Begin IP Address 4 If you changed any information click OK and update the LABEL on the side of the MIM
418. that is approximately linear in brightness with the different minimum t values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values 4000 3500 S000 2500 2000 1 _ ee 2 EE ES ENERO 4500 ge puppe 1000 l c axe e Lcx 1 I1 Lr Lr aoe i EEE a e peg pre prz Emu pe e p p pre g Lebe EE me Es E EE pe ee 20 40 Bl au 100 Input 1 SIEFLS7C A slight modification to the SIEFL87B TFT Set designed to match as closely as possible the latest Siemens requirements for the Fluorospot DSA 4000 3500 peres a a se pepe cs Ee mt ies eerie Lm nies S000 2500 Ss nnm een m 1500 1000 spp T eS A 2201 CS AS GB 20 40 BO au 100 Input 7 8 28 NOV 2003 8E8820 Obtaining Optimum Images
419. the Spacebar on a KEYBOARD Press the Menu key until the screen displays Exit Press the Down Arrow key until gt points to Exit Press the Menu key Press the Down Arrow key until gt points to Confirm Restore Press the Menu key to begin the system restore Backing up from the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check that the CONFIGURATION DISKETTE is loaded in the FLOPPY DRIVE of the MIM Press MAIN MENU on the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD Press SERVICE Press BACKUP CONFIGURATION The screen will display DISKETTE OK Press EXECUTE BACKUP The screen will display BACKUP STATUS IN PROGRESS then BACKUP STATUS COMPLETED Press RETURN gt Note The Restore function is not available on the TOUCHSCREEN KEYPAD 4 2 NOV 2003 8E8820 Upgrading MIM Software Setting Up the BIOS BIOS Setup Functions Version 6 1 software is on a CD ROM for all MIMs For all MIMs using software stored on CD ROM the BIOS must be set up to boot from CD ROM MIM 200s below serial number 100600 were set up to boot from the HDD DRIVE Before V 6 1 software can be loaded on any MIM 200 below serial number 100600 the BIOS for the MIM must be set up to boot from CD ROM For many of these MIMs the BIOS was changed when Version 5 0 or 5 2 MIM software was loaded However if you are upgrading a MIM200 in this group that currently has a software level below Version 5 0 check the
420. the gain and offset values a Use the MOUSE to click and drag a rectangle around an ROI You must drag the MOUSE from the top left position of the ROI to the bottom right position of the ROI b Release the MOUSE click The uncompressed image displays 11 If gain and offset are still not acceptable advance to the next procedure to adjust gain and offset Adjusting Gain and Offset 1 At the Video Board Setup window click Gain amp Offset Parameters Channel 25 Coarse Offset Coarse Offset 128 128 128 Fine Offset Fine Offset 128 E E Coarse Gair Coarse 28 28 128 Fine Gain 438 Fine 129 128 128 LF Cable Compensation 128 LF Cable Compensation 128 128 128 HF Cable Compensation 128 HF Cable Compensation 1282 128 128 Auto Offset Auto Gain Auto Auto Gain Manual Adjustment Tool Cancel VIDEO 60 AND 150LC BOARD VIDEO 60 and 150LC RGB Color Monochrome i Gain and Offset Parameters x Coarse Offset Manual Adjustment Tool L E Fine Offset 25 Coarse 1 Fine Gain 138 Amp Offset 150 Auto Level cancel VIDEO 150 BOARD 2 Select the necessary dialog box See Table 7 14 3 Enter the changes and select OK 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 37 SERVICE MANUAL 4 At the Video Board Setup window select Set Parameters 5 View the image and repeat the adjustment as necess
421. the target MIM The SA Console contains several screens that are used to comfigure the Privacy functions to meet customer requirements A service provider can also access the Security Administrator Console using a MONITOR KIT if he she has Security Administrator privledges Starting Internet Explorer from the MIM desktop automatically brings up the Security Administrator Console web page For detailed instructions for using the Security Adminitrator Console see User Guide 8E9002 Security and Privacy Features for the MIM 100 MIM 200 and 25 PS Accessing the Security Administrator Console from a Remote COMPUTER To open the SA Console for a MIM you must have e remote COMPUTER connected on the same network a the target MIM The IP Address of the target MIM The username and password for the SA Console on the target MIM On a newly installed V 6 0 and above MIM or after V 6 0 and above software is installed on a MIM the username and password are Username SA Password PASSWORD Access Procedure 1 Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER or other COMPUTER with Internet Explorer to the same network as the MIM 2 Launch Internet Explorer 3 In the Internet Explorer Address Box type in http aaa bbb ccc ddd where aaa bbb ccc ddd is the IP Address of the MIM SECURITY ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE Unauthorized use is prohibited By Use of ar amp ccess to this system users consent to monitoring and review of their use in accordance wit
422. tically 2 Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V 2 0 on the LAPTOP COMPUTER a Double click Laptop Basic b Double click Setup c Click Next in each of the 4 screens that display d Click Finish NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Important In Step 3 1 1f the LAPTOP COMPUTER displays the message Missing DLL click OK to complete the installation This message does not indicate a malfunction 3 Install the DATA ACCESS OBJECTS DAO FILES V_ 3 0 a Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel b Open Add Remove Programs Click Install Next Browse d At the C prompt double click the C prompt and then open the folder Program Files e Open 1 KHID 2 DAO f Double click Setup exe g Check that the Run Installation Program window displays C Program Files K HID DAO Setup exe h Click e Finish Next i At the message DAO Setup Complete click OK To check your work select Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Program Note The screen displays Data Access Objects DAO 3 0 if the software is correctly installed 4 Install the SERVICE SOFTWARE V AI 8 a Double click S sw al 8 b Double click Setup c Click Yes d Click Finish 5 Install the LAPTOP COMPUTER BASIC SOFTWARE V_ 3 0 on the LAPTOP COMPUTER a Double click Laptop30 b Doub
423. ties that match as closely as possible a table of target densities desired by Lorad in order to match the density vs input characteristics of an Agfa printer The table of densities 1 e as measured on an Agfa film is as follows Desired Densities vs Step Numbers Step Number Desired Optical Density 1 3 65 2 2 67 3 247 4 1 82 5 1 54 6 1 31 7 1 13 8 0 97 9 0 84 10 0 70 11 0 59 12 0 49 13 0 41 14 0 32 15 0 25 16 0 20 17 0 16 8 36 2003 8 8820 Obtaining Optimum Images The desired densities are converted into desired t values for the central curve 6 by WARP15 program import function In an actual 8610 print t values are mapped into the available density range of the 8300 LASER IMAGER 1 from approximately 0 20 film Dmin to approximately 3 5 using the highest density 8300 setting A small range of brightness is provided in this ULUT set Brightness increases as the contrast setting is increased from 1 through 12 LORADO04 Similar to the LORADO3 ULUT Set that was created for Lorad but with one difference In the LORAD03 ULUT Set curve 12 is the brightest of all 12 ULUTS in the relatively tight set In the LORADO4 ULUT Set curve 12 is linear 1 a straight line As a result in the LORADO04 ULUT Set curve 12 contrast setting 12 can be used 8300 LASER IMAGER that is set to linear in density gamma mode to print images with a linear in density overall response SIECTS83C A tight
424. ting with pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE Using Live Console Logs The preceding procedures describe use of the Activity History Log and the Error History Log which allow the FE to view logs of system operations that have occurred in the past The following paragraphs provide information for viewing logs of operations as the operations occur The console log subsystems are the same as those for the Activity History Logs Figure 11 2 indicates the sources of data for the logs Figure 11 2 Console Log Data Sources Service Keypad ae Service SERVER PRINTER DICOM over H E MODALITY Ethernet 8 y SERVER 52 a 4 ADw 0 A MODALITY Grayscale Video Autofilming gt Services Services Delivery General V MODALITY SERVER Service H180_3031DC 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 15 SERVICE MANUAL To View the Logs 1 Connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the MIM 2 Start the pcAnywhere application and connect with the MIM The MIM desktop will display on the LAPTOP COMPUTER 25 pcANY Remote Network Interface lt Ready Active Jobs U Open Associations 0 Check Queue 1 3 From the Remote Network Interface menu bar select Logging amp I
425. tion software into the LAPTOP COMPUTER gt Note The name and level of the Service Application and the Software License Agreement will display Software License Agreement al Please read the following License Agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest af the agreement Warning This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of iE may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If vau choose Setup will clase To install MIM Service Application 5 0 61 a you must accept this agreement lt Back 3 Read the Licensing Agreement and click Yes The software will begin loading 4 When the icon displays click e File Close Setup Complete Setup has finished installing the application on your computer You may launch the application by selecting the icons installed Click Finish to complete Setup 5 When the Setup Complete screen displays click Finish The new MIM Service Application version will now display on the Start gt Programs list of the LAPTOP COMPUTER 6 Advance to Installing pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE on Page 2 21 2 20 NOV 2003 8E8820 Tools Hardware and Software Ins
426. tions Will the MODALITY SERVER be connected to Setting Up the MODALITY SERVER for a HIS RIS Gateway on page an HIS RIS Gateway Page 7 68 Has the FOOTSWITCH been modified for the Setting Up MODALITY SERVER for the MODALITY Store MODALITY Store Option Option on page Page 7 75 Have you finished setting up the MODALITY Section 8 Obtaining Optimum Images SERVER Parameter Tables amp Important e Do not modify any of the items in the following tables for a qualified destination unless directed to by the TSC If an item is not checked in the Supported Items or Media Information window the customer will not be able to access that item e The KEYPAD will not display features or functions that are not allowed 7 48 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Table 7 17 General Parameters for Print Destinations General Logical N ame IP Address Database M ame gt Model 5100 uf Memory Cancel Description Range Logical Name Site specific name for a particular Destination The 1 9 alphanumeric characters KEYPAD displays this name when the operator selects No spaces allowed Destination The MIM requires a logical name that is Underscores are allowed unique across all currently installed destinations IP Address This Site specific address that uniquely identifies the 4 fields of 0 255 where each field is will be blank
427. to 25 PS 8E2284 TL 5371 or MIM 100 10 EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE Used to upgrade new software for MIM 100 TL 5651 11 EXTENDER POWER CONNECTOR Used with EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE for TL 5652 MIM 100 12 RIBBON CABLE Used with EXTERNAL CD ROM DRIVE for MIM 100 5 2908 13 TELEPHONE CORD None LAPTOP COMPUTER This primary service tool includes Windows 98 Windows 2000 or Windows NT SOFTWARE an Ethernet BOARD and a MODEM The LAPTOP COMPUTER can connect to the MIM with a SERIAL CABLE a MODEM or a local area network It is used to run the MIM Service Application which is used to configure the MIM run diagnostics view the logs and do other functions MONITOR KIT The MONITOR KEYBOARD and MOUSE in this KIT connect to the MIM and can directly access the Windows 2000 DESKTOP and the MIM files including the logs The MONITOR KIT is used to configure the MIM BIOS and to diagnose MIM database or hardware Windows 2000 problems that the MIM Service Application cannot diagnose Because the MIM Service Application is stored in the MIM as well as on the LAPTOP COMPUTER the Service Application can be accessed directly in the MIM with the MONITOR KIT Software Tools For MIM service the following software tools must be installed on your LAPTOP COMPUTER Item Part Number 1 Service LAPTOP Software for MIM Based Products 7 6051 2 Service Application Software V 6 1 installed on LAPTOP COMPUTER 8E9823
428. to Offset Decreasing coarse auto offset xx Auto Gain Increasing coarse gain xx Auto Pixel Clock Computing derivatives xx Auto Horizontal Finding right black border Auto Vertical Finding top black border b Select Set Parameters c At the Video Board Setup window select Acquire to display the test image d Check the image for ghosting If ghosting is excessive advance to the cable compensation adjustment on the next page If ghosting is not excessive advance to Checking Image Quality on Page 7 35 Note Ghosting is best observed in the areas of the image where the largest pixel value transition from black to white or white to black occurs 6 F Ghosting occurs only for transitions in the horizontal direction or the VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD a Wait about 2 minutes until the Status line in the Video Board Setup window displays the message Auto Board Setup Complete The Status line shows each of the 9 setup tasks when they occur See Table 7 13 If Auto Setup does not finish see Help Files Autosetup Failures b Select Set c Advance to Checking Image Quality on Page 7 35 Table 7 13 The 9 Tasks Completed During Auto Setup for the VIDEO 150 INTERFACE BOARD No Tasks Displayed in Status Line Associated Parameter Window Field 1 Input source sync auto set Video Sync Parameters Auto Hsync and A
429. ts a linear in density PRINTER The following table defines how the 15 TFTs can best be applied to the various MODALITIES supported by this TFT Set Contrast Setting No Application 1 Fuji CR with Dmax 2 6 2 Fuji CR with Dmax 2 7 3 Fuji CR with Dmax 2 8 4 Fuji CR with Dmax 2 9 5 Fuji CR with Dmax 3 0 6 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 7 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 8 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 9 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 10 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 11 Ultrasound highest mid tone brightness 12 Ultrasound moderate mid tone brightness 13 Ultrasound CT or MR 14 CT or MR 15 AS pg n EE Erg pes p GA ses HERI FEN Sms al Ser PEERS SEX ems em emm Sa Sis em 3500 E ER EG IS me IEEE i Ee a en Le ere Le en omes pce EE ee 5 ae rs en v ova e es on nn A pi im ER Ee 2500 SS zu ILE TREE a
430. tween two Not applicable Page 2 15 Page 2 17 computers and Set Up the SERIAL PORT 7 Create a Dial Up Networking Icon for the Page 2 12 Page 2 16 Page 2 18 SERIAL PORT 8 Create Dial Up Networking Icons for MODEM Page 2 13 Page 2 16 Page 2 18 Connections 9 Install SecureLink Client software See SecureLink documentation on Service Apps CD 10 Request and Install a Digital Certificate for See SecureLink documentation on Service Apps CD SecureLink 11 Install latest MIM Service Application Software Page 2 20 Page 2 20 Page 2 20 12 Install pcAnywhere Page 2 21 Page 2 21 Page 2 21 13 Create a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere Page 2 21 Page 2 21 Page 2 21 gt Note LAPTOP COMPUTERS with an official Kodak image will have items 1 2 and 4 through 7 completed Steps 9 through 11 will not be part of the image until after August 2003 Installing the Service LAPTOP COMPUTER Software for MIM Based Products This procedure applies to LAPTOP COMPUTERS with Windows 98 Windows 2000 or Windows NT For this procedure you will need the CD 7E6051 The table on Page 2 4 lists the software components on this CD that you will install To install this CD do the procedure that starts after the table on Page 2 4 Important See the table on Page 2 4 for the correct order for installing the software 8E8820 NOV 2003 2 3 SERVICE MANUAL Table 2 2 Loading the Service
431. uence Beep Codes Troubleshooting The Basic Input Output System BIOS controls the start up configuration of the MIM Because the MIM does not include a KEYBOARD and MONITOR the BIOS provides features which allow the FE to Listen to a sequence of beeps that provide feedback of error conditions during Power On Self Test POST Use the LAPTOP COMPUTER to observe error messages and Power On Self Test POST information gt Note The 25 PS does not use beep codes Table 11 2 MIM 100 and MIM 200 667MHz Beep Codes during Power On Self Test e The busy signal of the HARD DRIVE CONTROLLER did not go low in a finite period of time The read write did not verify nitialization failed ncorrect parameters nterrupt was expected or data request signal did not arrive within a finite period of time Beeps Malfunction and Cause Recommended Action Error Messages 0 SPEAKER malfunction MIM boots Check the SPEAKER None Power or CPU BOARD MIM does not boot Repair the power malfunction or install a new CPU BOARD 1 No malfunction The BIOS successfully None None completed initialization of all onboard and external devices 2 CMOS The boot process automatically e CMOS Settings Configuration error stops The LAPTOP COMPUTER Wrong Checksum error youto do the AMIBIOS CMOS Checksum l Setup Go to Section 4 and do the Bad e Battery low or malfunctioned procedure Conf
432. umber on the Serial Plate decal on the MIM 1 6 alphanumeric characters Model Indicates the type of equipment For PRINT SERVERS MIM 200 25 PS Service Code Indicates the service code of the equipment Power On Hours The number of hours that the MIM has been energized The software updates this number every hour This value is used for product reliability analysis 1 6 numeric digits Service Phone Number Telephone number of the local Technical Support Center 1 800 328 2910 For the U S only 0 20 alphanumeric characters NT Product ID Product ID for setting up the license for the Windows NT operating system Must be unique for each MIM 4 alphanumeric fields field 1 5 characters field 2 3 characters field 3 7 characters field 4 5 characters MIM Application Version This is a view only field Shows the version level of the application software For example 5 0b12 3 19 alphanumeric characters Ist number release level Letter development level alpha or beta Last number sequence number for successive release levels Keypad Interfaces Viewable only Delivery Interfaces The type of output board installed along with the service code serial number board revision and firmware level Serial number only 1 6 alphanumeric characters 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the Network Address of the PRINT SERVER
433. ur LAPTOP COMPUTER to take control of a connected MIM When pcAnywhere is connected to a target MIM the Windows 2000 DESKTOP of the MIM displays on the LAPTOP COMPUTER screen You can then use the keyboard and mouse of the LAPTOP COMPUTER to control the MIM pcAnywhere allows direct access to the Windows 2000 DESKTOP and the files on the MIM including the logs pcAnywhere can be used to diagnose MIM database or hardware Windows 2000 problems that the MIM Service Application cannot diagnose The MIM Service Application can also be used through pcAnywhere The pcAnywhere software must be installed on both the MIM and the LAPTOP COMPUTER In the MIM pcAnywhere is defaulted to Host which means that the MIM is ready to take a call from the LAPTOP COMPUTER at any time pcAnywhere is installed in all MIMs at the factory You must install pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER as described on Page 2 21 To use pcAnywhere first connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the target MIM using SecureLink and any of the connection methods described on Page 2 23 Then you can start pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER and make a pcAnywhere connection to the target MIM Starting pcAnywhere on your LAPTOP COMPUTER To use this procedure you must have created a pcAnywhere remote connection item on your LAPTOP COMPUTER See Creating a Remote Connection Item for pcAnywhere on Page 2 21 1 Connect to the target MIM Use any of the methods listed in
434. us imsStatus IMS Normal availableMemory 16515072 bytes LaserImager cpp 1373 CLaserImager GetPrinterStatusHelper returns S SUCCESS Destination cpp 2728 GetMinBandSeparation linesPerPage 2670 linesPerBand 1326 Laserlmager cpp 1353 11 29 01 13 25 24 154 5 11 29 01 13 25 24 184 5 11 29 01 13 25 24 204 5 11 29 01 13 25 24 234 5 11 29 01 13 25 24 264 5 11 29 01 13 25 24 294 6 11 29 01 13 25 24 325 4 numBandsPerPage 2 11 29 01 13 25 24 355 3 Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 4 returns 18 11 29 01 13 25 24 375 4 Destination cpp 2945 GetMinImageSeparation colsPerBand 2736 colsPerImage 1356 numImagesPerBand 2 11 29 01 13 25 24 405 3 Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 4 returns 24 11 29 01 13 25 24 445 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 136 Render Begin Begin to render page 11 29 01 13 25 24 475 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 137 Media Size 1 29 01 13 25 24 505 4 DICOM PageBuilder cpp 138 Film Base 1 11 29 01 13 25 24 535 4 11 29 01 13 25 24 555 4 11 29 01 13 25 24 585 4 11 29 01 13 25 24 615 4 11 29 01 13 25 24 635 4 11 29 01 13 25 24 665 4 numBandsPerPage 2 11 29 01 13 25 24 695 3 Destination cpp 2745 GetMinBandSeparation model 8300 pageFormat 4 returns 18 11 29 01 13 25 24 725 4 Destination cpp 2945 GetMinImageSeparation colsPerBand 2736 colsPerlmage 1356 numImagesPerBand
435. using MIMDUI separation Destination cpp 2962 GetMinImageSeparation model 8700 pageFormat 1 returns 2 LaserImager cpp 324 CLaserImager NewPrintJob starts LaserImager cpp 702 CLaserImager Open starts maxRetries 100retryWaitSeconds 9 Laserlmager cpp 740 Got LIT Open Mutex LaserImager cpp 745 lit init is done LaserImager cpp 768 lit open successful LaserImager cpp 770 CLaserImager Open returns true PrintJob h 47 CPrintJob FinalConstruct this 0x20139293513153104 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LaserImager cpp 369 CLaserImager NewPrintJob returns S SUCCESS 11 43 SERVICE MANUAL 09 50 00 812 4 8191 000677206 09 50 00 842 3 8191 000677206 09 50 00 883 4 8191 000677206 09 50 00 923 3 8191 000677206 09 50 00 963 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 003 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 043 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 083 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 123 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 153 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 193 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 233 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 273 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 313 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 353 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 383 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 423 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 463 5 8191 000000000 Media BW DryB E14x17267A 09 50 01 503 5 8191 000000000 09 50 01 543 6 8191 000000000 09 50 01 574 6 8191 000
436. ut J7 Csync In J7 Blue Out J8 Csync Out J8 Sync Out H180 0034DCA H180 0034DC 4E9916 BOARD video 150LC interface 3H8796 CABLE s60 3 channel B W video 3H8797 CABLE B W video adapter 8 in 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 13 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 12 NETWORK ISOLATION BOARD MIM 200 o oo gO oooU0 J1 J3 E mm us ca Z oon 70 m O 4 con a A E C 3 CO A z Q C O gt oon UJ O gt JJ J H180 0105GC 2 SP5E2914 CABLE network isolation Not illustrated 12 14 NOV 2003 8E8820 Illustrated Parts List Figure 12 13 Ethernet BOARDS and CABLES MIM 200 and 25 PS H CROSSOVER L 8 H180_0092DCA H180_0092DC 3H8075 BOARD Ethernet 10 100baseT For MIM 200 Being replaced by Item 2 3E2429 BOARD Ethernet 10 100baseT For PACS LINK 25 and MIM 200 CABLE Ethernet Crossover 10 Not furnished with MIM Available for order 3E1581 CABLE Ethernet Crossover For MIM 200 to KELI 160 8E2249 CABLE Ethernet Crossover 3 m Furnished with PACS LINK 25 8E8820 NOV 2003 12 15 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 12 14 COPPER OUTPUT COPCIL BOARD and CABLES MIM 200 and 25 PS 1 Zo em p P LJ M 7131 i ala E U14 U8 u10 L L l a 1 1 le C L 3 __ ua 1 1 d
437. uto Vsync 2 PLL control voltage auto set Pixel Clock Parameters Auto Control Voltage 3 PCLK to Hsync auto align Pixel Clock Parameters Auto Hsync to Clock 4 Gains and offsets auto level Gain and Offset Parameters Auto Level 5 Horizontal auto framing Horizontal Parameters Auto Horizontal Centering 6 PCLK to Data Phase auto align Pixel Clock Parameters Auto Pixel Clock 7 Horizontal auto framing Horizontal Parameters Auto Horizontal Centering 8 Vertical auto framing Vertical Parameters Auto Vertical Centering 9 Auto setup end Indicates completion of Auto Setup 7 32 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a MODALITY SERVER Cable Compensation Adjustment for VIDEO 60 and 150LC INTERFACE BOARDS Warning This procedure should not be done unless it is absolutely necessary Noise or other artifacts can be induced if the adjustment is not done properly Important VIDEO CABLE lengths are from 2 to 45 meters with 10 meters the standard length For a long CABLE the compensation may have to be increased For a short CABLE the compensation may have to be decreased 1 At the Video Board Setup window set the Image Compression value to None 2 Acquire a test image 3 In the image viewer window determine the line number you wish to view and move the cursor to this line 4 At the Video Board Setup window click Gain amp Offset Parameters 5 At the Gain and Offset Parameters
438. ventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x39 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 07 215 6 DICOM CKScreen cpp 327 CKScreen OnUpButtonPressed called 11 29 01 13 37 07 385 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 1504 CK received the command Oxffffffb9 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 18 001 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x41 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 18 031 6 DICOM CKScreen cpp 374 CKScreen OnDownButtonPressed called 11 29 01 13 37 18 181 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 1504 CK received the command Oxffffffcl from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 19 783 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0x38 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 19 813 6 DICOM CK MenuScreen cpp 52 CKMenuScreen constructor called 11 29 01 13 37 19 853 6 DICOM CK SServiceMenu cpp 62 CKSServiceMenu constructor called 11 29 01 13 37 20 004 6 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 355 CK received the command 0xb8 from the frame processor 11 29 01 13 37 20 044 4 DICOM ConventionalKeypad cpp 468 Unknown command received 0xb8 1 1 11 26 2003 8 8820 Troubleshooting 11 29 01 13 37 26 273 6 11 29 01 13 37 26 313 6 11 29 01 13 37 26 343 7 11 29 01 13 37 26 473 6 11 29 01 13 37 26 513 4 11 29 01 13 37 29 988 6 11 29 01 13 37 30 018 6 DICOM 11 29 01 13 37 30 178 6 DICO DICOM 11 29 01 13 37
439. ver there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver 15 connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Caution The Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGERS 100 and 200 have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules Those limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Caution General External Cleaning This equipment may be cleaned with a damp cloth using water with mild detergent or commercial electron
440. ving the CD ROM DRIVE or FLOPPY DRIVE remove all 6 SCREWS 3 Detach the RIBBON CABLE S and POWER CABLE S from the drive See Figure 0 1 4 Lift the DRIVE out of the DRIVE BAY Position the new DRIVE in the DRIVE BAY 5 Secure the DRIVE to the DRIVE BAY with the SCREWS 6 Replace the MIM COVER and secure it with the SCREW 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 1 SERVICE MANUAL Figure 0 1 Replacing the Hard Drives H180_3041GC Connecting to a MIM To use the troubleshooting procedures in this section you must connect your Laptop Computer to the MIM using the SecureLink authentication and encryption software For step by step connection procedures see Connecting Your LAPTOP COMPUTER to a MIM on Page 2 23 Finding an Unknown MIM IP Address 1 Use pcAnywhere REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE or a MONITOR KIT to access the MIM Windows 2000 desktop 2 Log on to Windows Press the C A D icon for the pcAnywhere application Press Ctrl Alt Del for the MONITOR KIT 3 Enter Username PACSLinkIP Password NetServer gt Note A SecureLink session ID 15 not required 4 Click OK The ipconfig utility will run and display current network settings for the MIM 5 Press C A D to return to the Windows log on screen Tools for Troubleshooting The main tools for troubleshooting MIMs are the MIM Service Application and pcAnywhere The MIM Service Application is the primary tool for troubleshooting S
441. window click Manual Adjustment Tool Note The Manual Gain Offset window can be used to display 1 line of video as a linear graph to aid in adjusting the cable compensation parameters Center 274 127 oor Bu B anual Gain Offset AGB Channel Select Hed 250 3 ain Liffset Settings Coarse Offset 102 24 Fine Offset 125 4 Coarse Gain 131 2d Fine Gain poy 1284 Ne m 1284 225 200 175 15 125 100 75 Pixel Plot Line Number 128 50 Flot Sirgle 25 D Cancel 6 Enter the line number selected in Step 3 into the Line Number dialog box and click Set Acquire and Plot 8E8820 NOV 2003 7 33 SERVICE MANUAL gt Note You can zoom in on the transition by placing the cursor on the area and clicking the left mouse button You can use the right mouse button to zoom back out 7 See Figure 7 11 to determine whether compensation needs to be increased or decreased Note that the HF High Frequency adjustment affects primarily the first pixel after the transition and the LF Low Frequency adjustment affects multiple pixels after the transition 8 Change compensation values in small increments in the LF or HF Cable Compensation box Never increase or decrease a value by more than 10 before viewing the results gt Note The range of adjustment is 0 255 and the normal setting for both HF and LF compensation is 128 Decreas
442. window select Configure gt Destination Installed Destinations Address Default Direct Conn HARD DISK Default Update Configuration Add Modify Delete C gt Note With any type of CABLE a printing or imaging destination connected to the MIM is a direct connection 2 At the Installed Destinations window select the sequence Add Print Direct Qualified 6 12 NOV 2003 8E8820 Setting Up a PRINT SERVER Choose a New Direct Print Destination eeU0 8500 eel s ean 363HU DMI 1200 Dk cnn Cancel 3 At the Choose a New Direct Print Destination window select the correct PRINTER and click OK Logical Name SCP AE Title IF Address 100108100440 Database Name Model oeni uf Memory MegaPisels 3 Destinatar gt anions DECOM Cancel Important The information in the General parameters window depends on the destination PRINTER The window in the figure is for an 8200 LASER IMAGER destination on an Ethernet cable See Table 6 4 General Parameters on Page 6 21 for descriptions of all parameters that can be displayed The Logical Name for a PRINT SERVER is also the AE Title for the PRINTER 4 Atthe General parameters window enter Logical Name User defined This is the AE Title the SCU should target P Addr
443. xel Correct Disabled TCP IP Gateway Not applicable Mag Scaling Enabled Digital Configuration Optics Default Pixels per Line Not applicable Translation Speed Follow on screen instructions Default Lines per Image Not applicable SOP Delay Pixel Depth 8 or 12 Pixel Stretch Not adjustable Header Mode Header Line Facet to Stretch Parity Even SOS Delay Communications Laser Dead Time Parity Even SOS Level Stop Bits 1 Laser Dynamic Range Follow on screen instructions Baud Rate 1200 EOM CR PRI to DCR PAS 0 Protocol 952 P2 DCR to DCR PAS 0 Memory Full Message MOV P3 STP to STC 0 Alarm Mode Old P4 EXP to DCR EOE 0 Acquire Timeout 25 5 EOE to PTC 0 0 8E8820 NOV 2003 SERVICE MANUAL Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER To set up an 8200 LASER IMAGER that connects to a MIM use MPC to enter the values for the following parameters gt Note To connect the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the 8200 LASER IMAGER through the customer network and the MIM you must start Internet Explorer IE and in the IE address window enter the IP Address of the MIM followed by the socket number 4080 of the connection For example 149 98 202 200 4080 Parameter Value Network Configuration 8200 TCP IP Address 100 100 100 40 8200 TCP IP Net Mask 255 255 255 0 8200 TCP IP Gateway 0 0 0 0 DICOM Parameters SCU AE Title MIM for example This is the Node N
444. xit the BIOS setup 8 Reboot Then re ghost the MIM 8E8820 NOV 2003 4 5 SERVICE MANUAL Setting Up the BIOS for the MIM 200 1 GHz This version of MIM will come from the factory set to boot from CD ROM The following procedure is provided in case the BIOS 15 corrupted 1 Check that the configuration is saved to FLOPPY DISKETTE 2 Shut down the MIM from the MIM Service Application or the KEYPAD 3 De energize the MIM 4 Attach the MONITOR KIT to the MIM See Using a MONITOR KIT to Access the MIM in Section 2 5 Energize the MIM and access the Configuration Setup Utility menu for the BIOS by pressing when prompted on the MONITOR screen 6 Follow the instructions on the screen for selecting menu items and install the settings in Table 4 4 Table 4 4 Settings on the Configuration Setup Utility Menu Enable OnChip Secondary IDE default setting Set Primary Video Slot to AGP 5 Devices and I O Ports Disable OnChip sound Devices and I O Ports Disable Sound Blaster Devices and I O Ports Disable Midi Port 200 207H Start Options Startup Sequence Select CD ROM to be the First Boot Device default setting 7 10 Disable Third Boot Device 11 Set AGP Aperture Size to 64 D Disable Wake On PCIPME Disable Wake on RTC Alarm Set Power Button Mode to Instant Off default setting Set Power On After Power Loss to Last State
445. xt ctor RoutingClass cpp 10838 context State EXECUTING 1 Page cpp 1122 Entering Page SetContrastSetting 11 29 01 13 46 19 870 4 DICOM RoutingClass cpp 9021 Routing SetStandardFormat 11 29 01 13 46 19 980 4 DICOM RoutingClass cpp 9021 Routing SetStandardFormat 11 29 01 13 46 20 050 4 DICOM RoutingClass cpp 4556 Handling SetPageOrientation 11 29 01 13 46 20 080 4 DICOM 11 29 01 13 46 20 100 5 DICOM 11 29 01 13 46 20 140 2 DICOM 11 29 01 13 46 20 190 4 DICOM 11 29 01 13 46 20 291 4 DICOM 11 29 01 13 46 21 923 2 DICOM RoutingClass cpp 4556 Handling SetPageOrientation Page cpp 1122 Entering Page SetContrastSetting Page cpp 3522 Set a Pivot Density to DRY VIEW type Action is complete but has no effect RoutingClass cpp 9021 Routing SetStandardFormat RoutingClass cpp 4556 Handling SetPageOrientation Page cpp 546 Page Closed 8E8820 NOV 2003 11 27 SERVICE MANUAL 11 29 01 13 46 21 973 1 11 29 01 13 46 22 023 3 11 29 01 13 46 22 053 4 11 29 01 13 46 22 103 3 11 29 01 13 46 22 153 3 11 29 01 13 46 22 183 5 11 29 01 13 46 22 203 4 DICOM DICOM DICOM DICOM DeliveryJob cpp 2315 11 res 1 1 0 PageClosed DICOM DICOM DICOM DeliveryJob cpp 774 PrintPages DeliveryJob cpp 2315 11 rcs 0 2 2 ImageStored DeliveryJob cpp 2870 DeliveryJob state PJ CLOSED DeliveryJob cpp 2315 11 rcs 1 4 15 DocumentC
446. y Administrator If the customer uses the privacy feature added to MIM products V_ 6 0 and above the customer must appoint a security administrator who is responsible for setting up user accounts for operators and key operators Training Outline Enabling the privacy feature Accessing the Security Administrator Console Entering System Settings Password Rules Login Rules Privacy Warning Notice Entering Device Information Adding users Editing user information Changing the Security Administrator password Logging off the Security Administrator Console Enabling disabling Kodak Service Access Backing up the MIM configuration after changing the Security Administrator password or Operator passwords Note Setting up user accounts and training key operators on the log in procedures is the responsibility of the Security Administrator Leave Publication 8E9002 SECURITY AND PRIVACY FEATURES with the Security Administrator This manual serves as training reference and detailed user guide for the privacy features 9 6 NOV 2003 8E8820 Completing the Installation Mod 1 FILM MAILER for Unqualified MODALITIES The Mod 1 FILM MAILER 1s a pre paid addressed express mailer for use when servicing the MIM 100 or the MIM 200 for an unqualified MODALITY amp Important Include the following items in the Mod 1 FILM MAILER 2 clinical images from the MODALITY that you have printed using the MIM
447. y the PLL between Hsync pulses A view only field VCO Gain VIDEO 60 only Specifies the PLL VCO gain value 0 7 Default 0 Automatically calculated VCO Gain Override VIDEO 60 only Allows for override of PLL VCO gain value On Off Default Off Pixel Clock Freq VIDEO 150LC only Pixel clock rate in MHz Automatically 1 000 999 999 No default Post Scaler Divisor VIDEO 150LC only Specifies the PLL post scaler divisor value used to derive the VCO frequency This value is calculated to generate an optimized VCO frequency using the pixel clock frequency The value is calculated unless overridden 2 4 8 16 Default calculated Post Scaler Divisor Override VIDEO 150LC only Allows for override of the calculated post scaler divisor value On Off Default Off Detector Gain detector gain Automatically calculated unless overridden PLL Locked VIDEO 150LC only Indicates whether PLL is locked This On Off No default setting is refreshed each time the pixel clock parameters are sent to the BOARD Phase Frequency VIDEO 60 and 150LC only Specifies the PLL phase frequency Settings 0 7 Default 0 for VIDEO 60 6 for VIDEO 150LC direction for the PLL Do not use unless directed by the TSC Phase Frequency VIDEO 60 and VIDEO 150LC only Allows for override of the On Off Default Off Detector Gain calculated phase frequency detector gain value Override Fine Phase Adjust VIDEO 60 only Specifie
448. ys displayed as 6 upper case letters on the SecureLink screen 8 Click OK The MIM Windows DESKTOP will display on the monitor 9 Using the MONITOR KIT you now can a Start the MIM Service Application on the MIM b Open Windows EXPLORER to examine logs c Use Windows DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS 10 To start the MIM Service Application a On the MIM desktop Double click the Shortcut named mimdui b At the MIM Service Application window select Connect gt Connect to MIM NOV 2003 8E8820 Installing the Hardware Section 3 Installing the Hardware Introduction This section provides instructions for installing and setting up the following MIMs Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200 Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100 MIM 100 Kodak PACS LINK 25 PRINT SERVER 25 PS The instructions include information for connecting MIM PRINT SERVERS to the following LASER IMAGERS Kodak Ektascan 1120 LASER PRINTER Kodak Ektascan 2180 LASER PRINTER Kodak Ektascan 160 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8100 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8200 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8300 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER PLUS Kodak DryView 8500 LASER IMAGER STANDARD Kodak DryView 8600 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8610 LASER IMAGER Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER PLUS Kodak DryView 8700 LASER IMAGER STANDARD Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER Kodak DryView 969 HQ LASER IMAGER Kodak
449. yscale Video E MIM 200 PRINT KEYPAD PRINT KEYPAD Imaging Device Grayscale Video DICOM Imaging Device Grayscale Video Display MIM 200 j 8100 LASER IMAGER H180_0082EC 1 12 NOV 2003 8E8820 System Description MIM 200 and 25 Print Server Patient Environment Figure 1 6 Minimum Distance between the MIM 200 or 25 Print Server and the Patient Contact Equipment 1 83 m 6 ft 2 5m 8 ft 1 83 em 6 ft 8 8820 NOV 2003 A Warning The following installation requirements must be met worldwide for the MIM 200 and the 25 Print Server and their accessories e g keypads footswitches keyboards Refer to the illustration at the left which identifies the patient environment Minimum distance from device or accessory to Patient Contact Equipment e g Ultrasound Horizontal 1 83 m 6 ft Vertical 2 5 m 8 ft above the floor under the patient Contact of patient and device or accessory simultaneously by caregiver is not allowed Direct electrical connection between device or accessory and Patient Contact Equipment is not allowed gt Note The requirements are based on the EN60601 1 Standard amp Important The MIM 100 can be installed within the patient environment MIM 200 product placement in the European Economic Community EEC see Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 200 MIM 200

SERVICE MANUAL for the Kodak PACS LINK MEDICAL IMAGE MANAGER 100

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents